JP7185937B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a starting hole and a big winning hole are provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down, and when a game ball enters the starting hole, a special pattern is variably displayed on a special pattern display device, and a big win is achieved. When the jackpot symbols indicating the lottery result are stopped and displayed, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed. When the special symbols are variably displayed, the game effect is performed by the effect image displayed on the image display device, the sound output from the speaker, and the lighting/blinking operation of the light emitter such as the lamp.

In a conventional gaming machine, a special effect is performed to suggest the degree of expectation that a big winning game will be executed on the condition that an operation means is operated at a predetermined timing during an operation valid period. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2002-100000, when an operation prompting effect for prompting a player to operate a button is performed, a special effect suggesting a change in the game state is performed when there is an operation input of the operating means.

JP 2014-188056 A

By the way, there is still room for improvement in improving the interest of games through effects using operation means.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game by means of an effect using operating means.

The present invention has the following configurations. Note that the reference numerals indicate an example of correspondence with the constituent elements illustrated in the drawings for the purpose of promoting understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.
The gaming machine of the present invention comprises determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquiring means when a predetermined condition is satisfied; advance determination means for determining whether or not to perform the special game based on, a normal game state, and a game state control means capable of controlling a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; An effect control means capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the preliminary determination , and an operation means operable by the player , wherein the effect control means corresponds to the normal game state. It is possible to control the first production mode (normal) and the second production mode (variable probability) corresponding to the specific game state , and the first production mode (normal) and the second production mode (variable probability) , a continuous notice (effect notice effect, role object action notice effect) in which a predetermined effect (effect image, role object action) is performed over a plurality of game effects, and a vibration effect (vibration effect with operation, no operation) that vibrates the operation means Vibration effect), and the game effect is a first effect pattern (with reach) suggesting that the special game may be executed and suggesting that the special game is not executed. Any production pattern of the second production pattern (no reach) can be executed , and the second number of times is higher in the first production mode (normal) than in the second production mode (variable probability). When a continuous notice of performing a predetermined effect in the game effect of the first number of times (two times) less than (three times) is executed, the first effect pattern (with reach) is executed in the game effect of the notice target. It is easier, than when the first production mode (normal), in the second production mode (probability variation), continuous notice to perform a predetermined production in the game production of the second number of times (three times) When executed, when the first production pattern (with reach) is executed in the game production to be announced, the vibration production (vibration production at the time of successful production, vibration production at the time of pattern matching, vibration production at the time of confirmation production Vibration production) is characterized in that it is easy to execute .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to this embodiment; FIG. It is a perspective view showing a normal state, a protruded state, and a depressed state of the effect button. It is an enlarged front view of the game information display device. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a game control device. 3 is a block diagram of an image control unit; FIG. It is a diagram showing (1) a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, and (2) a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol. It is a diagram showing (1) a special symbol determination table for big hits and (2) a special symbol determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows a jackpot game control table. It is a figure which shows a big winning a prize opening-and-closing control table. It is a figure which shows a game state setting data table. It is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state. It is a diagram showing a special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving gaming state. (1) It is a figure which shows the prior determination table for non time saving gaming states, and the prior determination table for (2) time saving gaming states. (1) hit determination table for normal symbols, (2) stop design determination table for normal symbols, (3) fluctuation pattern determination table for normal symbols, (4) opening mode determination table for the second start port. It is a diagram. 4 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by a main control board; 4 is a flowchart of input control processing by a main control board; It is a flow chart of the first starting port detection switch input processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of the second start opening detection switch input processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of gate detection switch input processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of the special figure special electric control processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of special symbol memory determination processing by the main control board. It is a flowchart of a big hit determination process by the main control board. It is a flow chart of special symbol variation processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of special symbol stop processing by the main control board. It is a flowchart of a big hit game process by the main control board. It is a flowchart of special game end processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of the general figure general electric control processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart of normal symbol variation processing by the main control board. It is a flowchart of auxiliary game processing by the main control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a flow chart of the main processing by the production control unit. It is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing by the production control unit. It is a flow chart of command analysis processing by the production control unit. It is a flow chart of command analysis processing by the production control unit. It is a flow chart of continuous announcement effect determination processing by the effect control unit 130m. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a continuous announcement effect type determination table for normal mode; It is a figure which shows the continuation notice production classification determination table for probability variation / time saving mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a continuous announcement scenario determination table for normal mode; It is a figure which shows the continuation notice scenario determination table for probability variation / time saving modes. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation production pattern decision processing. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation production|presentation pattern determination table for normal modes. It is a figure which shows the variation production|presentation pattern determination table for probability variation / time saving mode. It is a flow chart which shows big hit notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the advance notice determination table before a reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a dialog announcement pattern determination table; It is a figure which shows a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows a development production|presentation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows a decided effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the information table for decision success effects. It is a figure which shows the execution start timing and end timing of determination success production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the vibration production|presentation information table for big-hit pattern matching. It is a figure which shows a re-lottery production|presentation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the execution frequency of button vibration after deciding success production|presentation is started. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a fixed effect pattern determination table; It is a figure which shows a revival effect pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a continuous advance notice effect and a step-up notice effect are executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a continuous advance notice effect and a step-up notice effect are executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a button vibration forewarning effect and a speech forewarning effect are executed; It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case pseudo-continuous production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a development production|presentation is performed and develops into SP ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a development production|presentation is performed and develops into SPSP ready-to-win production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in which cut-in production|presentation is performed during SP reach production|presentation. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of a continuation of FIG. 65; It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case determination production|presentation is performed during SPSP ready-to-win production|presentation (battle production|presentation). It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case determination production|presentation is performed during SPSP ready-to-win production|presentation (mission production|presentation). It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case promotion is successful by re-lottery production|presentation. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a continuation of FIGS. 67, 68, and 69. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation in case a revival production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of production|presentation in case setting change is carried out to time saving mode from normal mode. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production|presentation in case setting change is carried out to time saving mode from normal mode. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation at the time of operating an operation means during a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows various vibration production|presentations performed by specific production|presentation. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main control board; 4 is a flowchart showing initial setting processing by a main control board; It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process by a main control board. 4 is a flowchart showing RWM clear processing by a main control board; It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process by a main control board. 4 is a flowchart showing performance display data setting processing by a main control board; It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display device in each game area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources after setting change; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirmation of settings; 4 is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources; 9 is a flowchart showing initial setting processing by the main control board of the first modified example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting change processing by the main control board of the first modified example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing RWN clearing processing by the main control board of the first modified example; 10 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing by the main control board of the first modified example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources during preparation for RWN clearing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation; 4 is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing initial setting processing by the main control board of the second modified example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing initial setting processing by the main control board of the third modified example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources during preparation for RWN clearing; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing initial setting processing by the main control board of the fourth modified example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources after RWN clearing; It is a figure which shows an example of the process which a main-control part and an effect|presentation control part perform, when a game machine returns from a power-off state. It is a figure which shows an example of the process which a main-control part and an effect|presentation control part perform, when a game machine returns from a power-off state. It is a figure which shows an example of the process which a main-control part and an effect|presentation control part perform, when a game machine returns from a power-off state. It is a figure which shows an example of the process which a main-control part and an effect|presentation control part perform, when a game machine returns from a power-off state. It is a figure which shows an example of the process which a main-control part and an effect|presentation control part perform, when a game machine returns from a power-off state. The period from when the pachinko machine power-off state is resolved until the customer waiting image is displayed in the processing example 1, and the customer waiting image is displayed after the pachinko gaming machine power-off state is resolved in the processing example 2. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a period until the It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a modification of example 6 of variable effect; It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production|presentation in a jackpot game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of non-initialization test operation processing when a movable accessory malfunctions. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of non-initialization test operation processing when a movable accessory malfunctions. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of non-initialization test operation processing when a movable accessory malfunctions. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of non-initialization test operation processing when a movable accessory malfunctions. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the decorative design which the production|presentation control part performs using an image display part. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an event when a signal line is disconnected; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an event when a signal line is disconnected; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an event when a signal line is disconnected;

Hereinafter, this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a game machine 1 according to this embodiment.
In the pachinko game machine as the game machine 1, an opening/closing frame 2B (game frame) is attached to the outer frame 2A attached to the island structure of the game hall so as to be freely opened and closed, and an opening/closing door 3 is attached to the opening/closing frame 2B so as to be freely opened and closed. ing. A window 3a is formed in the opening/closing door 3, and a transparent plate 3b is attached to the window 3a. The left end portion of the opening/closing door 3 is supported by the left end portion of the opening/closing frame 2B so as to be rotatable about the vertical axis, and the right end portion of the opening/closing door 3 is equipped with a key cylinder 3c for locking the opening/closing door 3 to the opening/closing frame 2B. It is A game board 4 is attached to the opening/closing frame 2B, a game area 4a is formed between the game board 4 and a transparent plate 3b on the front side of the game board 4, and the game area 4a is opened and closed by an opening/closing door 3. .

The open/close door 3 includes an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker above the window 3a, a frame lighting device 27 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a storage tray 5 (receiving tray) for storing game balls below the window 3a. ) is provided, and the storage tray 5 is provided with a performance button device 6A and a selection button device 6B functioning as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various performances. At the left end of the opening/closing door 3, a performance lever device 6C is provided that functions as an input device for performing operations related to various performances.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations above the opening/closing door 3, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce music and voice effects. A plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs) of the frame lighting device 27 are provided in the peripheral portion of the window 3a. Perform lighting effects. In addition, the lighting device 27 for the frame is a notification LED that is controlled to light/blink when an opening of the opening/closing door 3 or a payout abnormality in which game balls cannot be put out from the payout device 100 (see FIG. 4) occurs. It has

The production button device 6A includes a production button 6a capable of performing a determination operation (operation input) and a button operation production, a production button detection switch 6b (see FIG. 4) for detecting a pressing operation on the production button 6a, A button drive motor 6c (see FIG. 4) for changing the production button 6a between a normal state and a projecting state positioned above the normal state, and a vibration state in which the production button 6a vibrates in a predetermined manner from the normal state. A button vibration motor 6d (see FIG. 4) for changing, and a button light emitting LED 6e (see FIG. 4) for changing the effect button 6a between a non-lighting state and a light emitting state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner are provided. A player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1 by operating the effect button 6a in a predetermined operation mode.

The production button 6a has a normal state (non-protruding state) (Fig. 2(a)), which is a normal operating position, and a protruding state (Fig. 2(b)), which protrudes to an operating position higher than the normal state. The state in which the pressing operation is detected can be changed from the normal state to the depressed state (FIG. 2(c)) that is retracted downward.

The state shown in FIG. 2(a) is a normal state in which only the tip portion slightly protrudes upward from the surrounding surface of the storage tray 5. As shown in FIG.
The state shown in FIG. 2(b) is the protruded state in which it protrudes several times (about 7 to 10 times) higher than the normal state from the surrounding surface of the storage tray 5. FIG.
2(c), it is in a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected by withdrawing slightly downward from the surrounding surface of the storage tray 5. FIG.
The effect button device 6A has a structure in which the effect button 6a can be changed into a normal state, a projecting state, and a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. When the production button 6a in the normal state or the protruding state is pressed to enter the pressed state, the pressing operation is detected, and then when the pressing operation is released, the pressed state returns to the normal state. The direction in which the production button 6a moves between the position in the normal state, the position in the protruded state, and the position in which the depression operation is detected (pressed position) is defined as the advancing/retreating direction of the production button 6a.

Predetermined operation modes of the production button 6a include "single hit" in which the production button 6a is operated once from the position of the normal state or the protruded state to the pressed position, "long press" in which the production button 6a is continuously operated to the pressed position, and production It is classified as a "continuous hit" in which the button 6a is continuously operated multiple times from the normal state position to the depressed position. It should be noted that it is possible to detect any one of the "single hit", "long press", and "continuous hits" by the effect button detection SW 6b. In the case of "long press", the duration of the long press operation is detected, and in the case of "continuous press", the number of operations is detected.

The production button 6a has a housing made of a transparent member that can transmit light, and when the button light emission LED 6e emits light in a predetermined color (white, blue, red, rainbow, etc.), the light of the predetermined color is emitted to the outside of the production button 6a. The effect button 6a is illuminated (lighted) by being transmitted.

The effect button 6a can vibrate in a predetermined effect mode (vibration time, vibration intensity, vibration pattern, etc.) by the driving force of the button vibration motor 6d. The performance button 6a can be operated even while the button vibration motor 6d is vibrating.
When it is difficult for the player to visually determine whether or not the effect button 6a is vibrating, the player can confirm the presence or absence of vibration by touching the effect button 6a.

The selection button device 6B includes a cross key button 6f (hereinafter referred to as a cross key 6f) (up key button, down key button, right key button, left key button) as selection buttons capable of performing operations such as selection operation. , and a cross key detection switch 6g (see FIG. 4) for detecting the operation of the cross key 6f. .

The production lever device 6C includes a production lever 6h that can perform a decision operation (operation input) and a lever operation production, a production lever detection switch 6i that detects the operation of the production lever 6h, and a normal state and a predetermined state of the production lever 6h. A vibration motor 6j for changing the vibrating state to a vibrating state in a manner, a lever light emitting LED 6k for changing the effect lever 6h between a non-lighting state and a light emitting state to emit light in a predetermined state, and a normal state and a normal state for the directing lever 6h. A lever drive motor (not shown) is provided for changing the state to a protruded state located above the state.

The production lever device 6C has a structure in which the production lever 6h can be changed into a normal state, a protruded state, and a tilted state.
The production lever 6h has an operating rod that can be operated in multiple directions (for example, 4 directions of front, rear, left, and right, and 8 directions including oblique directions) by being gripped and tilted by the player. A trigger button (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of the operating stem (for example, a position where the forefinger of the operating hand touches when the player grips the operating stem).

When the player grips and tilts the operating stem with the operating hand and pushes and pulls the trigger button with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger), the effect lever detection switch 6i tilts the operating stem and pushes and pulls the trigger button. As the operation is detected, predetermined information can be input to the control unit of the gaming machine 1 .
A vibrating motor 6j is built in the operation stem of the production lever 6h, and it vibrates when the operation stem is tilted or vibrates without being tilted.

The effect lever 6h can be changed between a normal state (non-protruding state: FIG. 1), which is a normal operating position, and a protruding state, which protrudes to an upper operating position than the normal state, by the driving force of the lever drive motor. .

A shooting handle 7 is attached to the lower right side of the storage dish 5. - 特許庁When the shooting handle 7 is rotated, the game balls introduced to the shooting position from the storage tray 5 are shot. Fires continuously every 6 seconds. The shot game ball is guided by the guide rail 8 and introduced to the upper part of the game area 4a. Incidentally, when the player operates a shooting stop button (not shown) provided on the shooting handle 7, shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped. A vibration motor for vibrating the shooting handle 7 may be provided inside the shooting handle 7 to vibrate the shooting handle 7 .

As shown in FIG. 1, in the game area 4a, in addition to a large number of obstacle nails K, there are a first starting port 10, a starting port device 11 having an opening/closing type second starting port 11a, a gate 12, and an opening/closing type big prize. A large winning opening device 13 having an opening 13a and a plurality of general winning openings 14 are provided in the illustrated arrangement so that a game ball can enter (win a prize). As shown in FIG. 4, the first starting hole 10, the gate 12, and the plurality of general winning holes 14 are respectively provided with a first starting hole detection switch 10a, a gate detection switch 12a, and a plurality of A general winning hole detection switch 14a is provided. It should be noted that, in the embodiments, the terms "entering the ball" and "winning a prize" include "passing".

The starting port device 11 opens and closes the second starting port 11a, the opening and closing member 11b that opens and closes the second starting port 11a, the second starting port detection switch 11c that detects the game ball that has won the second starting port 11a, and the opening and closing member 11b. It has a second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d to be driven, and the second starting port 11a can operate between a closed state in which game balls are difficult or impossible to win and an open state in which game balls are easy to win.

Between the first starting hole 10 and the second starting hole 11a, there is provided a winning hole lamp NR (FIG. 4) for causing the periphery of the first starting hole 10 and the second starting hole 11a to emit light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform a lighting effect by lighting the winning entrance lamp NR.

The large winning slot device 13 includes a large winning slot 13a, an opening/closing member 13b for opening and closing the large winning slot 13a, a large winning slot detecting switch 13c for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning slot 13a, and a large winning slot for driving the opening/closing member 13b. Having a winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d, the big winning opening 13a can operate between a closed state in which game balls are difficult or impossible to win and an open state in which game balls can easily win.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the shooting handle 7 to shoot the game ball into the game area 4a, the game ball is shot by the amount of rotation operation (rotation angle) of the shooting handle 7. By adjusting the intensity, it is possible to distinguish between so-called "left-handed" and "right-handed" hitting. In "left hitting", the game ball falls in the left side game area 4a1 located on the left side of the center role 15, and in "right hitting", the game ball passes through the right hitting passage formed above the center role 15. It moves to the right side game area 4a2 located on the right side of the center accessory 15 and falls toward the downstream direction of the right side game area 4a2.

When the game ball launched into the game area 4a wins any of a plurality of winning holes 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14, winning holes 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14 per winning of one game ball A set number of game balls (several to 10 or so) are paid out to a storage tray 5 as prize balls, and none of the plurality of prize winning ports 10, 11a, 13a, 20a, 14 win. In this case, it is finally discharged to the outside of the game area 4a from the discharge port 28 formed at the most downstream part of the game area 4a.

When the game ball wins at the starting ports 10 and 11a, a big winning lottery (special game determination) is performed, and when winning the big winning lottery, a big winning game (special game) is generated in which the big winning port 13a is opened. When the game ball passes through the gate 12, a winning lottery is performed, and when winning the winning lottery, an auxiliary game is generated in which the second start port 11a is opened in a predetermined mode.

A center accessory 15 is attached to substantially the center of the game board 4 . The center accessory 15 is provided with a frame (ornamental frame) 15a for restricting entry of game balls into the interior, and this frame 15a is fitted and mounted in an opening (not shown) formed in the game board 4. A warp device 15b is provided on the left side of the frame 15a to allow the game balls flowing down the game area 4a to be introduced into the frame 15a. A center stage 15c on which a game ball can roll is provided at the bottom of the frame 15a, and a game ball introduced into the frame 15a by the warp device 15b passes through the warp passage of the warp device 15b to the center stage 15c. , and flows down below the frame 15a.

A first image display device 16 (main liquid crystal) made up of a liquid crystal display is provided on the central inner side of the performance space 15A defined inside the frame 15a of the center accessory 15 . On the upper side of the production space 15A, there are a first movable production member 17A (production accessory) imitating a "sword" and a second image display device composed of a liquid crystal display in a shape imitating a "signboard" of the title of the gaming machine 1. A second movable production member 17B (production accessory) having 18 (sub-liquid crystal) is provided. The second movable effect member 17B is arranged in front of the first movable effect member 17A. Also, a third movable effect member 17C (effect accessory) imitating a "sword" larger than the "sword" of the first movable effect member 17A is provided on the right end side of the effect space 15A.

The first movable effect member 17A is composed of a scabbard part imitating a scabbard and a blade part housed in the scabbard part. From the state in which the blade is housed in the scabbard, it is possible to perform a performance action in which the blade moves to the left and is pulled out of the scabbard.

The second movable effect member 17B can move vertically by being driven by a stepping motor, and moves downward from the upper side of the effect space 15A to appear on the front side of the screen of the image display device 16. It is possible to

The third movable effect member 17C is composed of a sheath part imitating a scabbard and a blade part housed in the sheath part. It is possible, and it is possible to perform a performance action in which the blade moves upward from the state where the blade is housed in the scabbard and the blade is pulled out of the scabbard. Note that FIG. 1 shows a state in which the blade portion is housed in the sheath portion.

Furthermore, the third movable effect member 17C is driven by the board driving device 17, and is capable of tilting the blade with the lower end of the movable effect member 17C as a fulcrum. , the first image display device 16 can be tilted toward the front side of the central area of the screen to perform an effect action such as slashing the opponent with a sword.

Further, the third movable effect member 17C is driven by a stepping motor, and is capable of tilting the blade with the lower portion of the third movable effect member 17C as a fulcrum. The device 16 can be tilted toward the front side of the central area of the screen to perform a dramatic action such as slashing the opponent with a sword.

In addition, the first movable effect member 17A, the second movable effect member 17B and the third movable effect member 17C are each provided with a plurality of LEDs (light emitting units), and a predetermined mode is provided during standby or during execution of the effect operation. It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect in which the blade part, logo, etc. emit light.

The first image display device 16 performs various presentation displays according to the progress (development) of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting effect that is performed while the special symbol variable display is not executed on the special symbol display device described later, the variable effect that directs the special symbol variable display on the special symbol display device, and the jackpot game during execution There are jackpot performances etc.

On the screen of the first image display device 16, there are variable display areas (left area, center area, right area) for displaying three production patterns 16a (left design, middle design, right design), A mode display area or the like indicating the effect mode is formed.

The production pattern 16a includes an identification portion consisting of code information of numbers or characters indicating "1" to "9" or "one" to "nine", and a character image ( For example, there are a production pattern composed of a decorative portion including predetermined decoration information (associated information) such as an animal character such as a cat or a dog and a decorative frame image, and a production pattern composed only of an identification portion.

In the stop display of the production pattern 16a, the production pattern 16a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode) indicating the result of the big hit determination. The jackpot mode is a combination of the same effect symbols 16a such as "777", and the losing mode is other modes.

In the present embodiment, the variable display mode of the production pattern 16a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, switching on the spot, rotation (rotation), or the like. may be

In addition, during the execution of the variable effect including the variable display of the effect pattern 16a, various effect images (moving images) such as background images and characters are displayed according to the result of the big hit determination, so that the big win determination can be performed. It is designed to heighten the player's expectation of winning with respect to the result.

On the screen of the first image display device 16, a first pending icon display area 16b for displaying a number of first pending icons (for example, "○") corresponding to the first special figure pending number (U1), a second A second pending icon display area 16c for displaying a number of second pending icons (for example, "●") corresponding to the special figure pending number (U2), and a variable display of the special design being executed (production design 16a) A variable icon display area 16d and the like for displaying the corresponding variable icon (for example, "⊚") are formed.

Also, on the screen of the first image display device 16, the first reserved number display area 16e for displaying the first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1), and the current second special symbol A second reserved number display area 16f for displaying a second reserved number indicating the number of reservations (U2), a special pattern TZ that is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern and the variable display of the effect pattern 16a is displayed. A special pattern display area for is formed.

The special symbol TZ is composed only of an identification portion consisting of code information of numerals "1" to "9", and is displayed in a reduced size smaller than the display size of the effect symbol 16a. The variable display of the special symbols TZ in the special symbol display area is a constant display mode (numbers are switched in order) during the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols and the variable display of the effect symbols 16a to the stop display. In addition, it is always displayed in a visible state without disappearing from the screen or being blocked by the performance operations of the movable performance members 17A to 17C.
On the other hand, the variable display of the production pattern 16a may become invisible from the screen as the production progresses. The variable display of the special pattern corresponds to the variable display of the performance pattern 16a, and since it continues to be displayed in a visible state regardless of the progress of the performance, it also has a role of the variable display of the performance pattern.

In addition, the display of the reserved numbers in the first and second reserved number display areas 16e and 16f is always visible without disappearing from the screen or being blocked by the production operation of the movable production member 17, like the special symbols. displayed when possible.

The first reserved icon display area 16b is divided into a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section from the side closer to the variable icon display area 16d. - The fourth display unit displays the number of first pending icons corresponding to the number of first special figure pending (U1).

The second pending icon display area 16c is divided into a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section from the side closer to the variable icon display area 16d. ~ In the fourth display portion, the number of second pending icons corresponding to the number of second special figure pending (U2) is displayed.

The second image display device 18 can be operated in a predetermined direction by a board driving device 17 composed of a solenoid, a motor, or the like.
Specifically, between the standby position (first position) located near the upper end of the first image display device 16 and the rendering position (second position) located near the center of the first image display device 16 Movement production is performed by moving in the vertical direction (rising, descending). The direction of movement of the second image display device 18 may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or may be configured so that the movement effect is performed by operating the effect button 6a.

Outside the game area 4a and outside the guide rail 8 outside the game board 4, a first game information display device 19 for displaying game information relating to the progress of the game is provided in the lower left part.
As shown in FIG. 3( a ), the first game information display device 19 has a plurality of LEDs (light emitting units) arranged in four inclined rows along the outer guide rail 8 and the left end and the lower end of the game board 4 . have. These multiple (32 pieces) LEDs (light emitting units) are the first special symbol first display 19a, the second special symbol first display 19b, the normal symbol first display 19c, the first special symbol reservation first display. Device 19d, second special symbol reservation first display 19e, normal symbol reservation first display 19f, high probability game state display 19g, time saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-hand first display 19j constitutes a status confirmation display 19k.
As shown in FIG. 4, the first game information display device 19 is controlled by the main control board 110 .

The first special symbol first display device 19a is composed of six LEDs (light-emitting parts), and the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first start port 10. Then, the first special symbol first indicator 19a performs a variable display of the first special symbol in which six LEDs (light emitting units) flash at predetermined intervals or in an order, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed. The stop display of the first special symbol in which the LED (light-emitting part) lights up in combination (big win mode, losing mode) is performed, and the result of the big win lottery of the first special symbol is notified. In addition, in the case of winning a jackpot, it is possible to determine the type of jackpot, which will be described later, by a combined lighting display of six LEDs.

The second special symbol first display 19b is composed of six LEDs (light-emitting parts), and the second special symbol big hit lottery is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 11a. When the second special symbol first display 19b, six LEDs (light-emitting parts) blink at predetermined intervals or in order to perform a variable display of the second special symbol. The result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is notified by stop display of the second special symbol in which the LED (light emitting part) lights up in a combination (big win mode, losing mode). In addition, in the case of winning a jackpot, it is possible to determine the type of jackpot, which will be described later, by a combined lighting display of six LEDs.

In addition, in this embodiment, "big win" means a state in which it is decided to execute a big winning game in the big winning lottery of the first special symbol or the big winning lottery of the second special symbol. The "jackpot game" means an opening game, a round game in which the big winning port 13a is changed from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner, and the end of a predetermined number of round games (for example, 4 times, 16 times, etc.). It means performing an ending game that indicates the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 13a in each round game are predetermined, even before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 13a. When (for example, 9) are won, one round game ends. In addition, in this embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage for the player can be generated.

The normal symbol first display 19c is composed of three LEDs (light emitting units), and when a normal symbol winning lottery is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 12, the normal symbol first display 19c is performed. , three LEDs (light-emitting units) blink at a predetermined interval or in a certain order to perform a variable display of normal patterns, and after a predetermined time has passed, the LEDs light up in a combination (hitting mode, losing mode) that indicates the result of the winning lottery. The normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the result of the winning lottery for the normal symbols is reported. In addition, in the case of winning, it is possible to determine the type of winning, which will be described later, by the combined lighting display of the three LEDs.

The first special symbol reservation first display 19d is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is the number of first special symbol reservations stored when the game ball wins the first start port 10. It is for displaying the number of special figure reservations, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of the first special figure reservations. In addition, although the first special figure reservation is stored up to 4 pieces, it may be less than 4 pieces.

The second special symbol reservation first display 19e is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is the number of second special symbol reservations stored when the game ball wins the second start port 11a. It is for displaying the number of special figure reservations, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second special figure reservations. In addition, although the second special figure reservation is stored up to four, it may be less than four.

The normal design reservation first display 19f is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units), and is for displaying the normal design reservation number, which is the number of normal design reservations stored when the game ball passes through the gate 12. It lights up or blinks in a manner that indicates the number of normal map reservations. It should be noted that, although the general pattern reservation is stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than four.

1st special symbol reservation number, 2nd special symbol reservation number and general pattern reservation number, 1st special symbol reservation 1st display 19d, 2nd special symbol reservation 1st display 19e, normal symbol reservation 1st display 19f Both of the two LEDs (light emitting units) of each are turned off and the number of reservations is "0", only one LED (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "1", etc. Only one LED (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "2", both LEDs (light emitting units) are lit and the number of reservations is "3", both LEDs (light emitting units) ) flashes to notify that the number of pending is "4".

The high-probability gaming state display 19g is composed of one LED (light-emitting part), and is for indicating that the high-probability gaming state is in the high-probability gaming state, which will be described later. The LED (light emitting part) starts to light up, continues to light up during the high probability game state, and turns off when the high probability game state ends.

The time saving game state display 19h is composed of one LED (light emitting part), and is for displaying that it is in the time saving game state at the time of the time saving game state (high probability time saving game state or low probability game state). When the time-saving game state is entered, the LED (light-emitting part) starts lighting, continues to light up during the time-saving game state, and turns off when the time-saving game state ends.

When the high probability time-saving gaming state, the LEDs (light emitting units) of both the high probability gaming state indicator 19a and the time-saving gaming state indicator 19h light up. When the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the LED (light-emitting portion) of the time-saving gaming state indicator 19h lights up. At the time of the low probability non-time saving gaming state, the LED (light emitting part) of the high probability gaming state indicator 10a and the time saving gaming state indicator 19h does not light up.

The round number display 19i is composed of seven LEDs (light-emitting parts), and is for displaying the number of rounds when a big win state (special game state) occurs. The lighting of the LED (light-emitting portion) is started at , and the lighting of the LED (light-emitting portion) continues during the jackpot game, and the LED (light-emitting portion) is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has 16 rounds, the 4th to 6th LEDs (light emitting units) from the top light up, and if the jackpot game has 4 rounds, the 1st and 3rd LEDs from the top. The 1st and 6th LEDs (light emitting units) are lit. That is, the number of rounds is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of each of seven LEDs (light emitting units) predetermined for each number of rounds.

The right-handed first display 19j is composed of one LED (light-emitting part), and is used to indicate whether or not the so-called "right-handed" of shooting a game ball into the right game area 4a2 is recommended. When the game state is "time-saving game state" or when a jackpot game (special game) is being performed, that is, when "right-handed" is recommended, the LED lights up. However, when right-handed hitting is not recommended (that is, so-called "left-handed hitting" is recommended), the LED is extinguished.

In addition, the right-handed first display 19j starts lighting the LED (light emitting unit) at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game regardless of the type of jackpot (probability variable jackpot, normal jackpot), and during the jackpot game LED ( light-emitting part) continues lighting, and when the high-probability time-saving game state or low-probability time-saving game state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game ends, the LED (light-emitting part) is turned off. In addition, when winning the jackpot lottery during the high-probability time-saving game state or the low-probability time-saving game state, the lighting of the LED (light emitting part) is continued. In addition, if it does not shift to the high probability time-saving game state or the low probability time-saving game state after the jackpot game, the LED (light emitting unit) is turned off after the end of the jackpot game. That is, once the lighting of the LED (light-emitting portion) of the right-handed first display 19j is started, the lighting of the LED (light-emitting portion) continues until the game state in which the right-handed player should hit is completed. .

The status confirmation display 19k is composed of one LED (light emitting unit) and is for indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode is set, which will be described later. When the transition is made, the LED starts lighting, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. As described above, since the state confirmation display 19k indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (surface) of the gaming machine 1, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily check whether or not Incidentally, the installation position of the status confirmation display 19k may be the front (surface) of the game machine 1, and may be installed in other places.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. may be recognizably displayed. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the state confirmation display 19k may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the state confirmation display 19k may be blinked. and vice versa.

Also, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 19k is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol first display 19a, the second special symbol first display 19b, the first special symbol reservation first display 19d, the second special symbol reservation first Since the indicator 19e, the normal symbol reservation first indicator 19f, the status indicators 19g, 19h, the round number indicator 19i, etc. are turned off, even if one or more LEDs of these indicators are turned on. good.

As shown in FIG. 1, outside the game area 4a and outside the guide rail 8 on the outside of the game board 4, below the first game information display device 19 in the lower left corner, game information related to the progress of the game is displayed. A second game information display device 20 for displaying is provided.

As shown in FIG. 3B, the second game information display device 20 has a plurality of (10) LEDs (light emitting units) arranged in a triangular shape. These multiple LEDs (light emitting units) are the first special symbol second indicator 20a, the second special symbol second indicator 20b, the normal symbol second indicator 20c, the first special symbol reservation second indicator 20d, the second 2 special symbol reservation second display 20e, normal symbol reservation second display 20f, right hitting second display 20g.
As shown in FIG. 4 , the second game information display device 20 is controlled by the effect control board 130 .

The first special symbol second display device 20a is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and the LED (light emitting unit) blinks with the start of the first special symbol fluctuation on the first special symbol first display device 19a. is started, and blinking of the LED (light-emitting part) is continued during the variable display of the first special symbol. Then, the LED is lit or extinguished along with the stopping of the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol first indicator 19a to notify the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol.
When the jackpot lottery of the first special pattern is won, the LED (light emitting part) lights up, and the lighting of the LED (light emitting part) continues until the next variable display is started after the jackpot game ends.
When the first special symbol jackpot lottery is lost, the LED (light emitting part) is extinguished, and the extinguishing of the LED (light emitting part) continues until the next variable display is started.

The second special symbol second display device 20b is composed of one LED (light emitting part), and the LED (light emitting part) blinks with the start of the second special symbol fluctuation on the second special symbol first display device 19b. , and continues blinking of the LED (light-emitting part) during the variable display of the second special symbol. Then, the LED lights up or goes out with the second special symbol fluctuation stop on the second special symbol first display 19b to inform the result of the big hit lottery of the second special symbol.
When the second special pattern jackpot lottery is won, the LED (light emitting part) lights up, and the lighting of the LED (light emitting part) continues until the next variable display is started after the jackpot game ends.
When the second special symbol jackpot lottery is lost, the LED (light emitting part) is turned off, and the LED (light emitting part) is kept turned off until the next variable display is started.

In addition, the display of the first special symbol second display 20a or the second special symbol second display 20b is the first effect symbol 16a displayed in the left area of the screen of the first image display device 16, and the central area Since it is the fourth design following the second design 16a to be displayed and the third design 16a to be displayed in the right area, it may be referred to as the fourth design.
In addition, the variation start timing and variation stop timing of the first and second special symbol second displays 20a and 20b are synchronized with the variation start timing and variation stop timing of the effect symbol 16a displayed on the first image display device 16. ing.

The production control board 130 receives the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the fluctuation display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern first display 19a is started, and the production control board. Display control data is created based on the fact that the special symbol variation display data is set in the effect control unit 130m of 130, the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, the first The effect control board 130 receives the first special symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variable display on the special symbol second display 20a is started and the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. , based on the fact that the special symbol stop display data is set, the display control data is created, the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, the first special symbol second display The movement of the device 20a stops.
In addition, the display mode of the second special symbol second display 20b is also the same as the above-described display mode of the first special symbol second display 20a.

In addition, according to the special symbol variation pattern designation command, the mode (lighting or extinguishing) of the special symbol first display device 19a, 19b when the special symbol is stopped is determined, and the effect control is performed according to the end of the variation display of the special symbol. You may make it stop by the display mode of the production|presentation design predetermined by the board|substrate 130. FIG.

The normal symbol second display device 20c is composed of one LED (light emitting part), and starts blinking of the LED (light emitting part) with the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol first display device 19c, and the normal symbol. During the variable display of , the LED (light-emitting part) continues blinking. Then, the LED is lit or extinguished along with the stoppage of fluctuation in the normal symbol first display 19c, and the result of the winning lottery for the normal symbol is notified.
When winning a winning lottery for normal symbols, an LED (light-emitting part) lights up, and the LED (light-emitting part) continues to light until the next variable display is started after the winning game is finished.
When the lottery for normal symbols is lost, the LED (light emitting part) is extinguished, and the LED (light emitting part) continues to be extinguished until the next variable display is started.

A production control board 130 receives a general pattern fluctuation pattern specifying command transmitted from a main control board 110 when the normal pattern first display device 19c starts to display a normal pattern, and the production control board 130 controls production. The display control data is created based on the fact that the normal symbol fluctuation display data is set in the part 130m, and the created display control data is normally output to the second symbol display device 20c, so that the second normal symbol display device 20c is started, and when the variable display of normal symbols is stopped, the production control board 130 receives the normal design determination command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the production control section 130m of the production control board 130 The display control data is created based on the setting of the normal symbol stop display data, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the normal symbol second display device 20c fluctuates. stops.

The first special symbol reservation second display device 20d is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) in the same manner as the first special symbol reservation first display device 19d described above, and the game ball enters the first start port 10. It is for displaying the first special figure reservation number, which is the number of the first special figure reservation stored when the ball), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of the first special figure reservation. In addition, although the first special figure reservation is stored up to 4 pieces, it may be less than 4 pieces.

Regarding the first special figure reservation number, both of the two LEDs (light emitting units) are turned off and the number of reservations is "0", only one LED (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "1" that only the other LED (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "2"; that both LEDs (light emitting units) are lit and the number of reservations is "3"; Both LEDs (light emitting units) flash to indicate a pending number of "4".

The effect control board 130 receives a special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of first special symbol reservations increases or decreases, and the effect control part 130m of the effect control board 130 receives the first special symbol reservation display data. is set, the display control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second gaming state display device 20, so that the display of the first special symbol holding second display 20d (lighting , flashing or extinguishing) is performed.

The display (lighting, blinking) timing and erasing (extinguishing) timing of the first special symbol reservation second display device 20d are synchronized with the display timing and erasure timing of the first reservation icon displayed on the first image display device 16. , is synchronized with the numerical change timing of the first pending number display area 16e.

The second special symbol reservation second display 20e is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) in the same manner as the above-described second special symbol reservation first display 19e, and the game ball wins (wins) in the second start port 11a. It is for displaying the second special figure reservation number, which is the number of the second special figure reservation stored when the ball), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of the second special figure reservation. In addition, although the second special figure reservation is stored up to four, it may be less than four.

Regarding the second special figure reservation number, both of the two LEDs (light emitting units) are turned off and the number of reservations is "0", only one of the LEDs (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "1" that only the other LED (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "2"; that both LEDs (light emitting units) are lit and the number of reservations is "3"; Both LEDs (light emitting units) flash to indicate a pending number of "4".

The performance control board 130 receives the special symbol storage specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the second special symbol reservation number increases or decreases, and the second special symbol reservation display data is set in the performance control section 130m. Based on the display control data is created, the created display control data is output to the second gaming state display device 20, display of the second special symbol holding second display 20e (lighting, blinking or extinguishing) is done.

The display (lighting, blinking) timing and erasing (extinguishing) timing of the second special symbol reservation second display device 20e are synchronized with the display timing and erasing timing of the second reservation icon displayed on the first image display device 16. , is synchronized with the numerical value change timing of the second pending number display area 16f.

The normal symbol reservation second display 20f is composed of two LEDs (light emitting units) like the above-described normal symbol reservation first display 19f, and is stored when the game ball passes through the gate 12. It is intended to display the number of normal pattern reservations, which is the number of, and lights or blinks in a manner that indicates the number of normal pattern reservations. It should be noted that, although the general pattern reservation is stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than four.

The production control board 130 receives the normal pattern storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the normal pattern reservation number increases or decreases, and the display is based on the setting of the normal pattern reservation display data in the production control unit 130m. Control data is created and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the display (lighting, blinking or extinguishing) of the normal symbol reservation second display 20f is performed.

Regarding the normal figure holding number, both of the two LEDs (light emitting part) are turned off and the holding number is "0", only one LED (light emitting part) is lit and the holding number is "1" that only the other LED (light emitting unit) is lit and the number of reservations is "2", that both LEDs (light emitting units) are lit and the number of reservations is "3", and both The LED (light-emitting part) flashes to indicate that the number of reservations is "4".

The right-handed second display 20g is composed of one LED (light emitting part), and when the game state becomes "high probability short working hours gaming state" or "low probability short working hours gaming state", the second start port 11a in the right game area 4a2 "Right-handed" is recommended due to the board structure where When the game state is "low probability non-time-saving game state", the board structure in which the first start port 10 is provided in the left side game area 4a1 recommends "left-handed", so the LED does not light up. .

Specifically, the production control board 130 receives the game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when controlling the game in the low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving game state, and hits right in the production control unit 130m A display control command is created based on the display data being set, and the created display control command is output to the second gaming state display device 20, thereby starting the display of the right-handed second display device 20g. When the game state is changed, the production control board 130 receives the game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the game state is not the low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving game state in the production control unit 130m. When it is determined, the right-handed erase data is set, the display control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, so that the right-handed second display 20g is displayed. exit.

When the right-handed second display 20g enters the "jackpot game state", the board surface structure in which the big winning opening 13a is provided in the right-hand side game area 4a2 recommends "right-handed", so the LED is turned on. The lighting of the LED is continued until the jackpot game state ends.

Specifically, when the jackpot game (opening) is started, the effect control board 130 receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the right-handed display data is set in the effect control unit 130m. When a display control command is created based on the display control command, and the created display control command is output to the second game state display device 20, the display of the right-handed second display device 20g is started and the game state is changed. The game state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received by the production control board 130, and the game state is determined not to be a low-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability game state, or a jackpot game state by the production control unit 130m. , right-handed erasure data is set, display control data is created, and the created display control data is output to the second game state display device 20, thereby ending the display of the right-handed second display 20g.

Here, in the vicinity (upper side) of the right-handed second indicator 20g, there is a notation of "right-handed", and when the LED (light emitting part) of the right-handed second indicator 20g is lit, "right-handed" is recommended. It is clearly shown that the Therefore, the display of hitting to the right is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first display 19j of hitting to the right of the first game information display device 19 in which nothing is displayed.

The second game information display device 20 may be provided closer to the first image display device 16 than the first game information display device 19 is. In this case, the second game information display device 20 is at a prominent position for the player, so the second game information display device 20 is easier to visually recognize than the first game information display device 19 .

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls overall progress of the game (basic action), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110. A board 120, an effect control board 130 for controlling a game-related effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and a power supply board for supplying power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130. 160 is provided.

Communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands can be sent and received in both directions, and communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled by the main control board 110. It is configured to be able to transmit commands only in one direction to the board 130 .

The main control unit 110A of the main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs and the like, a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.

The input/output ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detecting switch 14a, a gate detecting switch 12a, a first starting opening detecting switch 10a, a second starting opening detecting switch 11c, a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, and a big winning opening. Detection switch 13c, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d, magnetic detection sensor 58a, radio wave detection sensor 58b, RAM clear switch 58c, setting key switch 58d, out ball detection switch 58e, first special symbol first display 19a, second special Design first display 19b, normal design first display 19c, first special design reservation first display 19d, second special design reservation first display 19e, normal design reservation first display 19f, high probability game state Indicator 19g, time-saving game state indicator 19h, round number indicator 19i, right-handed first indicator 19j, state confirmation indicator 19k, game information output terminal board 90, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 are connected. ing.

The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a game control program stored in the main RAM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform game-related arithmetic processing. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.) and various output devices (solenoids, various displays 19a to 19k of the first game information display device 19, etc.) are controlled. , control processing for transmitting and receiving various control commands, and control processing for transmitting game information to the outside of the gaming machine 1 (such as a hall computer) via the game information output terminal board 90 .

An information display 113 connected to the main control board 110 is composed of four 7-segment displays for displaying performance information and set values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped. The two 7-segment displays constitute an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information, and the remaining two 7-segment displays indicate setting values and numerical values of the performance information. A numeric segment is configured to display numeric information.

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launcher 26 to control the launch of game balls.
The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The input/output ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a of the open/close door 3, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 100, and a game ball from the payout device 100. A payout motor 100b for putting out balls and a ball detection switch 101a for detecting that game balls are stored in the game ball storage unit 101 are connected.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing regarding the payout of game balls. Thereby, control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 100 according to the payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for transmitting the command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, etc. conduct.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input/output port, and the like. The input/output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feeding solenoid 43, the touch sensor 7a, the firing volume 7b, the firing solenoid 26a, and the like.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 7 by means of a touch signal input from the touch sensor 7a, it allows the energization of the ball feed solenoid 43 and the shooting solenoid 26a to launch the ball. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 7 has changed by the detection signal from the volume 7b, the ball feed solenoid 43 is driven and the firing solenoid is adjusted so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 7. 26a is driven to shoot game balls (99.9 balls/minute).

The production control board 130 is based on the reception of the production control command from the production control unit 130m and the production control unit 130m. Image control unit 140 that performs voice output control processing, various light emitting members (such as LEDs) and various drive sources (solenoids, motors, etc.) based on the reception of performance control commands from the performance control unit 130m Lamp control that performs control processing A portion 150 is provided.

The performance control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input/output port.
The input/output ports of the production control unit 130m include production button detection switch 6b, cross key detection switch 6g, production lever detection switch 6i, first special symbol second display 20a, second special symbol second display 20b, normal A symbol second display 20c, a first special symbol reservation second display 20d, a second special symbol second display 20e, a normal symbol reservation second display 20f, and a right-handed second display 20g are connected.

The sub CPU 130a of the effect control unit 130m receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the effect while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. Thereby, control processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, control processing for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, various input devices (detection switch etc.) and control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting device, motor, various displays 20a to 20g of the second game information display device 20, etc.).

(Configuration of image control unit)
Here, the configuration of the image control unit 140 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the image control section 140. As shown in FIG.
The image control unit 140 performs image display control of the image display devices 16 and 18 and audio control of the audio output device 9, so that it includes an overall CPU 141, an overall RAM 142, an overall ROM 143, a CGROM 144, a crystal oscillator 145, a VRAM 146, a VDP (Video Display Processor). ) 200 (drawing control unit). The VDP 200 includes an audio control circuit 300 having an audio control unit (audio LSI) and an audio ROM for controlling audio output in the gaming machine 1 .

The overall CPU 141 instructs the VDP 200 to display the image data stored in the CGROM 144 on the image display devices 16 and 18 based on the later-described effect pattern designation command received from the effect control unit 130m. Such an instruction is performed by setting data in the control register 201 of the VDP 200 and outputting a display list composed of drawing control commands.
Also, upon receiving a V-blank interrupt signal or a drawing end signal from the VDP 200, the general CPU 141 appropriately performs interrupt processing.

The supervising CPU 141 also instructs the audio control circuit 300 included in the VDP 200 to output music and sounds based on predetermined audio data to the audio output device 9 based on the effect pattern designation command received from the effect control unit 130m. .
The general RAM 142 is built in the general CPU 141 , functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the general CPU 141 , and temporarily stores data read from the general ROM 143 .

The supervising ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM, and is used for generating a program for control processing of the supervising CPU 141, pattern arrangement information in which the pattern number of the effect pattern 16a and the type of the effect pattern 16a are associated, and a display list. A display list generation program, animation pattern information for displaying animation of effect patterns, animation scene information, and the like are stored.

The animation pattern is referred to when the animation of the production pattern is displayed, and stores the combination of animation scene information included in the production pattern, the display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In addition, animation scene information stores information such as wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, etc. is doing.

The CGROM 144 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in an image of a predetermined range (eg, 32×32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that designates a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 144 stores uncompressed palette data in which color number information specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other. It should be noted that the CGROM 144 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data without compressing all of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used. The CGROM 144 also stores a large amount of audio data.

The crystal oscillator 145 outputs a pulse signal to the clock generation circuit 205 of the VDP 200, and divides the pulse signal to generate a system clock for the VDP 200 to control the clock generation circuit 205, and the image display devices 16 and 18. A synchronizing signal or the like for synchronizing with is generated.

The VRAM 146 is composed of an SRAM capable of writing or reading image data at high speed. The VRAM 146 also includes a display list storage area 146a for temporarily storing a display list output from the general CPU 141, a development storage area 146b for storing image data decompressed by the decompression circuit 206, and an image drawing or display area. It has a first frame buffer 146c and a second frame buffer 146d for. The VRAM 146 also stores palette data. The first and second frame buffers 146c and 146d are alternately switched between a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

The VDP 200 is a so-called image processor. Based on instructions from the general CPU 141, the VDP 200 reads out image data from either the first or second frame buffers 146c, 146d (frame buffers for display), and based on the read image data, , to generate video signals (RGB signals, etc.) and output them to the image display devices 16 and 18 . In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the VDP 200 is not only an image processor, but also has an audio output function.

The VDP 200 includes a control register 201, a CG bus I/F 202, a CPU I/F 203, a clock generation circuit 205, an expansion circuit 206, a drawing circuit 207, a display circuit 208, a memory controller 209, and an audio control circuit 300. and

The control register 201 is a register for the VDP 200 to control drawing and display, and writing and reading data to and from the control register 201 controls drawing and display. The supervising CPU 141 can write data to and read data from the control register 201 via the CPU I/F 203 .
The control register 201 includes a system control register for making basic settings necessary for the operation of the VDP 200, a data transfer register for making settings necessary for transferring data, and a drawing register for making settings for controlling drawing. A register, a bus interface register for making settings necessary for accessing the bus, an expansion register for making settings necessary for decompressing a compressed image, and a display register for making settings for controlling the display. It has a register.

A CG bus I/F 202 is an interface circuit for communication with the CGROM 144 , and image data from the CGROM 144 is input to the VDP 200 via the CG bus I/F 202 .
Also, the CPU I/F 203 is an interface circuit for communication with the general CPU 141 . The supervising CPU 141 inputs an interrupt signal.

A data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between various devices.
Specifically, data transfer between the general CPU 141 and the VRAM 146, data transfer between the CGROM 144 and the VRAM 146, and data transfer between various storage areas (including frame buffers) of the VRAM 146 are performed.
A clock generation circuit 205 receives a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 145 and generates a system clock that determines the processing speed of the VDP 200 . It also generates a synchronous signal generation clock and outputs the synchronous signal to the image display devices 16 and 18 via the display circuit 208 .

The decompression circuit 206 is a circuit for decompressing the image data compressed in the CGROM 144, and stores the decompressed image data in the decompression storage area 146b.
The drawing circuit 207 is a circuit that performs sequence control using a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands.
The display circuit 208 generates an RGB signal (analog signal) indicating color data of an image as a video signal from the image data (digital signal) stored in the “frame buffer for display” in the VRAM 146, and displays the generated video signal ( RGB signals) to the image display devices 16 and 18. Furthermore, the display circuit 208 also outputs synchronization signals (vertical synchronization signal, horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) for synchronizing the image display devices 16 and 18 to the image display devices 16 and 18 .
In the present embodiment, RGB signals obtained by converting digital signals into analog signals are output to the image display devices 16 and 18 as video signals, but the video signals may be output as digital signals.
The memory controller 209 performs control to switch between the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer” when receiving an instruction to switch the frame buffer from the general CPU 141 .

The voice control circuit 300 reads out a predetermined program based on commands transmitted from the effect control board 130 and controls voice output in the voice output device 9 .
The audio control circuit 300 outputs music and audio using audio data stored in the CGROM 144 . In this case, the CGROM 144 is assumed to include a sound source ROM for storing audio data. Note that the audio control circuit 300 may not be included in the VDP 200 and may be provided independently within the image control section 140 .

As shown in FIG. 4, the lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, and an input/output port. .
Input/output ports of the lamp control base 150 are connected to the board driving device 17, the board lighting device 23, the frame lighting device 27, the button driving motor 6c, the button vibration motor 6d, and the button light emitting LED 6e.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to lighting effects and character effects. As a result, the board driving device 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C), the board lighting device 23, the frame lighting device 27, the button driving motor 6c, the button vibration motor 6d, the button light emission LED 6e, the lever vibration motor 6j, and the lever light emission. Control processing of the LED 6k is performed.

The lamp ROM 150b stores the lighting/blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data of the board illumination device 23 and the frame illumination device 27 according to the presentation content set by the presentation control unit 130m, and the operation patterns of the movable presentation members 17A to 17C. data, projecting operation pattern of the production button 6a, vibration operation pattern data of the production button 6a, vibration operation pattern data of the production lever 6h, and the like are stored.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 from the power supply voltage supplied from the power plug 161, and supplies the main power supply to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120). , production control board 130, various electronic components). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred, and a power failure detection circuit 162 that outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 at the time of (power failure).

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine 1 is energized. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from power failure (power failure), the control state of the game is restored to the state before power failure (power failure). can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described.
The game state that can be taken as a gaming machine is a "low probability game state" or "high probability game state" as a state related to a special symbol jackpot lottery, and a "non-time-saving game" as a state related to the operation of the opening and closing member 11b of the second start port 11a. state” or “time-saving game state”. The state (low-probability game state, high-probability game state) related to the jackpot lottery and the state (non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state) related to the operation of the opening/closing member 11b can be related to each other and can be made independent. can also in short,
(1) When it is a “low probability gaming state” and a “time saving gaming state”,
(2) When it is "low probability gaming state" and "non-time-saving gaming state",
(3) In the case of "high probability gaming state" and "time saving gaming state",
(4) In the case of "high probability gaming state" and "non-time-saving gaming state",
can be set.
In this embodiment, the game states (1) to (3) can be taken.
In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability game state" and the "non-time-saving game state". will be referred to as "normal game state".

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means that in the special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a, the jackpot winning probability is For example, it refers to a game state set as low as 1/299. On the other hand, the "high-probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low-probability gaming state, and the probability of winning the jackpot is set as high as 1/59.8, for example. . Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state", which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. It should be noted that the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is after the jackpot game is completed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is called "probability variable jackpot", and the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, "non-time-saving gaming state" means that in the normal design winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 12, the average fluctuation time of the normal design corresponding to the lottery result is " It is a game state that is set longer than the time-saving game state and in which the opening time of the second start port 11a when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate 12, a winning lottery for normal symbols is performed, and the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol first display device. Stop display after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 11a is controlled in an open mode for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbols.

On the other hand, the "time-saving gaming state" means that in the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 12, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is "non- It is a game state in which the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set to be longer than that of the time-saving game state and when the winning is won. Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning the winning lottery of normal symbols is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning the winning lottery of normal symbols is low. For example, it is set as high as 127/128. Therefore, in the "time-saving gaming state", when the game ball passes through the gate 12, the second starting port 11a is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" is more advantageous than the "non-time-saving gaming state" in terms of the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start port 11a, and the winning probability of the winning lottery of the normal symbols. is set to However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the variation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 11a, and the winning probability of the winning lottery of the normal symbols is advantageous. In addition, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the winning probability in the winning lottery of normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 14. FIG.

(jackpot determination table)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a big hit determination table. Specifically, FIG. 6 (1) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 10, and FIG. 6 (2) is the second start In the tables of FIGS. 6(1) and 6(2), which are the jackpot determination tables for the second special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the mouth 11a, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot (jackpot winning probability) are identical.

As shown in FIGS. 6(1) and 6(2), the jackpot determination table includes a probability game state, a jackpot determination obtained when a game ball wins the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a. A jackpot determination value for determining a random number is associated with the result of the jackpot determination.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6(1) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. Based on the random number value for judging a big hit, it is judged whether it is a 'big hit' or 'losing'.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6 (1), when the low-probability gaming state, one jackpot determination random number value of "3" is determined to be a "jackpot". . On the other hand, when the game is in the high-probability gaming state, 10 random numbers for judging the jackpot of "3", "7", . . . If it is a random value other than the above, it is determined as "losing". Therefore, since the random number range for judging a big hit is 0 to 299, the probability of judging a big hit in a low-probability game state is 1/300, and it is judged to be a big hit in a high-probability game state. The odds are 10/300, up ten times.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit determination. Specifically, FIG. 7(1) is a special symbol determination table for big wins, which is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbols at the time of a big win, and FIG. 7(2) is a table at the time of a loss. It is a special symbol determination table for losing which is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 7(1), the special symbol determination table for big wins includes the type of starting port when the game ball wins, and the game ball entering the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. The jackpot design judgment value (random number for special design judgment), the judgment result (type of special design), and the special design (special design stop design data) and the production design specification command transmitted to the production control board 130 as information indicating the type of special design are associated.

As shown in FIG. 7(2), in the special symbol determination table for losing, there is a type of starting port when a game ball wins, and a game ball enters the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a. Loss pattern judgment value ((special pattern judgment random number), judgment result (type of special pattern), special pattern (special pattern (stop design data) is associated with a production design designation command transmitted to the production control board 130 as information indicating the type of special design. A plurality of unsuccessful special symbols and special symbol determination values may be associated with each other.

The specific first special symbol for loss (specific loss symbol) shown in FIG. 7 (2) is a symbol that triggers the setting change of the game state to a low-probability time-saving game state, and is determined with a probability of 1/150. is set to be

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7, and selects the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) based on the type of the starting hole in which the game ball has won and the random number value for judging the jackpot symbol. to decide. Then, when the special symbols start to fluctuate, based on the determined special symbol type (special symbol stop symbol data), a performance symbol designation command as information indicating the type of the special symbol is determined. Here, one command of the performance pattern designation command is composed of 2-byte data, 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and 1-byte DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. data. This also applies to a variation pattern specification command and the like, which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, the type of special symbol (stopped symbol data) determines the type of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game ends. It can be said that it determines the game state after the end.

(jackpot game control table)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a jackpot game control table for determining the progress of the jackpot game when it is determined as a jackpot as a result of the jackpot determination. The jackpot game control table determines the type of special pattern (special stop pattern data), the opening time of the jackpot game, the opening designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130 at the start of the opening, and the opening/closing mode of the big winning port 13a. Big winning opening opening/closing control table information, ending time of the jackpot game, and an ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the ending are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8, and determines the opening time, the big winning opening opening/closing control table, and the ending time based on the special symbol stop pattern data. In addition, since the number of round games in the jackpot game is determined by determining the type of the big winning opening opening/closing control table, FIG. there is

(Grand Prize Opening/Closing Control Table)
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening/closing control table that is referred to when a big win is determined as a result of the big win determination. In the big winning hole opening/closing control table, the maximum number of round games in the big winning game, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning hole 13a in one round game, the maximum number of opening times of the big winning hole 13a in each round game, and The opening time of the big winning opening 13a for one opening of the round game is associated with the closing interval time for closing the big winning opening 13a after the end of the round game.

The main CPU 110a specifies the type of the big winning opening opening/closing control table based on the special figure stop symbol data. Specifically, when the special figure stop symbol data is "01" or "04", the first large winning opening opening/closing control table (TBL.No01) is specified and the first large winning opening opening/closing control table is referred to. Then, the first jackpot game is executed, and when the special figure stop symbol data is "02" or "05", the second big winning gate opening/closing control table (TBL.No02) is specified, and the second big winning gate is specified. The second jackpot game is executed with reference to the opening/closing control table, and when the special figure stop symbol data is "03" or "06", the third big winning opening opening/closing control table (TBL. No03) is specified, The third jackpot game is executed with reference to the third jackpot opening/closing control table.

According to the first big prize winning opening opening/closing control table (TBL. No. 01), the opening/closing member 13b is operated to open and close the big winning opening 13a a plurality of times (K=3) per round. (The big winning opening 13a repeats opening for 3.000 seconds and closing for 1.000 seconds.) A jackpot game of 10 rounds (R) is executed.
However, when the specified number (9) of game balls enter the big winning opening 13a before reaching the maximum number of opening times (K), one round game ends. Then, when 10 rounds of games are completed, the first jackpot game is completed. Since the first jackpot game has more rounds than the second and third jackpot games, it is a jackpot game with a high degree of advantage.

According to the second big winning opening opening/closing control table (TBL.No.02), four rounds (R) of opening and closing the opening/closing member 13b to open the big winning opening 13a up to 29.5 seconds per round. A second jackpot game is executed.
However, if the specified number (nine) of game balls enter the big winning opening 13a before the opening time elapses, one round game will end. Then, when the game of four rounds ends, the second jackpot game ends.

According to the third big winning opening opening/closing control table (TBL.No.03), the opening/closing member 13b is operated to open and close the big winning opening 13 a plurality of times (K=3) per round. (The big winning opening 13a repeats opening for 3.000 seconds and closing for 1.0000 seconds) The third jackpot game of 4 rounds (R) is executed.

In the first jackpot game and the third jackpot game, since the opening/closing mode of the big prize opening 13a is the same, prize balls are acquired before the third closing time of the big prize opening 13a in the four rounds. For example, the first image display device 16 can execute a promotion effect suggesting whether or not the number of possible round games will increase.

Specifically, in the first jackpot game, after executing the promotion success effect to make it appear that the number of round games that can acquire prize balls has been successfully increased in the final stage of the promotion effect, 5 of the 5-round big winning opening 13a is executed. The jackpot game is advanced after the 6th round when the game is opened for the first time and the prize balls can be obtained. On the other hand, in the third jackpot game, the jackpot game is finished after execution of promotion failure performance to make it look as if the increase in the number of round games capable of acquiring prize balls has failed in the final phase of the promotion performance. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion effect is heightened.

(Game state setting data table)
FIG. 10(1) is a diagram showing a game state setting data table for setting a game state after the jackpot game ends. The game state setting data table contains special figure stop symbol data, winning state data indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot lottery, time saving game flag indicating the time saving game state, and executable in the time saving game state. Shows the number of time-saving games (J) indicating the number of times of variable display of special symbols, a high probability game flag indicating that it is in a high probability game state, and the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the high probability game state. It is associated with the number of high-probability games played (X).

Here, the "state data at the time of winning" is information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. The game state is composed of a combination of a non-time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, a low-probability game state, and a high-probability game state.

The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10(1), and based on the special symbol stop symbol data and winning state data, the time saving game flag, the number of time saving games (J), and the high probability A game flag and the number of high-probability games (X) are determined.

When the high-probability game state is set, 50000 times may be set as the high-probability game number (X), but in the high-probability game state, the winning probability in the jackpot lottery is 10/300. Therefore, since the next big winning game is substantially confirmed, the first big winning game and the second big winning game are advantageous big winning games for the player who confirms the next big winning game.

In addition, when the low-probability time-saving game state is set, 100 times is set as the number of time-saving games (J), but there may be no upper limit.

FIG. 10 (2) shows a game state setting data table for setting a game state after a predetermined specific losing symbol stops in the variable display of the first special symbol when in a low probability non-time-saving gaming state. FIG. 10 shows. The game state setting data table includes special symbol stop symbol data, symbol stop game state data indicating the game state when the specific losing symbol is stopped, time saving game flag indicating the time saving game state, and time saving game state The number of time-saving games (J) indicating the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in , a high probability game flag indicating that it is in a high probability game state, and a variable display of special symbols that can be executed in a high probability game state It is associated with the number of high-probability games (X) indicating the number of times.
In addition, although the number of time-saving games (J) has no upper limit (that is, until a big hit is achieved), an upper limit number of times may be provided (for example, up to 1200 times).

FIG. 10 (3) is a diagram showing a game state setting data table for setting the game state after reaching a predetermined number of times when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol has reached a predetermined number when the low probability non-time-saving game state. be. In the game state setting data table, the number of times of pattern fluctuation, the game state data at the time of reaching the number of fluctuations indicating the game state when reaching the predetermined number of times of pattern fluctuation, the time saving game flag indicating that it is a time saving game state, and the time saving game flag The number of time-saving games (J) indicating the number of variable displays of special symbols executable in the game state, a high-probability game flag indicating a high-probability game state, and variations in special symbols executable in the high-probability game state. It is associated with the number of high-probability games (X) indicating the number of times of display.
In addition, although the number of time-saving games (J) has no upper limit (that is, until a big hit is achieved), an upper limit number of times may be provided (for example, up to 1200 times).

As for the number of pattern fluctuations, a jackpot lottery (a jackpot lottery resulting in a lottery result of losing) is continuously performed for a predetermined number of times triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 in a low-probability non-time-saving game state. It shows the number of times of variation of the first special symbol executed corresponding to.
Although the number of time-saving games (J) has no upper limit (that is, until a big hit is achieved), an upper limit number of times may be provided (for example, up to 1200 times).

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 11 is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols in the non-time-saving gaming state.
FIG. 12 is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving gaming state for determining the special symbol variation pattern in the time saving gaming state.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the special symbol variation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting port) to be displayed in variation, the big hit determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), Random number for reach determination, 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or 2nd special figure reservation number (U2), random number for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, special design The fluctuation time and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command indicating the special figure fluctuation pattern are associated.
Therefore, it can be said that the "special symbol variation pattern" can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. ) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), based on the random number for special figure variation pattern determination, to determine the special figure variation pattern, the special figure variation pattern designation command according to the special figure variation pattern production control board 130 It is designed to send to

In addition, as will be described later, the production control board 130 determines the content (production mode) of the variable production accompanied by the variable display of the production design 16a according to the variation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special design determination result, etc.). Since it is designed to do, the rightmost column of the special figure pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 describes the production contents that can be executed in the variable production as a reference.

As the production contents shown in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. It means that it fluctuates at high speed and stops without reaching.

In addition, "reach" is the possibility that a part of the combination of the big win effect symbols 16a that informs the big win is temporarily stopped, and the other effect symbols 16a fluctuate, causing a big win game to be executed. It means a variation mode that makes the player expect that there will be For example, when a combination of "777" symbols is set as a combination of the jackpot performance symbols 16a for informing that the jackpot is won, the same performance symbols 16a are temporarily stopped at "7" in the left and right regions. In other words, it refers to a mode in which the remaining production patterns 16a are fluctuating in the central area.

Incidentally, the term "temporary stop" means that the production pattern 16a shakes slightly or deforms slightly, making it appear to the player that the production pattern 16a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

In addition, "normal reach" means a reach performance in which the same performance pattern 16a is temporarily stopped in the left and right regions and the remaining one performance pattern 16a fluctuates in the central region, and the reach with the lowest degree of expectation for a big hit. It is a performance.

In addition, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects with higher expectations for big hits than normal reach effects, and the development effects are executed from the normal reach effects, and then executed. For example, the two production patterns 16a are reduced and moved to the corners of the first image display device 16, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 16 is used to perform a special ready-to-win production. . In addition, in the "special SP reach", a more special effect than in the "SP reach" is executed.

Also, "SPSP reach" and "SPSP '7' reach" are special reach performances with higher expectations for big hits than super reach performances, and are executed after normal reach performances or super reach performances. For example, the development effect is executed from the normal reach effect, and then the three effect patterns 16a are reduced and moved to the corner of the first image display device 16, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 16 is used. It is designed to perform a special reach production than "SP reach". In addition, in "SPSP ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the effect pattern 16a other than "7", and in "SPSP '7' ready-to-win", the ready-to-win effect is executed by the pattern of "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach at which the jackpot is determined, and is executed after the normal reach effect. For example, the development performance is executed from the normal reach performance, and then the three performance patterns 16a are changed at a low speed in a state where they are all the same, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 16 is used to "SPSP reach". Or "SPSP '7' reach" special reach effect (big hit confirmed reach effect) is performed.

In addition, "special reach" is a reach in which any of the normal reach production that is more special than "normal reach", the SP reach production that is more special than "SP reach", and the SPSP reach production that is more special than "SPSP reach" is executed. It has become.

As the first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, when the number of first special figure reservations increases to 2 or 3 in the non-time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is shortened. While the variation is easily determined, even if the second special symbol reservation number increases to 2 or 3 during the non-time-saving gaming state, the point is that the shortening variation is not determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbol when hitting the left side rather than when hitting the right side in the non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As a second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, even if the number of first special figure reservations increases to 1 to 3 during the time saving game state, as a variation pattern of the first special symbol While the (super) shortened variation is not determined, when the second special figure reservation number increases to 1 to 3 during the time saving game state, the (long) shortened variation is easily determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. be done. By doing so, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of the special symbols when hitting to the right than when hitting to the left in the time saving game state, and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As the third feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 11 and 12,
If the game ball enters the first start port 10 during the normal game state and the result is a loss, two special figure fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times depending on the number of reservations (variation time 4 seconds or 8 seconds (no reach) In the case of))) is determined, but if the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the time saving game state and the result is a loss, regardless of the number of reservations, the same special figure fluctuation pattern ( variation time: 8 seconds) is determined. Therefore, it is possible to play an appropriate game according to the type of game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. One of the types of special figure fluctuation patterns (variation time: 40 seconds, 70 seconds, 90 seconds...) is determined, but the game ball enters the first start port 10 during the time saving game state and the jackpot is won. In the case of the determination result, one of the special figure variation patterns with fewer types of variation time than in the normal gaming state is determined. Therefore, it is possible to play an appropriate game according to the type of game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the game ball enters the first start port 10 during the time saving game state and the result is a loss, regardless of the number of reservations, two special figure fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times (variation time: 8 seconds and 40 seconds) seconds) may be determined. In this case, the special symbol variation pattern with a short variation time is determined at a higher rate than the special symbol variation pattern with a long variation time.

(Advance judgment table)
FIG. 13 (1) is a non-time-saving game for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a during the non-time-saving game state It is a pre-determined table for states.
FIG. 13 (2) is for time saving state for pre-determining (prefetching) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 or the second start port 11a during the time saving game state It is a preliminary determination table.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the preliminary determination table, the type of special symbol (starting port), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value , Toku-zu scheduled variation pattern as a determination result, and the look-ahead designation command indicating the toku-zu scheduled variation pattern are associated.
Therefore, it can be said that the "special figure variation pattern" can specify the special symbol type, the judgment result of the jackpot determination, the special symbol type, and the special figure variation pattern to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 13, and based on the random number value for jackpot determination, the random number value for special symbol determination, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, the special figure scheduled variation. A pattern is determined, and a look-ahead designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

In addition, in the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 13, pre-determination (prefetching) is performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 in the time saving game state, but it may not be performed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a table relating to normal symbols and the opening/closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a.
FIG. 14(1) is a diagram showing a hit determination table for normal symbols. FIG. 14(2) is a normal symbol stop symbol determination table corresponding to the normal symbol winning lottery result. FIG. 14(3) is a diagram showing a normal pattern variation pattern determination table. FIG. 14(4) is a diagram showing an opening mode determination table for the second starting port.

(Hit determination table for normal symbols)
As shown in FIG. 14 (1), in the hit determination table, the presence or absence of the time-saving game state, the random number for hit determination obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 12, and the determination result of the hit lottery. are mapped.
The main CPU 110a refers to the win determination table and determines whether it is a “win” or a “lose” based on the current time-saving gaming state and the acquired random value for win determination.

According to the hit determination table, when it is in a non-time-saving game state, one hit determination random number value of "19" is determined to be hit, and when it is in a time-saving game state, 19 numbers of "0" to "18". is determined as a hit. Therefore, the ratio of the time-saving gaming state to be determined as winning is higher than the non-time-saving gaming state.

(Normal design decision table)
As shown in FIG. 14 (2), the stop symbol determination table includes the presence or absence of a time-saving gaming state, the random number for determining the winning symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 12, and the normal symbol type ( stop design data) and normal design designation command transmitted to the production control board 130 as information indicating the type of normal design are associated.
The main CPU 110a refers to the stop symbol determination table, and based on the current game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the acquired random number for the winning symbol, stops and displays the normal symbol on the first normal symbol display 19c. And determine the normal pattern stop design data. Then, at the time of starting the variation of the normal pattern, based on the type of the determined normal pattern (normal pattern stop pattern data), a normal pattern designation command as information indicating the type of the normal pattern is determined and transmitted to the performance control board 130. .

(Normal pattern variation pattern determination table)
As shown in FIG. 14 (3), the variation pattern determination table includes the presence or absence of the time-saving gaming state, the result of the hit determination (hit lottery), and the normal pattern variation obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 12. A random value for pattern determination, a normal pattern fluctuation time, and a normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the normal pattern fluctuation time are associated with each other.
The main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table, and determines the variation time of the normal symbol based on the presence or absence of the time-saving gaming state, the result of the winning lottery, and the random number value for determining the normal symbol variation pattern. Then, at the time of starting the fluctuation of the normal pattern, based on the determined fluctuation time, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command as information indicating the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is determined and transmitted to the performance control board 130. - 特許庁

(Open Mode Determination Table for Second Starting Port)
As shown in FIG. 14(4), the second starting port 11a opening mode determination table includes normal symbols (stopped pattern data), the maximum number of opening times (S) of the second starting port 11a (opening/closing member 11b), and , the first opening time and closing time of the second starting port 11a (opening and closing member 11b), the interval time between the first closing time and the second opening time, and the second opening time and closing time are mapped.
The main CPU 110a refers to the opening mode determination table, and based on the stop symbol data, determines the maximum number of times the second starting port 11a (opening/closing member 11b) is opened, the first opening time and closing time, the second opening time and closing time, and the second opening time and closing time. determine the time.

In the open mode determination table, the open mode based on the normal pattern stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2) is more advantageous to the player than the open mode based on the normal pattern stop symbol data = 01 (normal symbol 1). , and the release mode based on the normal pattern stop symbol data = 03 (normal symbol 3) is more advantageous to the player than the release mode based on the normal pattern stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2). there is
Since the normal pattern stop pattern data = 03 (normal pattern 3) most advantageous to the player when winning in the time saving game state is determined, it is more advantageous for the player in the time saving game state than in the non-time saving game state. The second starting port 11a (opening/closing member 11b) is operated as follows.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
A reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 ms), thereby executing the timer interrupt processing described below.

First, in step S101, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area. Next, in step S102, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol time counter, updates the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, updates the normal symbol time counter, and updates the general electric open time counter. Time control processing for updating various timer counters such as update processing is performed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of subtracting "1" from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the general electric open time counter.

In step S103, the main CPU 110a generates a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for judging a special symbol, a random number for judging a special pattern variation pattern, a random number for judging a hit, a random number for judging a normal symbol, and a random number for judging a normal pattern fluctuation pattern. Random number update processing of numerical value is performed. Specifically, "1" is added to each random number counter to update the random number counter. When the added result exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is reset to "0", and when the random number counter completes one cycle, the random number is updated from the initial random number value at that time.

In step S104, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number updating process for updating the initial random number for big hit determination, the initial random number for special symbol determination, the initial random number for hit determination, and the initial random number for normal symbol determination.

In step S105, the main CPU 110a performs input control processing. In this process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input to each switch of the first start opening detection switch 10a, the second start opening detection switch 11c, the gate detection switch 12a, the big winning opening detection switch 13c, and the general winning opening detection switch 14a. Perform input control processing to determine Details of the input control process will be described later.

In step S106, the main CPU 110a collects special symbol determination information (random number for judging a big hit, random number for special symbol determination, reach Judgment random number, random number for fluctuation pattern judgment), fluctuation display of the first special symbol or second special symbol, opening and closing of the big winning opening 13a, setting of the game state, etc. conduct. Details of the special figure special electric control processing will be described later.

In step S107, the main CPU 110a determines the general pattern determination information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 12, displays the variation of the normal pattern, opens and closes the second start port 11a (auxiliary game), and the like. The general map and general electric control processing is performed.

In step S108, the main CPU 110a performs payout control processing. In this process, the main CPU 110a refers to various winning ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs payout control processing for transmitting to the payout control board 120 commands for specifying the number of payouts corresponding to various winning openings. conduct. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes processing for paying out prize balls from the payout device 100 .

In step S109, the main CPU 110a performs abnormality determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 110a detects the occurrence of a magnetic error or radio wave error based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 58a and the radio wave detection sensor 58b. A command is transmitted to the production control board 130. - 特許庁
Further, the main CPU 110a detects the door open state based on the detection signal from the open detection switch 31a, and transmits a door open error detection command to the effect control board 130 when the door open state is detected.
In addition, the main CPU 110a detects a clogging of game balls in the path through which game balls are dispensed from the game ball storage portion based on the detection signal from the tray full detection switch 32a. is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

Also, when it is detected that the error state has been canceled by the states of the input signal and the detection signal, the main CPU 110 a transmits an error cancellation command to the effect control board 130 . Further, from the effect control board 130, to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, a signal for notifying error detection and error cancellation is transmitted again.
The main CPU 110a does not transmit an error cancellation signal depending on the type of error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1. FIG. That is, an error cancellation signal is transmitted for the full tank, the door open state, and the jammed ball, but no error cancellation signal is transmitted for the detection of illegal radio waves.

In step S110, the main CPU 110a outputs external output data (game information) from the game information output terminal plate 90, drive control data to be output to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d, and the first special symbol. 1st display 19a, 2nd special design 1st display 19b, normal design 1st display 19c, 1st special design reservation 1st display 19d, 2nd special design reservation 1st display 19e, normal design reservation 1st 1 display 19f, high probability game state display 19g, time saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j, state confirmation display 19k, etc. process.

In step S111, the main CPU 110a determines the number of payouts during normal payouts, which is the number of payouts of prize balls based on the winning of game balls to various winning ports 10, 11a, and 14 during the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, the low probability non-time-saving gaming state It counts game performance information such as the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 58e in the middle, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 58e regardless of the game state. A game ball counting process is performed for this purpose. Note that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are not affected by changes in the set values (unrelated to the set values), so they are not counted. By doing so, it becomes possible to calculate performance information that eliminates the influence of the set values, and it is possible to make use of this in grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1 .

In step S112, the main CPU 110a calculates a normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number)×100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs, and sets it in the storage area of the main RAM 110c. A normal base value calculation process is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of the base storage area. The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before A fourth area is provided for doing so, and the normal base values of the four game sections including the current one are saved in each area.

In step S113, the main CPU 110a displays the normal base values for the four game sections calculated in step S112 and saved in the base storage area on the information display 113 while switching every five seconds. Performance display data setting processing for setting display data is performed.

In step S114, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing for outputting the signal of the external output data and the drive control data created in step S110 and the signal of the performance display data created in step S113. In addition, display device output processing for outputting a signal such as the display control data created in step S110 is performed. Furthermore, command output processing is performed to output the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to another board.

In step S115, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S101 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(input control processing)
FIG. 16 is a flowchart for explaining input control processing by the main control board 110. FIG.
First, in step S121, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 14a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening 14. When the detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a updates the general winning hole counter used for winning balls by adding predetermined data.

In step S122, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the big winning opening detection switch 13c has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening 13a. When the detection signal is input from the big winning hole detection switch 13c, the main CPU 110a updates the big winning hole prize ball counter used for the prize balls by adding predetermined data, and the main CPU 110a wins the big winning hole 13a. The counter in the big winning hole entry ball counter (C) storage area for counting the game balls played is incremented and updated.

In step S123, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start hole detection switch 10a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 10.

In step S124, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal from the second start hole detection switch 11c has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start hole 11b.
When the main CPU 110a receives the detection signal from the second start opening detection switch 11c, the main CPU 110a performs the same processing as in step S123.
However, in this second starting opening detection switch input process, "1" is added to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area, and the extracted random number value for judging the big hit, the random number value for judging the special symbol, and the reach judgment The random number value is stored in the second special symbol storage area. In other words, the first starting opening detection switch input process and the second starting opening detection switch input process differ only in the storage areas for storing various data, and all other processes are the same.

At step S125, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the gate 12 or not.
In step S126, the main CPU 110a performs winning confirmation detection switch input processing. In this winning confirmation detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from a winning confirmation detection switch (not shown), and the entry counter (D) is updated by subtracting "1" (D←D -1), and determine whether the value of the incoming ball counter (D) is within a predetermined judgment value range (lower limit value < D < upper limit value), and if it is outside the judgment value range, Assuming that an abnormal winning has occurred, an error designation command for abnormal winning is set in the transmission data storage area for performance. Also, if it is within the range of the judgment value, the winning confirmation detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, the error designation command for abnormal prize winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130, which has received the error designation command for abnormal prize winning, performs abnormal prize winning error notification to indicate that an abnormal prize winning error has occurred. notify.

(1st start opening detection switch input process)
FIG. 17 is a flow chart for explaining the first starting port detection switch input processing by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S131, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first starting port detection switch 10a. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 10a is input (step S131; Yes), the process proceeds to step S132, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 10a is not input (step S131; No), the first starting port detection switch input process is terminated.
In step S132, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding predetermined data to and updating the starter prize ball counter used for the prize balls.

Next, in step S133, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the reserved number set in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is less than four. If the number of reservations set in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is less than 4 (step S133; Yes), the process is moved to step S134, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is stored in the storage area. If the set pending number is not less than 4 (step S133; No), the first starting port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S134, the main CPU 110a adds and stores "1" in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area.
In step S135, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for judging a big hit, sequentially searches for empty storage units from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and acquires it in an empty storage unit. A random value for judging a big hit is stored.
In step S136, the main CPU 110a acquires a special symbol determination random number value, sequentially searches for empty storage units from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and selects the empty storage units. The obtained random number for special symbols is stored.

In step S137, the main CPU 110a acquires the game random number value (random number value for reach determination and random number value for variation pattern determination), and the first memory portion in the first special symbol memory area and the first memory portion in order from the free memory portion. , and store the acquired game random numbers (random number for reach determination and random number for variation pattern determination) in an empty storage unit.
In step S138, the main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process. Referring to the preliminary determination table (not shown) corresponding to the current game state, based on the random numbers obtained in steps S135 to S137, the first start for indicating the determination information of the first start opening in advance Determine prize information.

In step S139, the main CPU 110a sets the first starting winning prize designation command based on the first starting winning prize information determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S138 in the effect transmission data storage area.

As a result, the first start winning prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start winning prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start winning prize designation command receives the first start winning prize designation command. Analyzing the winning designation command, and before starting the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first starting winning designation command, over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before that, Predetermined advance notice effect It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a continuous notice of executing the , or a pending change notice of changing the display mode of the pending icon.

However, the first preliminary determination process is determined according to the game state at the time when the game ball enters the first start hole 10 . Therefore, if the gaming state changes before processing the first suspension reserved by the ball entry, there is a possibility that the result of the jackpot determination process, which will be described later, and the result of the first preliminary determination process are different. .

In step S140, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, and refers to the first special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) updated in step S134. Set the symbol memory designation command in the performance transmission data storage area.

In step S141, the main CPU 110a sets the first special symbol reserved display data for displaying the first reserved number on the first special symbol reserved first display 19d (LED lighting or blinking) in a predetermined processing area. Then, the current first starting port detection switch input processing is terminated. As a result, when the first special symbol reserved display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111. The first reserved number is displayed on the symbol reserved first display 19d.

(Processing for inputting the second start opening detection switch)
FIG. 18 is a flow chart for explaining the second starting port detection switch input processing by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S151, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the second starting port detection switch 11c. If the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 11c is input (step S151; Yes), the process proceeds to step S152, and if the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 11c is not input (step S151; No), the second starting port detection switch input process is terminated.
In step S152, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding predetermined data to and updating the starter prize ball counter used for the prize balls.

Next, in step S153, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to a ball entry counter (D) that indicates the number of game balls that have entered the second start hole 11a and updates it (D←D+1).
In step S154, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game is being played. If the auxiliary game is in progress (step S154; Yes), the process proceeds to step S159, and if the auxiliary game is not in progress (step S154; No), the process proceeds to step S155.

In step S155, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to an illegal ball entry counter (E) for monitoring illegal ball entry into the second starting port 11a and updates it (E←E+1).
In step S156, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the illegal ball entry counter is greater than a specified number (10). If the number is greater than the specified number (step S156; Yes), the process proceeds to step S157, and if the number is smaller than the specified number (step S156; No), the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S157, the main CPU 110a assumes that an illegal ball entry has occurred and sets an illegal ball entry error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the illegal ball entry error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that receives the illegal ball ball error designation command notifies the illegal ball ball error and generates an illegal ball ball error. inform you that you have done so.

In step S158, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the illegal ball entry counter (E) to "0".
In step S159, the main CPU 110a updates the second starting hole entry ball counter (L) by adding "1" (L←L+1).

Next, in step S160, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of reserved symbols set in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is less than four. When the number of reservations set in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is less than 4 (step S160; Yes), the process is moved to step S154, and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is stored in the storage area. If the set pending number is not less than 4 (step S160; No), the second start opening detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S161, the main CPU 110a adds and stores "1" in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area.
In step S162, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for judging a big hit, sequentially searches for empty storage units from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area, and acquires it in an empty storage unit. Stores the random number value for judging the jackpot.
In step S163, the main CPU 110a acquires a special symbol determination random number value, sequentially searches for empty storage units from the first storage unit in the second special symbol storage area, and selects an empty storage unit. The obtained random number for special symbols is stored.

In step S164, the main CPU 110a acquires the game random number value (the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for variation pattern determination), and the first memory portion in the second special symbol memory area and the empty memory portion in order. , and store the acquired game random numbers (random number for reach determination and random number for variation pattern determination) in an empty storage unit.
In step S165, the main CPU 110a performs a second preliminary determination process. Referring to the preliminary determination table (FIG. 13) corresponding to the current game state, based on the random numbers obtained in steps S162 to S164, a second start for indicating the determination information of the second start opening in advance. Determine prize information.

In step S166, the main CPU 110a sets a second starting winning prize designation command based on the second starting winning prize information determined in the second preliminary determination process of step S165 in the effect transmission data storage area.

As a result, the second start winning prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the second start winning prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the second start winning prize designation command is the second start winning prize designation command. Predetermined advance notice performance over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before the start of variable display of special symbols corresponding to the second start winning designation command by analyzing the winning designation command. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a continuous notice of executing the , or a pending change notice of changing the display mode of the pending icon.

However, the second preliminary determination process is determined according to the game state at the time when the game ball enters the second start hole 11a. Therefore, if the gaming state is changed before processing the second suspension reserved by the ball entry, there is a possibility that the result of the jackpot determination process described later and the result of the second preliminary determination process will differ. .

In step S167, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area, and refers to the second special symbol corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) updated in step S161. Set the symbol memory designation command in the performance transmission data storage area.

In step S168, the main CPU 110a sets the second special symbol reserved display data for displaying the second reserved number on the second special symbol reserved first display 19e (LED lighting or blinking) in a predetermined processing area. Then, the current second start port detection switch input processing is terminated. As a result, when the second special symbol reserved display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the second special The second reserved number is displayed on the first symbol display 19e.

(Gate detection switch input processing)
FIG. 19 is a flow chart for explaining gate detection switch input processing by the main control board 110 .
First, in step S171, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a is input.

When determining that the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a has been input (step S171; Yes), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reservations (G) is less than 4 in step S172.
When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 12a is not input (step S171; No), the main CPU 110a terminates the gate detection switch input process.
In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 12, the variable display of normal symbols is performed, and the upper limit reserved number of rights for the variable display of normal symbols is set to "4".

When it is determined in step S172 that the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is less than 4 (step S172; Yes), in step S173, the main CPU 110a selects the normal symbols stored in the reserved number of normal symbols (G) storage area. A value obtained by adding "1" to the reserved number (G) is stored as a new normal symbol reserved number (G). When it is determined in step S172 that the number of reserved symbols (G) is not less than 4 (step S172; No), the gate detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S174, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for hit determination, sequentially searches for free storage units from the first storage unit in the normal symbol holding storage area, and obtains it in the free storage unit. Stores a random value for hit judgment.

In step S175, the main CPU 110a obtains a random number value for symbol determination, sequentially searches for vacant storage units from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and acquires the vacant storage units. A random number value for pattern determination is stored.

In step S176, the main CPU 110a acquires a random number value for normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, sequentially searches for an empty storage unit from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and searches for an empty storage unit. Stores the random number value for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern acquired in .
As described above, the random number for hit determination, the random number for symbol determination, and the random number for determination of the normal pattern variation pattern are stored in the predetermined storage section of the normal symbol reservation storage area.

In step S177, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the normal symbol reserved number (G) storage area, and produces a normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the normal symbol reserved number (G) updated in step S173. Set in the transmission data storage area for

In step S178, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol reservation display data for displaying the number of normal symbol reservations on the first normal symbol reservation display 19f (lighting or blinking of the LED) in a predetermined processing area, End the gate detection switch input process. As a result, when the normal symbol reserved display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the normal symbol first display The number of reserved general charts is displayed on the device 19f.

(Special special train control processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining the special figure special electric control processing by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S181, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data, and refers to the branch address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S182.

In step S183, the main CPU 110a, if the special symbol special electric processing data=0 (step S183; Yes), shifts the process to the special symbol storage determination process (step S184).
If the special figure special electric processing data is not 0 in step S183 (step S183; No), the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data=1 in step S185.
If the special figure special electric processing data=1 in step S185 (step S185; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to special symbol variation processing (step S186).

In step S185, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data=2 in step S187 when the special figure special electric processing data is not 1 (step S185; No).
In step S187, if the special symbol special electric processing data=2 (step S187; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the processing to special symbol stop processing (step S188).
If the special figure special electric processing data is not 2 in step S187 (step S187; No), the main CPU 110a determines whether special figure special electric processing data=3 in step S189.

If the special figure special electric processing data=3 in step S189 (step S189; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to the jackpot game process (step S190).
If it is not the special figure special electric processing data=3 in step S189 (step S189; No), the main CPU 110a determines whether the special figure special electric processing data=4 in step S191.
If the special figure special electric processing data=4 in step S191 (step S191; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to the jackpot game end process (step S192).
If the special figure special electric processing data is not 4 in step S191 (step S191; No), the main CPU 110a ends the special figure special electric control process.

(Special symbol memory determination process)
FIG. 21 is a flow chart for explaining the special symbol storage determination processing by the main control board 110. FIG.
First, in step S201, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. Here, when the special symbol is being displayed variably, that is, when the special symbol time counter is not "0" (step S201; Yes), the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and when the special symbol time counter is "0" (step S201 ; No), the process moves to step S202.

In step S202, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is "1" or more, and determines that the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area is not "1" or more. If so (step S202; No), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S204, and if it determines that the second special symbol pending number (U2) storage area is equal to or greater than "1" (step S202; Yes), step The process moves to S203. As a result, the second special symbol storage area is preferentially processed over the first special symbol storage area.

In step S203, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area and stores the result.
In step S204, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area is "1" or more. If it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is not "1" or more (step S204; No), the process is moved to step S215, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is " 1” or more (step S204; Yes), the process proceeds to step S205.
In step S205, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area and stores the result.

In step S206, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the special symbol reservation number (U) storage area decremented in steps S202 to S205. Specifically, the data stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area are shifted to the previous storage unit.

Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage section is written in the judgment storage area (0th storage section), and the data that has already been written in the judgment storage area (0th storage section) is stored in the special symbol reserved storage. It will be erased from the area.

In step S207, the main CPU 110a, based on the data (random number value for judging a big hit, random number value for special symbol judgment) written in the judgment storage area (0th storage section) of the special symbol reservation storage area in step S206, Execute the jackpot determination process.

In step S208, the main CPU 110a sets the effect symbol specifying command corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol data determined in step S207 in the effect transmission data storage area.

In step S209, the main CPU 110a performs variation pattern determination processing.
In the variation pattern determination process, first, the game RAM area of the main RAM 110c is referenced to determine a variation pattern determination table based on the current game state. Specifically, if it is a non-time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 11 is determined, and if it is a time-saving gaming state, the variation for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Determine the pattern determination table. After that, with reference to the random number value for big hit determination, the random number value for special symbol determination, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for variation pattern determination, the variation pattern is determined based on the determined variation pattern determination table.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a sets a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area.
In step S211, the game state at the start of fluctuation is confirmed, and a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state is set in the effect transmission data storage area.
In step S212, the main CPU 110a starts variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol displays 19a and 19b. That is, the special symbol variation display data is set in the processing area. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, thereby the first special symbol first display. Variation display of the device 19a or the second special symbol first display device 19b is started.

First, in step S213, when the main CPU 110a starts the variable display of the special symbols as described above, the special symbol time counter is set to the variable time (counter value) based on the variation pattern determined in step S208 as the special symbol time. set in the counter. The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S214, the main CPU 110a sets the customer waiting state determination flag to 00H. That is, the customer waiting state determination flag is cleared. It should be noted that the customer waiting state determination flag=“00H” indicates that the special symbols are currently being displayed in a variable manner or that the jackpot game is being played. On the other hand, when the special symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner and the jackpot game is not being played (non-game state), the customer waiting state determination flag=“01H” is stored. When the customer waiting state determination flag=“01H” is stored, a customer waiting state designation command is set in step S217 to be described later, and it is transmitted to the effect control board 130 that neither the variable display of special symbols nor the jackpot game is in progress. be done.

In step S215, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and terminates the special symbol storage determination process.
In the above step S204, when the main CPU 110a determines that the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is "0", that is, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) If none of the above is reserved, the main CPU 110a determines in step S215 whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag is set to 01H.

If 01H is set in the customer waiting state determination flag (step S216; Yes), the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if 01H is not set in the customer waiting state determination flag (step S216; No), the process moves to step S217.
In step S217, the main CPU 110a sets the customer waiting state determination flag to 01H so that the customer waiting state designation command is not repeatedly set in step S218, which will be described later.
In step S218, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

(Jackpot determination process)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining the big win determination process by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S<b>221 , the main CPU 110 a determines whether or not the big hit determination process is performed based on the game ball entering the first start hole 10 . When the main CPU 110a determines that it is the first start port (step S221; Yes), it shifts the process to step S222, and when it determines that it is not the first start port (step S221; No), it shifts the process to step 223. .

In step S222, the main CPU 110a selects a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, in step S223, the main CPU 110a selects a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.
In step S224, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the current probability gaming state and the special symbol storage area, and the selected jackpot determination table, ” or “losing”.

In step S225, the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S226 if it determines that it is a "big win" (step S225; Yes), and moves the process to step S227 if it determines that it is a "loss" (step S225; No).
In step S226, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for big win. On the other hand, in step S227, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for losing.

In step S228, the main CPU 110a stores the type of starting port for the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section of the special symbol storage area, and the selected table. Collation is performed to determine the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). The determined special symbol is used to determine the operation mode of opening and closing the big winning opening 13a in the jackpot game process to be described later, and is used to decide the game state after the jackpot game ends.
At step S229, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined at step S228 in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area, and ends the big hit determination process.

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 23 is a flow chart for explaining the special symbol variation processing by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S241, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variable time set in step S212 has passed (whether or not the special symbol time counter is "0"), and the variable time has not passed. If it is determined that (step S241; No), the special symbol variation process of this time is terminated, and if it is determined that the variation time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, the main CPU 110a stops the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) determined in step S228 on the first special symbol first display 19a or the second special symbol first display 19b. display. Specifically, the special symbol stop display data is set in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 19a or the second special symbol first display 19b, and the player is informed of the result of the jackpot determination. will be

In step S243, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol determination command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S244, after starting the stop display of the special symbols as described above, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol time counter to the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds=250 counters). The special symbol time counter is decremented by "1" every 2 ms in step S110.
In step S245, the main CPU 110a sets "2" to the special symbol special electric processing data, and ends the special symbol variation processing.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 24 is a flow chart for explaining special symbol stop processing by the main control board 110 .
First, in step S251, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S244 has passed (whether or not the special symbol time counter is "0"), and the symbol stop time has passed. If it is determined that the symbol stop time has not elapsed (step S251; No), the current special symbol stop process is terminated.

In step S252, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is "ON" in the time saving game flag storage area (that is, whether or not the current game state is the time saving game state), and determines whether the time saving game flag is set. When the time saving game flag is "ON" in the storage area (step S252; Yes), the process is moved to step S253, and when the time saving game flag is "OFF" in the time saving game flag storage area (step S252; No ), and the process proceeds to step S258.

In step S253, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the number of time-saving games (J) stored in the number of time-saving games (J) storage area to update it.
In step S254, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the new number of time-saving games (J) is "0". ), the process moves to step S255, and when it is determined that the number of time-saving games (J) is not "0" (step S254; No), the process moves to step S258.

In step S255, the main CPU 110a turns "OFF" the time saving game flag installed in the time saving game flag storage area. As a result, the time-saving game state is terminated and the game state is shifted to a non-time-saving game state.

In step S256, the main CPU 110a sets time-saving gaming state erasure data for erasing the display (lighting of the LED) of the time-saving gaming state indicator 19h (lighting of the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the time saving game state erase data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in the above step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the time saving game state display device The display of 19h will be erased.

In step S257, the main CPU 110a sets, in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, right-handed deletion data for erasing the display (lighting of the LED) of the right-handed first indicator 19j (turning off the LED). As a result, when the right-handed deletion data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, thereby displaying the right-handed first display device. The display of 19j will be erased.

In step S258, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high-probability game flag is "ON" in the high-probability game flag storage area (that is, whether or not the current game state is the high-probability game state), If the high-probability game flag is "ON" in the high-probability game flag storage area (step S258; Yes), the process proceeds to step S259, the high-probability game flag is "OFF" in the high-probability game flag storage area. If there is (step S258; No), the process proceeds to step S263.

In step S259, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the high-probability number of games (X) stored in the high-probability number of games (X) storage area to update it.
In step S260, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the new number of high-probability games (X) is "0". ; Yes), the process moves to step S261, and when it is determined that the number of high-probability games (X) is not "0" (step S260; No), the process moves to step S263.

In step S261, the main CPU 110a turns "OFF" the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area. As a result, the high-probability game state ends and the game state shifts to the low-probability game state.

In step S262, the main CPU 110a sets high-probability game state erasing data for erasing the display (lighting of the LED) of the high-probability game state indicator 19g (turning off the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, when the high-probability game state erasing data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the high-probability game state The display on the display 19g is erased.

In step S263, the main CPU 110a confirms the current game state and sets a game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S264, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a jackpot symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special figure stop design data stored in the special figure stop design data storage area is a jackpot design (stop design data = 01 to 06), and it is determined that it is a jackpot design. (Step S264; Yes), the process moves to step S266, and when it is determined that the symbol is not a big hit (step S264; No), the process moves to step S277.

In step S277, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a specific losing symbol, or whether or not a predetermined number of variations has been reached. Specifically, whether or not the special figure stop design data stored in the special figure stop design data storage area is a specific losing design (stop design data 20: specific first special design), or whether or not it is continuously lost. It is determined whether or not the number of variations of the first special symbol has reached 750 times, and if it is determined that it is not a specific losing symbol or has not reached the predetermined number of variations, in step S265, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electric processing "0" is set in the data, the special symbol stop processing of this time is terminated, and when it is determined that the specific losing symbol or the predetermined number of fluctuations has been reached, the process is moved to step S278.

In step S278, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game flag setting process. Subsequently, in step S279, the main CPU 110a checks the game state by referring to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and sets the game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S266, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is "ON" in the time saving game flag storage area, and if the time saving game flag is "ON" (step S266; Yes), step S267. When the time saving game flag is "OFF" (step S266; No), the process is moved to step S268.

In step S267, the main CPU 110a sets time-saving gaming state elimination data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the time saving game state erase data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in the above step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the time saving game state display device The display of 19h is erased (the LED is turned off).

In step S268, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is "ON" in the high probability game flag storage area, and if the high probability game flag is "ON" (step S268; Yes), The process moves to step S269, and when the high probability game flag is "OFF" (step S268; No), the process moves to step S270.

In step S269, the main CPU 110a sets high-probability game state deletion data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, when the high-probability game state erasing data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the high-probability game state The display on the display 19g is erased (the LED is turned off).

In step S270, the main CPU 110a sets "3" to the special figure special electric processing data.
In step S271, the main CPU 110a resets the game state and the number of times of time saving. Specifically, the data stored in the high-probability game flag storage area, high-probability game count (X) storage area, time-saving game flag storage area, and time-saving game number (J) storage area are cleared.

In step S272, the main CPU 110a sets a big winning opening opening/closing control table. Specifically, referring to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8, a big winning opening opening/closing control table corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data is set.

In step S273, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time to the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the special figure stop pattern data. Incidentally, the special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S274, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special game (first to third jackpots) based on the big winning opening opening/closing control table set in step S272, and opens according to the type of jackpot game. The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the jackpot game opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S275, the main CPU 110a sets round number display data for displaying the round number of the big win game on the round number display 19i (lighting of the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the round number display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111 to the round number display 19i. The number of rounds will be displayed.

In step S276, the main CPU 110a sets right-handed display data for causing the right-handed first indicator 19j to display right-handed (lighting of the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and performs the current special symbol stop processing. exit. As a result, when the right-handed display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111 to display the right-handed first display device. At 19j, a right-handed indication will be given.

(Jackpot game processing)
FIG. 25 is a flow chart for explaining the jackpot game processing by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S281, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently being opened. For example, if "0" is stored in the number-of-round-games (R) storage area, it means that the game is currently opening. If the main CPU 110a determines that the game is currently being opened (step S281; Yes), the process proceeds to step S282, and if it is determined that the game is not currently being opened (step S281; No), the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S282, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a preset opening time has passed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter set in step S273 has become "0", and if the special game timer counter=0, it is determined that the opening time has passed. If the opening time has not passed (step S282; No), the main CPU 110a ends the big win game process, and if the opening time has passed (step S282; Yes), the process proceeds to step S283.

In step S283, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot game start processing. Specifically, the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area is updated by adding "1" (R←R+1). Here, since no round game has been played yet, "1" is stored in the round game count (R) storage area.

In step S284, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, first, the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area is updated by adding "1" (K←K+1). Here, since the opening of the big winning opening 13a has not yet been performed, "1" is stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area. In addition, in order to open the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 13b is changed from the closed state to the open state to open the big winning opening 13a. In addition, referring to the large winning opening opening/closing control table set in step S272, based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K), the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is determined by a special game timer counter. set to

In step S285, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 . Since this is the first round of the jackpot game, the first open round specification command is set.

In step S286, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the big winning opening 13a is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the large winning opening 13a is open (step S286; Yes), the process proceeds to step S287, and when determining that the large winning opening 13a is not open (step S286; No), The process moves to step S289.

In step S287, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the "open end condition" for ending the opening of the big winning opening 13a is satisfied.
This "open end condition" is that the value of the big winning entrance ball counter (C) reaches the maximum number (for example, 9) or that the maximum opening time has passed (special game timer counter = 0 ) is applicable.
If the main CPU 110a determines that the "open end condition" is satisfied (step S287; Yes), the process proceeds to step S288, and if it determines that the "open end condition" is not satisfied (step S287; No). , ends the jackpot game processing of this time.

In step S288, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening closing process (interval process). Concretely, the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid de-energization stop data for converting the opening/closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a to the closed state is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 13b is changed from the open state to the closed state, and the big winning opening 13a is closed. In addition, referring to the large winning opening opening/closing control table set in the above step S272, based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K), the closing time of the large winning opening 13a is determined by a special game timer. set in the counter. Also, a large winning opening closing designation command indicating that the opening/closing member 13b is to be changed from the open state to the closed state is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the special winning opening closing designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S289, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the big winning opening 13a is currently closed (during an interval). Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d is set. When the main CPU 110a determines that the large winning opening 13a is closed (step S289; Yes), the process proceeds to step S290, and when it determines that the large winning opening 13a is not closed (step S289; No), The process moves to step S290.

In step S290, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the big winning opening 13a has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter has become "0". When the closing time has expired (step S290; Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S291, and when the closing time has not expired (step S290; No), ends the current jackpot game process.

In step S291, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning hole entry ball counter (C) has reached a specified number (9) or the number of opening times (K) has reached the maximum number of opening times. If the main CPU 110a determines that the current round has ended (step S291; Yes), the process proceeds to step S293, and if it determines that the current round has not ended (step S291; transfer processing.

In step S292, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. The number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area is updated by adding "1" (K←K+1). In addition, in order to open the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 13b is changed from the closed state to the open state to open the big winning opening 13a. In addition, referring to the large winning opening opening/closing control table set in step S272, based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K), the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is determined by a special game timer counter. set to

In step S293, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area has reached the maximum number of round games of the current jackpot game. When the main CPU 110a determines that the final round has ended (step S293; Yes), it shifts the process to step S297, and when it determines that the final round has not ended (step S293; No), it shifts the process to step S294. .

In step S294, the main CPU 110a performs round data setting processing. Specifically, "0" is set in the number of open times (K) storage area and the number of balls entered into the big winning slot (C) storage area, and the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area. is added by "1" and updated (R←R+1).

At step 295, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area and updated (K←K+1). In addition, in order to open the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 13b is changed from the closed state to the open state to open the big winning opening 13a. In addition, referring to the large winning opening opening/closing control table set in step S272, based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of times of opening (K), the opening time of the large winning opening 13a is determined by a special game timer counter. set to

In step S296, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S297, the main CPU 110 performs ending transition processing. Specifically, "0" is set in the number of open times (K) storage area, the number of balls entered into the big prize pool (C) storage area, and the number of round games (R) storage area to clear the values in each storage area. Also, the ending time is set to the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the special figure stop pattern data.

In step S298, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S299, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. If the game is currently ending (step S299; Yes), the process proceeds to step S300. The jackpot game processing of this time is terminated.

At step S300, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time has passed. If it is determined (step S300; No), the current jackpot game process is terminated.
In step S301, the main CPU 110a sets "4" to the special figure special electric processing data and terminates the jackpot game.

(Special game end processing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart for explaining special game (jackpot game) end processing by the main control board 110 .
In step S321, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure stop symbol data set in the special figure stop symbol data storage area and the game information in the game state buffer.

In step S322, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game flag setting processing. Specifically, referring to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10, based on the game information in the special figure stop pattern data and the game state buffer loaded in the above step S321, the high probability game flag is stored at the end of the jackpot game. Processing is performed as to whether or not to set a high probability game flag in the area. For example, if the special figure stop symbol data is one of "01", "02", "04", and "05", the high probability game flag is set (turned on) in the high probability game flag storage area.

In step S323, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game number setting processing. Specifically, referring to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10, based on the game information in the special figure stop symbol data and the game state buffer loaded in the above step S321, the number of high probability games (X) storage area to set a predetermined number of times. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", 50000 times is set in the high probability game number (X) storage area.

In step S324, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10, the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area based on the game information in the game state buffer and the stop symbol data loaded in step S321. Perform processing to determine whether or not to allow For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", a flag is set (turned on) in the time saving game flag storage area.

In step S325, the main CPU 110a performs time-saving game number setting processing. Referring to the game state setting data table shown in FIG. 10 (1), based on the game information in the game state buffer and the stop symbol data loaded in the step S321, a predetermined number of times in the time-saving game count (J) storage area. set. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", 50000 times is set in the time saving game number (J) storage area.

In step S326, the main CPU 110a checks the game state by referring to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and sets the game state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. Thereby, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S327, the main CPU 110a sets round number erasure data for erasing the display (lighting of the LED) of the round number display 19i (turning off the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the round number deletion data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, so that the round number display 19i The display will be erased.

In step S328, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0", prepares to shift the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 21, and ends the current special game end processing.

(Public and public electric control processing)
FIG. 27 is a flow chart for explaining the normal/universal power control process by the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S331, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the general electric power processing data, and in step S332 calculates a branch address from the loaded electric power processing data.

In step S333, the main CPU 110a, if the normal pattern/general electric processing data=0 (step S333; Yes), performs normal symbol variation processing in step S334, and ends the current normal/general electric control processing. If it is not the general pattern general electric processing data = 0 (step S333; No), it is determined that the general pattern general electric processing data = 1, the auxiliary game processing is performed in step S335, and the general pattern general electric control processing ends.

(Normal design fluctuation processing)
FIG. 28 is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol variation processing by the main control board 110 .
First, in step S341, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. If the normal design is being displayed in a variable display (the normal design time counter is not "0") (step S341; Yes), the process proceeds to step S358, and the normal design is not being displayed in a variable display (the normal design time counter is "0") ) (step S341; No), the process proceeds to step S342.

In step S342, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol reserved number (G) storage area storing the normal symbol reserved number is 1 or more, and determines whether the normal symbol reserved number (G) storage area When it is determined that the value is 1 or more (step S342; Yes), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that the value of the normal design reservation number (G) storage area is not 1 or more (step S342; No), The normal symbol variation processing of this time ends.

In step S343, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the value stored in the normal number of reserved symbols (G) storage area to update (G←G+1).
In step S344, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the normal symbol reservation number (G) storage area subtracted in step S343. Specifically, each data stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section in the normal symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage section. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage section is written in the determination storage area (0th storage section), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage section) is normally stored in the design reserve storage. It will be erased from the area. As a result, the random number for hit determination, the random number for hit design determination, and the random number for normal pattern variation pattern determination used in the previous game are erased.

In step S345, the main CPU 110a performs hit determination processing. Specifically, the current time-saving game state and the random number value for hit determination stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area are compared with the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 14 (1). It is determined whether or not it is a hit (a normal pattern win lottery).

In step S346, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing. Specifically, whether or not the current state is a time-saving game state, the result of the hit determination in the above step S345, and the random number for normal pattern stop stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area are shown. 14 (2) is collated with the normal symbol stop symbol determination table to determine the normal symbol type (normal symbol stop symbol data) and set in the normal symbol stop symbol storage area.

In step S347, the main CPU 110a sets a normal pattern designation command corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol data determined in step S346 in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the general pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S348, the main CPU 110a performs a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, whether or not the current state is a time-saving game state, the result of the hit determination in the above step S345, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area are shown. 14 (3) is collated with the normal symbol variation pattern determination table to determine the normal symbol variation time (variation pattern).

In step S349, the main CPU 110a sets a normal pattern variation pattern specification command corresponding to the normal pattern variation time (variation pattern) determined in step S348 in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the general pattern variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. FIG.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol fluctuation time determined in step S349 in the normal symbol time counter. Incidentally, the normal symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

In step S351, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol variation display data for causing the normal symbol first display 19c to perform the normal symbol variation display (blinking of the LED) in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, when the normal symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, whereby the normal symbol first display is performed. The variable display of the device 19c is started.

In step S352, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol storage specification command corresponding to the number of normal symbol reservations (G) in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

In step S353, the main CPU 110a sets the above-described normal symbol reserved display data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current normal symbol variation process. As a result, when the normal symbol reserved display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S110, and the created data is output in step S111. The number of normal map reservations is displayed on the display 19f.

In step S354, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol time counter set in step S350 has become "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (S354; Yes), the process proceeds to step S355, and when it determines that the normal symbol variation time has not elapsed (S354; No), this time End the normal symbol variation process.

In step S355, the main CPU 110a sets normal symbol stop display data in a predetermined processing area for stopping and displaying the normal symbol determined in step S346 on the first normal symbol display 19c. Thereby, when the normal symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in the above step S110, and the created data is output in step S111, thereby the normal symbol first display. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the device 19c, and the player is informed of the determination result of the winning lottery.

In step S356, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol determination command indicating stop display of normal symbols in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In step S357, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a winning stop symbol, and if it is a winning stop symbol (S357; Yes), the process proceeds to step S358, and the winning stop symbol is not. In the case (S357; No), this normal symbol variation process is ended.

In step S358, the main CPU 110a sets "1" to the general/universal electrical processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG.

In step S359, the main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game start processing. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 110a first sets the opening state determination table for the second start opening in the main RAM 110c, and sets "1" to the number of openings (S) stored in the number of openings (S) storage area. Add and update (S←S+1). Here, since the opening of the second starting port 11a has not been performed even once, "1" is stored in the number of times of opening (S) storage area. Then, energization data for energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d to open the opening/closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 11b is changed from the closed state to the open state to open the second starting port 11a. In addition, referring to the second starting port opening mode determination table, based on the current number of times of opening (S), the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set to the auxiliary game timer counter, and this time normal symbol fluctuation processing exit. Incidentally, the auxiliary game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S102.

(Auxiliary game processing)
FIG. 29 is a flow chart for explaining auxiliary game processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
First, in step S361, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second starting port 11a is open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the second opening/closing solenoid 11d is set. If the main CPU 110a determines that the second starting port 11a is open (step S361; Yes), the process proceeds to step S362, and if it determines that the second starting port 11a is not open (step S361; ), and the process proceeds to step S367.

In step S362, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a condition for ending the opening of the second starting port 11a is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the second starting entrance ball counter (L) has reached the specified number (10) or the opening time in the current number of openings (S) has passed (auxiliary game timer counter = 0 ) applies. If the main CPU 110a determines that the opening end condition is satisfied (step S362; Yes), the process proceeds to step S363, and if it determines that the opening end condition is not satisfied (step S362; End the game process.

In step S363, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting opening closing process. Specifically, data for de-energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid for converting the opening/closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a to the closed state is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 11b is changed from the open state to the closed state to close the second starting port 11a. In addition, with reference to the second starting port opening state determination table set in step S359, based on the current number of times of opening (S), the closing time of the second starting port 11a is set to the auxiliary game timer counter. . After finishing this process, the current auxiliary game process is finished.

In step S364, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied. The auxiliary game end condition is that the normal electric operation number (D) becomes the preset number of openings of the second starting port 11a, or the value of the second starting port entry ball counter (L) reaches the specified number (10 (individuals). If the main CPU 110a determines that the auxiliary game end condition has been established (step S364; Yes), it moves the process to step S365, and if it determines that the auxiliary game end condition has not been established (step S365; No), this time end the auxiliary game process.

In step S365, the main CPU 110a performs auxiliary game end processing. Specifically, "0" is set in the number of openings (S) storage area of the second starting port 11a and the second starting port entry ball counter (L) storage region to clear the values in each storage region.

In step S366, the main CPU 110a sets "0" to the normal pattern/normal electrical processing data, and prepares to shift the processing to the normal pattern variation processing shown in FIG. When this process ends, the current auxiliary game process ends.

In step S367, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the second starting port 11a has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter has become "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time of the second starting port 11a has ended (step S367; Yes), the main CPU 110a moves the process to step S368, and determines that the closing time of the second starting port 11a has not ended. (Step S367; No), the current auxiliary game process is terminated.

In step S368, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting port opening process. Specifically, the second starting port opening/closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d to open the opening/closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a is set. As a result, the opening/closing member 11b is changed from the closed state to the open state to open the second starting port 11a. In addition, referring to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port set in step S359, the opening time of the second starting port 11a is set to the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S).

(command description)
30 and 31 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG.
One command of the command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is composed of 2 bytes. This command consists of a 1-byte "MODE" as the first data section and a 1-byte "DATA" as the second data section. "MODE" indicates the type of command, and "DATA" indicates the value of the command. This command is sent from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 using a start-stop synchronization with one serial signal.

The ``performance design designation command'' indicates the type of the special design to be stopped and displayed. In addition, since the type of the special design ultimately determines the type of the jackpot and the probability variation gaming state, the production design designation command can also be said to indicate the type of the jackpot and the gaming state.

As for this performance design designation command, when various special designs are determined and the variable display of the special design is started, the performance design designation command corresponding to the determined special design is transmitted to the performance control board 130.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, an effect symbol specifying command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the performance design designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

The "first special symbol storage specification command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, "MODE" is set by "E1H", and the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to

This first special symbol storage designation command is the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the reservation storage number when the reservation storage number stored in the first special design reservation number (U1) storage area is switched. It is sent to the substrate 130 . Specifically, when the value stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area increases or decreases in the above step S140 or the above step S206, the first special symbol storage corresponding to the retained storage number after the increase or decrease A specified command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the first special symbol memory specification command set in the performance transmission data storage area is transmitted to the performance control board 130 . As the first special symbol storage designation command, for example, the first special symbol storage 1 designation command indicating that the number of reservations stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is "1", the first special There is a first special symbol storage 2 specification command indicating that the number of reservations stored in the number of reserved symbols (U1) storage area is "2".

"Second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area, "MODE" is set by "E1H", the number of reserved memories DATA information is set according to

This second special symbol storage designation command is the second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the reservation storage number when the reservation storage number stored in the second special design reservation number (U2) storage area is switched. It is sent to the substrate 130 . Specifically, when the value stored in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area increases or decreases in step S160 or step S206, the second special symbol storage corresponding to the retained storage number after the increase or decrease A specified command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the second special symbol memory designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 . As the second special symbol storage designation command, for example, a second special symbol storage 1 designation command indicating that the number of reservations stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area is "1", a second special There is a second special symbol storage 2 designation command indicating that the number of reservations stored in the number of reserved symbols (U2) storage area is "2".
In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" are collectively referred to as "special symbol memory designation command".

The "special symbol determination command" indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E2H", and the type of special symbol (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol ), "DATA" is set to "01H" for the first special symbol, and "DATA" is set to "02H" for the second special symbol. That is, there are a first special symbol confirmation command and a second special symbol confirmation command as special symbol confirmation commands.

This special symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display device 19a or the second special symbol first display device 19b in step S243, the special symbol confirmation command is the effect transmission data of the main RAM 110c. Set in the storage area. After that, the special symbol determination command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

The "normal symbol determination command" indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and "MODE" is set to "E2H" and "DATA" is set to "03H".
This normal symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display device 19c in step S356, the normal symbol confirmation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal symbol determination command set in the performance transmission data storage area is transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

"First special figure variation pattern specification command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the first special symbol first display 19a, "MODE" is set with "E6H", various DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

This first special figure variation pattern specification command is the first special figure variation pattern corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern when the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol first display 19a is started. A specified command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 . Specifically, in step S208, the first special symbol variation pattern specification command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the first special figure variation pattern specification command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130 . As the first special figure variation pattern specification command, the first special symbol variation pattern 01 specification command corresponding to the variation pattern of loss with a variation time of 8 seconds in the non-time-saving game state, the variation time is 40 seconds in the non-time-saving game state. There is a first special symbol variation pattern 06 designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of.

"Second special symbol variation pattern specification command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the second special symbol first display 19b, "MODE" is set with "E7H", various DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern.

This second special figure variation pattern specification command specifies the second special figure variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined when the special symbol variation display of the second special symbol first display 19b is started. A command is transmitted to the production control board 130 . Specifically, in step S208, a second special symbol variation pattern specification command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the second special figure variation pattern specification command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130 . As the second special figure variation pattern specification command, the second special symbol variation pattern 41 specification command corresponding to the variation pattern of loss with a variation time of 10 seconds in the time saving game state, the variation of the jackpot variation of 40 seconds in the time saving game state There is a second special symbol variation pattern 46 designation command corresponding to the pattern.
In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special figure variation pattern specification command" and the "second special figure variation pattern specification command" are collectively referred to as "special figure variation pattern specification command".

"Start opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)" is information indicating the result of pre-determining the result of jackpot determination, and "MODE" is "E8H" when based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 10 , "MODE" is set to "E9H" when it is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 11a, and DATA information is set according to various winning information.

When the game ball wins the first starting opening 10 or the second starting opening 11a, the starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the determined starting winning information (preliminary determination result) is effect control. It is sent to the substrate 130 . Specifically, in step S139 or step S159, a start winning designation command corresponding to the determined winning information is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the start opening winning designation command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130 .

The "maximum open count specification command" indicates the maximum number of winnings (10) to the big winning opening 13a in one round game. ” is set.
The maximum open count designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when one round game is started. After that, the release maximum count specification command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130 .

The 'round specification command' indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot according to the type of various jackpots, the 'MODE' is set to 'EAH', and the DATA information is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. .

As for this round designation command, when one round game is started, a round designation command corresponding to the number of started rounds is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁Specifically, when opening the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a in step S285 or step S296, a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds to be opened is stored in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. set. After that, the round designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 . As round designation commands, a first round designation command is transmitted when a first round game is performed, and an open second round designation command is transmitted when a second round game is performed.

The "large winning opening closing designation command (interval specifying command)" indicates a closing period (interval) of the large winning opening 13a between rounds. ” is set as “7FH”.
This big winning hole closing designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the closing period (interval) of the big winning hole 13a between rounds starts. Specifically, in step S288, a large winning opening closing designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the large winning opening closing designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

The "opening designation command" indicates the start of various jackpot games (special game state), "MODE" is set to "EBH", and DATA information is set according to the jackpot type. .

As for this opening designation command, when various jackpots start, an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130 . Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game processing in step S274, an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the opening designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 . As the opening designation command, for example, there is an opening designation command for the probability variable jackpot when the probability variable jackpot is performed, and an opening designation command for the normal jackpot when the normal jackpot is performed.

The "ending designation command" indicates that various jackpot games have ended, "MODE" is set to "ECH", and DATA information is set according to the jackpot type.

As for this ending designation command, an ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when various jackpots are finished. Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game ending process in step S298, an ending designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the ending specifying command set in the effect transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the effect control board 130 . As the ending designation command, in the case of the probability variable jackpot, there is an ending designation command for the probability variable jackpot, and in the case of the normal jackpot, there is an ending designation command for the normal jackpot.

The "general pattern designation command" indicates the type of the normal design that is stopped and displayed on the normal design first display device 19c. information is set.
When various normal patterns are determined and variable display of the normal patterns is started, the general pattern designation command corresponding to the determined normal patterns is transmitted to the performance control board 130.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the variable display of normal symbols is started in step S347, the normal symbol designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the general pattern designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

The "normal pattern variation pattern specification command" indicates the normal symbol variation time on the normal symbol first display device 19c, "MODE" is set with "EEH", and various normal symbol variation times DATA information is set.
This general pattern variation pattern specification command is a general pattern variation pattern specification command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation time when the variation display of the normal symbol on the first normal symbol display 19c is started. 130. Specifically, when the normal symbol variation display is started in step S349, the normal symbol variation pattern specification command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation time is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. be done. After that, the normal pattern variation pattern specification command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130.

"Normal pattern storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the normal number of reserved patterns (G) storage area, "MODE" is set with "EFH", DATA according to the number of reserved memories information is set.
This normal design memory specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the number of reserved memories stored in the normal design reserved number (G) storage area is switched. . Specifically, when the value stored in the normal design reservation number (G) storage area increases or decreases in the above step S177 or the above step S345, the normal design storage designation command corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease is the main It is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal symbol memory specification command set in the performance transmission data storage area is transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

"Game state specification command" indicates the game state whether it is a high probability game state and whether it is a time saving game state, "MODE" is set to "FAH", low probability game state And if it is a non-time-saving game state, "DATA" is set to "10H", and if it is a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state, "DATA" is set to "11H", and a high-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state If so, "DATA" is set to "12H", and "DATA" is set to "13H" if it is in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state.

This game state designation command is executed at the time of execution of initialization processing, at the start of special design fluctuation, at the end of special design fluctuation, at the start of the jackpot game and at the end of the jackpot, the game state designation command corresponding to the game state is produced. It is sent to the control board 130 . Specifically, when the RAM clear processing (initialization processing) is performed, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started in the step S210, in the step S263 high probability game flag, high probability game number, time saving game When there is a possibility that the flag and the number of time-saving games (J) have changed, when the high-probability game flag, the number of high-probability games, the time-saving game flag and the number of time-saving games (J) are set in step S326, the current A game state designation command corresponding to the game state is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the game state designation command set in the production transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the production control board 130 .

When power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is sent to the effect control board 130 according to whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized. sent.
The "power-on designation command" indicates that power-on of the gaming machine 1 is accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, and "MODE" is set with "FBH" and "DATA" is set with "00H". It is Specifically, the power-on designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on and the information stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared.

The "power supply restoration designation command" indicates that the turning on of power to the gaming machine 1 does not involve initialization of the main RAM 110c, and "MODE" is set to "FBH", and the game is executed when the power is cut off. If the state is a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, "DATA" is set to "01H", and if it is a low-probability game state and a time-saving game state, "DATA" is set to "02H", with a high probability. "DATA" is set to "03H" in the case of the game state and the non-time-saving game state, and "DATA" is set to "04H" in the case of the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state. Specifically, the power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch 58c is not turned on when the power is turned on.

The "customer waiting state specification command" indicates that the customer waiting state is set in which the variable display of special symbols is not performed, and "MODE" is set to "FBH" and "DATA" is set to "05H". is set.
This customer waiting state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the customer waiting state is established in step S217, and then immediately set in the production transmission data storage area. The customer waiting state designation command that has been set is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

The "set value designation command" indicates the set value set in the game machine 1. Specifically, after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is executed. After being transmitted, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, and "MODE" is set as "FDH", and "DATA" information is set according to the error type.

This error designation command is issued when the game ball enters the second starting port 11a, when detected by the magnetic detection switch 58a or the radio wave detection switch 58b, when detected by the winning confirmation detection switch (not shown), or when the opening/closing door 3 An error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the performance control board 130 at the time of opening, when the tray 5 is full, when a payout abnormality occurs, or the like.

Specifically, when a magnetic/electric wave abnormality is determined in the abnormality determination process of step S109, when abnormal winning is determined in the winning confirmation detection switch input process of step S126, illegal ball entry is detected in step S157. When the determination is made, when the payout control board 120 detects that the open/close door 3 is open, the tray 5 is full, and the game balls to be put out are insufficient, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is produced in the main RAM 110c. is set in the transmission data storage area for After that, the error designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 . As the error designation command, there are a magnetic abnormality error designation command corresponding to the magnetic abnormality and a full abnormality error designation command corresponding to the fullness of the tray 5 .

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been eliminated, and "MODE" is set to "FEH", and information of "DATA" is set according to the type of the eliminated error. is set.
This error release designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130 when the opening/closing door 3 is closed, when the tray 5 is full, when the payout abnormality is resolved, or the like.

Specifically, when the payout control board 120 detects that the opening/closing door 3 is closed, the receptacle 5 is full, or the shortage of game balls to be paid out is detected, an error cancellation designation corresponding to the type of the canceled error is made. A command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. After that, the error designation command set in the performance transmission data storage area is immediately transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 130a of the effect control section 130m will be described.

(Main processing of production control unit)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart for explaining main processing by the effect control section 130m.
When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub 130a performs the following main processing.

First, in step S510, the sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt processing.
In step S520, the sub CPU 130a performs initialization processing. In this process, the sub CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 130b and initializes and sets flags stored in the sub RAM 130c when the power is turned on.

At this time, the sub CPU 130a controls the image display devices 16 and 18, the audio output device 9, the effect button device 6A (the button drive motor 6c, the button vibration motor 6d, the button light emission LED 6e), the effect lever device 6C (the lever vibration motor 6j, the lever Light emitting LED 6k), board driving device 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C, stepping motor), board lighting device 23, frame lighting device 27, winning hole lamp NR and the like are controlled. After receiving an initialization OK signal in response to the initialization instruction signal from both the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the process proceeds to step S530.

In step S530, the sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission for timer interrupt.
In step S540, the sub CPU 130a performs random number update processing for effect. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 130c. After that, the process of step S540 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
FIG. 33 is a flow chart for explaining timer interruption processing by the effect control section 130m.
A reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130m generates a clock pulse at each predetermined cycle (2 ms), reads a timer interrupt processing program, and executes the timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit 130m. be.

In step S601, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area.
In step S602, the sub CPU 130a updates various timer counters used in the effect control unit 130m.
In step S603, the sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the commands stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130a. In addition, when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the effect control unit 130m generates command reception interrupt processing of the effect control unit 130m and stores the received command in the reception buffer. After that, the received command is analyzed in step S603.

In step S604, the sub CPU 130a displays the special symbol second displays 20a and 20b, the normal symbol second display 20c, the special symbol reservation second displays 20d and 20e, the normal symbol reservation second display 20f, and the right-handed second display. Data creation processing of various display control data to be output to the display device 20g is performed.

In step S605, the sub CPU 130a performs command output processing for transmitting various data set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. FIG. In addition, display device output processing for outputting a signal of the display control data created in step S605 is performed.
In step S606, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step S601 to the register of the sub CPU 130a.

(Command analysis processing)
34 and 35 are flowcharts for explaining command analysis processing of commands received from the main control board 110 by the effect control section 130m.
First, in step S610, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the reception buffer. If there is no command in the reception buffer (step S610; No), the sub CPU 130a ends the current command analysis process, and if there is a command in the reception buffer (step S610; Yes), the process proceeds to step S611.

In step S611, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an error specifying command. If it is determined that the command is not an error designation command (step S611; No), the process proceeds to step S613.

In step S612, the sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing for notifying that an error related to the security of the gaming machine 1 has occurred. In this error notification process, the type of the error designation command is determined, the error notification effect corresponding to the type of error that has occurred is determined, the determined error notification effect is set in the error notification effect storage area, and the determined error notification effect is set. to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, an error notification designation command based on the determined error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step S613, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an error cancellation designation command. If it is determined that the command is not an error cancellation designation command (step S613; No), the process proceeds to step S615.

In step S614, the sub CPU 130a performs error notification cancellation processing for canceling the error notification being executed. In this error notification cancellation process, the type of the error cancellation designation command is determined, the error notification effect corresponding to the type of the resolved error is cleared from the error notification effect storage area, and the cancellation information of the resolved error notification effect is transferred to the image control unit. 140, in order to transmit to the lamp control unit 150, an error notification cancellation designation command based on the canceled error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step S615, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a power-on designation command. If it is determined that the command is not a power-on designation command (step S616; No), the process proceeds to step S617.

In step S616, the sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing. In this process, the RAM clear switch 58c is turned on, the information stored in the main RAM 110c is initialized (RAM cleared), and the image control unit 140, the lamp, and the image control unit 140 transmit power-on effect information indicating that the power has been turned on. In order to transmit to the control unit 150, the power-on notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step S617, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a power restoration designation command. If it is determined that the command is not a power restoration designation command (step S617; No), the process proceeds to S619.

In step S618, the sub CPU 130a performs power restoration processing. In this process, the RAM clear switch 58c is not turned on, and in order to transmit the information of the power restoration effect for notifying that the power is turned on to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, the power restoration notification designation command is sub-submitted. It is set in the transmission buffer of the RAM 130c.

In step S619, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If it is determined to be a customer waiting state designation command (step S619; Yes), step When the process is shifted to S620 and it is determined that it is not a customer waiting command (step S619; No), the process is shifted to step S621.

In step S620, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. In this process, after 30 seconds or 60 seconds from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the image display devices 16 and 18 display a customer waiting demonstration image or a power saving image.

In step S621, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, and if it determines that it is a special symbol storage designation command (step S621; Yes), step When the process is moved to S622 and it is determined that it is not a special symbol storage designation command (step S621; No), the process is moved to step S623.

In step S622, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the special figure pending storage number from the special symbol storage designation command, and sets the analyzed special figure pending storage number to the special figure pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. I do.

In step S623, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a starting point winning designation command (prefetching designation command). ; Yes), the process is moved to step S624, and when it is determined that it is not the start opening winning designation command (step S623; No), the process is moved to step S627.

In step S624, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the display mode of the icon (suspended icon, the variable icon) displayed on the image display device 16 should be a special mode, based on the content of the starting winning hole designation command. Icon change notice determination processing for determining the type of icon change is performed.

Specifically, the result and the variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the command are specified from the starting winning hole designation command, and the display mode of the icon is changed from the normal mode to the special mode or the special mode according to the degree of expectation of the big win. Determine a change scenario to change from to another special aspect. For example, the hold icon is displayed in white in the normal (default) display mode, in blue in the special display mode 1, in green in the special display mode 2, in red in the special display mode 3, and in special display mode 4 with a special character. is set to The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the order of normal display mode (white) < special display mode 1 (blue) < special display mode 2 (green) < special display mode 3 (red) < special display mode 4 (special character icon) It is designed to be Then, an icon display designation command for displaying an icon corresponding to the determined change scenario on the first image display device 16 is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step S625, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute a continuous advance notice effect over the variable display (variation effect) of one or a plurality of special symbols based on the result of prior determination, and determines the type of continuous notice effect to be executed. Continuous announcement effect determination processing is performed. again,

“Continuous notice effect” is a type of predictive notice effect that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.

In step S626, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the lamp change effect by the winning opening lamp NR over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols based on the result of the prior determination, and if it is executed, the prize is won. A lamp change effect determination process for determining the type of change in the light emission mode of the lamp (emission color, lighting/blinking) is performed.
"Lamp change effect" means that a jackpot game is executed for the player by changing the lighting mode of the winning entrance lamp NR (white→blue, blue→red, etc.) over one or more variable effects. It is a kind of look-ahead notice production that makes you expect.
According to the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning entrance lamp NR corresponding to the change of the icon. Therefore, synergistic effect with the icon change effect can enhance the performance effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In step S627, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command, and if it is determined to be a special figure variation pattern designation command (step S627; Yes) , The process is moved to step S628, and when it is determined that it is not a special figure variation pattern designation command (step S627; No), the process is moved to step S630.

In step S628, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 or 43, and performs a variable effect pattern determination process for determining one variable effect pattern from among a plurality of types of variable effect patterns.

In step S629, the sub CPU 130a performs a big hit notice effect determination process for deciding a big win notice effect based on the variation effect pattern to be executed.
The “jackpot announcement effect” is an effect suggesting that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be executed during the variable effect.

In step S630, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a production design designation command. When it is determined that the command is not the effect design designation command (step S630; No), the process is moved to step S632.

In step S631, the sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol determination processing for determining the effect symbol 16a to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 16 based on the received effect symbol designation command. In the production design determination process, the production design specification command is analyzed, the production design data constituting the combination of the production design 16a is determined according to the presence or absence of the jackpot and the type of the jackpot, and the determined production design data is stored in the production design storage area. set to

In step S632, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special design confirmation command. When it is determined that the process is not a special symbol confirmation command (step S632; No), the process is moved to step S634.

In step S633, the sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol variation stop processing. In the effect symbol variation stop process, data based on the effect symbol data determined in step S631 and stop instruction data for stop-displaying the effect symbol 16a are transmitted to the sub-RAM 130c in order to stop and display the effect symbol variation. set in the buffer.

In step 634, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal design memory designation command, and when it is determined that it is a normal design memory designation command (step S634; Yes), step When the process is shifted to S635 and it is determined that it is not a normal symbol storage designation command (step S634; No), the process is shifted to step S636.

In step S635, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the number of normal pattern reserved storages from the normal pattern storage specifying command, and the normal pattern reserved display data for displaying the analyzed normal pattern reserved stored number on the second display 20c of normal pattern reservation. is set in a predetermined processing area.

As shown in FIG. 35, in step S636, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command, and determines that it is the normal pattern fluctuation pattern designation command. In the case (step S636; Yes), the process is moved to step S637, and when it is determined that it is not a general pattern variation pattern specification command (step S636; No), the process is moved to step S638.
In step S637, the sub CPU 130a performs a normal pattern fluctuation production pattern determination process for determining one general pattern fluctuation production pattern from a plurality of types of general pattern fluctuation production patterns based on the received general pattern fluctuation pattern specification command. .

In step S638, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal design determination command, and when it determines that it is a normal design determination command (step S638; Yes), the process proceeds to step S639. When it is determined that the process is not the normal design confirmation command (step S638; No), the process is moved to step S640.
In step S639, the sub CPU 130a performs normal symbol variation stop processing. In the normal pattern fluctuation stop processing, in order to stop and display the normal pattern effect pattern, the sub RAM 130c transmits the effect pattern data corresponding to the received normal pattern confirmation command and the stop instruction data for stopping and displaying the normal pattern effect pattern. set in the buffer.

In step S640, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. When it is determined that the command is not the game state designation command (step S640; No), the process is moved to step S643.
In step S641, the sub CPU 130a sets the game state based on the received game state designation command in the game state storage area in the sub RAM 130c.

In step S642, the sub CPU 130 performs an effect mode setting process for setting one of a plurality of effect modes A to G relating to the execution of the variable effect.
The effect mode is for notifying the currently set game state. Specifically, when in a low probability non-time-saving gaming state, set any of the normal modes A to C that notify that the current game state is a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, and when in a high probability non-time-saving gaming state sets a probability variable mode D or E that notifies that the current game state is a high-probability time-saving game state, and when it is a low-probability time-saving game state, informs that the current game state is a low-probability time-saving game state. Set the time-saving mode F or G.

In setting the effect mode corresponding to the current game state, for example, the image display device 16 is caused to display a effect image that notifies the current game information, and/or the pending icon image to be displayed on the image display device 16, By making the display mode of the variable icon image, background image, character image, and effect pattern image different from the display mode in other effect modes, the current game state (low probability short-time game state, low probability short-time game state, high probability Time saving game state) is notified.

For example, in the normal mode A, the background image of the mountain, the effect pattern image of the display mode composed of the numbers (identification part) and the character image (decorative part) are displayed, while in the variable probability mode D , a background image with the image of the sea and a production pattern image in a display mode composed only of numbers (identification portions) are displayed. In addition, while the right-handed promotion image (“Right-handed →” image) is displayed in the variable probability modes D, E and the time-saving modes F, G, the right-handed promotion image is displayed in the normal modes A to C. not.

In addition, when the game ball wins in the first start port 10a in the variable probability modes D and E (time saving modes F and G), the effect symbol image and the background image are displayed, but the pending icon image and the variable icon Images are not displayed (display is restricted).
In other words, when the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during normal mode A to C than when the game ball wins in the first start port 10 in the variable probability / time saving mode D ~ G or when the game ball wins in the variable probability / time saving mode When a game ball wins in the second starting hole 11a during D to G, the pending image and the variable icon image are more likely to be displayed.
In addition, when the game is performed aiming at winning the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time saving mode D to G (left-handed game), the right-handed promotion image is continuously displayed, and "right-handed Please" is displayed, and a voice saying "Please hit right" is output.

For example, as a predetermined switching condition for switching from normal mode A to normal mode B, for example, a predetermined number of times of guaranteed stay has passed, or a mode shift after a predetermined number of times of guaranteed stay has passed. For example, winning a lottery. Specifically, when the normal mode A is set, on the condition that the number of games played in the normal mode A reaches 20 times, the next game (21 times from the start of the game in the normal mode A) rotation) to normal mode B. Alternatively, when the normal mode A is set, after the number of games played in the normal mode A reaches 20 times, a predetermined A mode transition lottery with a winning probability (for example, 1/5) is executed every time one game is started, and on the condition that the mode transition lottery is won, normal mode A is changed from normal mode A to normal mode in the game that wins the mode transition lottery. You may make it switch to B. In addition, it is the same also about probability variable mode and time saving mode.

In step S643, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is the opening specifying command. If it is determined that the command is not an opening designation command (step S643; No), the process proceeds to step S645.

In step S644, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot start effect pattern. In the jackpot performance pattern determination process, a jackpot start performance pattern is determined based on an opening designation command, the determined jackpot start performance pattern is set in a performance pattern storage area, and information on the determined jackpot performance pattern is sent to an image control unit 140. , the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c so as to be transmitted to the lamp control unit 150. FIG.

In step S645, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If it is determined that the command is not a round designation command (step S645; No), the process proceeds to step S647.

In step S646, the sub CPU 130a performs in-round effect pattern determination processing for determining a jackpot effect pattern. In the mid-round effect pattern determination process, a mid-round effect pattern is determined for each round to be started based on a round designation command having information about how many times the round game is to be started. Then, the determined in-round effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c in order to transmit the information of the effect pattern to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. .

In step S647, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending specifying command. If it is determined that the command is not an ending designation command (step S647; No), the current command analysis processing is terminated.

In step S648, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot end effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot end effect pattern. In the jackpot end performance pattern determination processing, a jackpot end performance pattern is determined based on an ending designation command, the determined jackpot end performance pattern is set in a performance pattern storage area, and information on the determined jackpot end performance pattern is sent to an image control unit. 140 and the lamp controller 150, the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

(Continuous notice effect determination process)
FIG. 36 is a flow chart for explaining continuous announcement effect determination processing by the effect control section 130m.
The sub CPU 130a executes a continuous announcement effect determination process when the start winning opening designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is stored in the reception buffer.

In step S651, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start winning opening designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot game, and the content of the effect (special figure scheduled variation pattern).
In step S652, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is currently executable, and if it is determined that the continuous notice effect is executable (step S652; Yes), the process proceeds to step S653. , and when it is determined that it is not the period during which the continuous announcement effect can be executed (step S652; No), the process is moved to step S665.

Examples of the continuous advance notice effects include a character action notice effect, an effect notice effect, a button vibration notice effect, a look-ahead zone effect, and the like.
The "role object movement foretelling effect" is a big hit by executing an operation effect in which any one of the movable effect members 17A to 17C is operated in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of each variable effect in one or a plurality of variable effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests the degree of expectation.

"Effect notice effect" executes an effect effect in which an effect image of a predetermined color (blue, green, red, etc.) is displayed around the effect pattern 16a at the timing immediately after the start of each variable effect in one or more variable effects. This is a production that intermittently suggests the expectation of a big hit.
"Button vibration notice effect (button vibration notice at the start of fluctuation)" is expected to be a big hit by executing the vibration effect by the effect button 6a in a predetermined effect mode at the timing immediately after the start of each change effect in one or a plurality of change effects. It is a production that intermittently suggests degree.
The mode of button vibration notice effect is button vibration time (long vibration, short vibration), button vibration intensity (strong vibration, weak vibration), button light emission (white, red, rainbow light), button vibration pattern. (repeated vibration in small steps, only one vibration, etc.), vibration operation of the movable production members 17A to 17C (weak vibration operation with a small vibration width, strong vibration operation with a large vibration width), or any one or more combinations It is configured.

"Look-ahead zone effect" is a effect that continuously suggests the degree of expectation for a big win by executing a mid-zone effect that displays a zone image from a predetermined timing in one or a plurality of variable effects.
The ``executable period of continuous notice effect'' is that there is no precedence reservation in which the continuous notice effect is executed, that the jackpot game is not being executed, and that the starting gate winning designation command based on the winning of the first starting gate 10 is received. If it does, it is in a low-probability short-time gaming state, and if it receives a start-up winning designation command based on the winning of the second start port 11a, it is a high-probability short-time gaming state or a low-probability short-time gaming state. are mentioned.
As a continuous advance notice effect other than the above continuous notice effect, a light guide plate may be arranged on the front side of the image display device 16, and a light guide plate effect may be executed in which the light guide plate emits blue or red light at the start of fluctuation. good. The expectation of a big hit is higher when the light guide plate emits red light than when it emits blue light.

In step S653, the sub CPU 130a selects a continuous announcement effect type determination table corresponding to the current effect mode.
In step S654, the sub CPU 130a refers to the continuous announcement effect type determination table to determine the continuous announcement effect type (whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, the type of the continuous announcement effect to be executed).

In step S655, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement type is for executing the continuous announcement effect, and if it is determined to execute the continuous announcement effect (step S655; Yes), the process proceeds to step S656, and the continuous announcement effect is executed. If it is determined not to execute the notice effect (step S655; No), the process proceeds to step S665.
In step S656, the sub CPU 130a selects a continuous announcement scenario determination table corresponding to the current effect mode, and shifts the process to step S657.

In step S657, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous announcement effect for executing the accessory action announcement effect has been determined. , and when it is determined that the performance for notifying the action of the accessory is not to be executed (step S657; No), the process is moved to step S659.
In step S658, the sub CPU 130a refers to the continuous announcement scenario determination table to determine the announcement scenario of the accessory action announcement effect, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S659, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a continuous advance notice effect for executing the effect notice effect has been determined, and when it is determined that the effect notice effect is to be executed (step S659; Yes), the process proceeds to step S660. If it is determined not to execute the effect announcement effect (step S659; No), the process proceeds to step S661.
In step S660, the sub CPU 130a refers to the continuous announcement scenario determination table to determine the announcement scenario of the effect announcement effect and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S661, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect for executing the vibration notice effect has been determined, and when it is determined to execute the vibration notice effect (step S661; Yes), the process proceeds to step S662. , when it is determined not to execute the vibration notice effect (step S661; No), the process proceeds to step S662.
In step S662, the sub CPU 130a refers to the continuous announcement scenario determination table to determine the announcement scenario of the vibration announcement effect, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S663, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect for executing the look-ahead zone effect has been determined, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead zone effect (step S663; Yes), the process proceeds to step S664. , when it is determined not to execute the look-ahead zone effect (step S663; No), the current continuous announcement effect determination process is terminated.

In step S665, the sub CPU 130a determines the non-notice scenario of the continuous announcement effect (notice scenario indicating that the continuous announcement effect is not executed), sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and sets the current continuous announcement effect. End decision processing.

The advance notice effect executed based on the non-prediction scenario set in step S665 includes a prize-winning button vibration notice effect, a prize-winning lever vibration notice effect, and a lever actuation notice effect.
"Winning button/lever vibration notice effect" is a vibration effect (effect It is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit by executing a vibration effect without displaying an effective period of the button 6a/the effect lever 6h and an operation promoting image. It should be noted that the likelihood of a big hit is higher in the prize-winning lever vibration notice effect than in the prize-winning button vibration notice effect.

In the case of the button vibration advance notice performance at the time of winning, a button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the performance button 6a strongly vibrates only for 3 seconds, the performance button 6a blinks in red, and a winning effect sound is output. In normal modes A to C, the button vibration notice effect at the time of winning is more likely when SP/SPSP reach is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result) than when normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result). is easily executed (execution rate is high). In other words, when the button vibration forewarning effect at the time of winning is executed, it is suggested that the expectation for the big win is high.
In the case of the prize-winning lever vibration notice performance, the lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the performance lever 6h strongly vibrates only for two seconds, the performance lever 6h blinks in blue, and the winning effect sound is output. In normal modes A to C, the prize-winning effect lever vibration notice effect is more likely to occur when the SP/SPSP reach is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result) than when the normal reach effect is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result). is set so that it is easier to execute (higher execution ratio). In other words, when the prize-winning lever vibration forewarning effect is executed, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for the big win is high.

In addition, based on the advance determination table of FIG. 13, the winning button vibration notice effect is the second starting port 11a when the game ball wins the first starting port 10 in the variable probability / time saving mode D ~ G. It is set so that it is harder to execute than when the game ball wins.
In addition, when the game ball wins the first start port 10 during the variable probability / time saving mode D~G, it is executed more than when the game ball wins the first start port 10 during the normal mode A~C. It is set to be difficult.

(Continuous notice production type decision table)
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a continuous announcement effect type determination table that is referred to for determining the continuous announcement effect type in normal modes A to C (low-probability short-time gaming state (normal game state)).
FIG. 38 is a continuous notice effect that is referred to determine the type of continuous notice effect in probability variable modes D, E and time saving modes F, G (high probability time saving game state, low probability time saving game state (specific game state)) It is a figure which shows a classification determination table.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the continuous notice effect type determination table includes a start winning mouth designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern), a selection rate (%) of each continuous notice effect type, and a continuous notice effect to be selected. A type is associated.

Continuous notice effect types include "non-execution" that does not execute continuous notice effects, "character action notice effect" that executes one of multiple types of continuous notice effects, "effect notice effect", and "button vibration "Forecast effect", "Forecast zone effect", and "Effect forewarning effect & button vibration foreshadowing effect", "Character action foreshadowing effect & Foreseeing zone effect" are provided, in which two types of multiple types of continuous forewarning effects are executed. ing.

For example, in the normal mode, when the first start winning opening designation command (special figure scheduled variation pattern) is lost and the SP reach effect is executed, "non-execution" is determined at 85%, 5 % decides "effect notice effect", 4% decides "character action notice effect", 3% decides "button vibration notice effect", 2% decides "preview zone effect", 1% decides "effect notice effect & button vibration notice effect". In other words, in the normal mode, when the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 and the SP reach effect are executed, the continuous notice by one kind of notice effect is preferable to the continuous notice effect by a plurality of kinds of notice effects. Directing is easier to execute.

For example, when the probability variable / time saving mode, when the first start winning mouth designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is lost and normal fluctuation effect is executed, "non-execution" is determined at 99%, and at 1% " Effect notice production" is determined. That is, in the probability variable/time saving mode, when the winning of the game ball to the first start port 10 causes the loss and the normal fluctuation effect is executed, the continuous notice effect is difficult to be executed.

(Consecutive notice production scenario decision table)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a continuous announcement scenario determination table for normal modes A to C (low-probability short-time gaming state (normal gaming state)).
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a continuous announcement scenario determination table for probability variable modes D, E and time saving modes F, G (high probability short working hours gaming state, low probability short working hours gaming state (specific gaming state)).

In the continuous notice scenario decision table, the number of reserved special symbols, the start winning mouth designation command (special pattern scheduled fluctuation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the notice scenario to be selected are associated. , the prior fluctuations (before 4 fluctuations, before 3 fluctuations, before 2 fluctuations, before 1 fluctuation) in each scenario, and the production mode of the continuous advance notice production in the fluctuations are described.

"Advance variation" means a variation display (variation performance) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start winning opening designation command. .
"The variation" indicates a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start winning opening designation command.

The "weak notice" has a different effect mode depending on the type of continuous notice effect.
In the case of the performance of the performance foretelling the movement of the role object, the first movable production member 17A emits blue light, and the blade part housed in the scabbard part performs a weak movement with a small movement width to the left, and a weak movement sound effect is produced. output. In addition, the performance lever 6h may be moved up and down as a performance for notifying the action of the role product. In this case, the production lever 6h performs a weak action with a small vertical movement width.
In the case of the effect notice effect, a blue effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 16a and a blue effect sound is output.
In the case of the button vibration advance notice performance, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the performance button 6a weakly vibrates for one second, and the performance button 6a flashes white.
In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a blue zone image is displayed and a zone effect sound is output.

The "strong notice" has a different effect mode depending on the type of continuous notice effect. In addition, the "strong notice" has a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the "weak notice".
In the case of the performance of the performance of the character action, the third movable production member 17C emits red light, and the blade section housed in the scabbard section performs a strong action with a large movement width and moves up and down, and a strong action sound effect is produced. output. In addition, the performance lever 6h may be moved up and down as a performance for notifying the action of the role product. In this case, the effect lever 6h performs a strong action with a large vertical movement width.
In the case of the effect notice effect, a red effect image is displayed around the effect pattern 16a, and a red effect sound different from the blue effect sound is output.
In the case of the button vibration advance notice performance, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the performance button 6a strongly vibrates for only 3 seconds, and the performance button 6a blinks in red.
In the case of the look-ahead zone effect, a red heat zone image is displayed and a heat zone sound effect different from the zone sound effect is output.

The continuous notice scenario includes a scenario in which a weak notice and a strong notice are not executed during the prior , a scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak or strong notice is executed is set.

As a first feature of the various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. However, the expectation of the jackpot is high. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As the second feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of differentiating the execution ratio of the continuous notice effect between the normal modes A to C and the probability variable / time saving modes D to G, for example, the normal mode B is more continuous notice effect than the normal mode A Such as making it easier to execute, the execution ratio of the continuous notice effect may be different between the normal modes A to C. For example, the probability change mode E is more likely than the probability change mode D. Continuous notice effect is executed. For example, the execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect may be changed between the variable probability/time saving modes D to G. By doing so, the degree of expectation for the big win of the continuous advance notice effect changes between the same effect modes, so that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a third feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. In modes D to G, continuous announcement effects (here, effect announcement effects, character object action announcement effects) are more likely to be executed when normal ready-to-win effects are scheduled to be executed (prefetch results). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable production from becoming monotonous in the probability variable / short time modes D to G, which tend to have more (ultra) shortened variations than the normal modes A to C, and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As a fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. In the time saving mode D ~ G, when the SP reach production is scheduled to be executed (prefetch result), continuous notice production (here, effect notice production, character movement notice production, look-ahead zone production) is more likely to be executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation performance from becoming monotonous in the probability variation/shortening time mode, in which (super) shortening variation tends to increase more than in the normal modes A to C, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. When the SPSP ready-to-win performance is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) in modes D to G, the continuous announcement performance (here, effect announcement presentation, role object movement announcement presentation, and look-ahead zone presentation) is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation presentation from becoming monotonous in the probability variation/shortening time modes D to G, in which super-shortening variation tends to increase more than in the normal modes A to C, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. When the all-rotation ready-to-win performance is scheduled to be executed (read-ahead result) in the time-saving modes D to G, the continuous announcement performance (here, the character action announcement presentation, the look-ahead zone presentation) is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in the probability variable/shortening time mode, in which the super-shortening fluctuation tends to increase more than in the normal modes A to C, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. effective period (display of operation promotion image)) is likely to be executed (high execution rate = different jackpot expectations). Therefore, in the normal modes A to C, where the length of stay tends to be longer than in the variable probability/time saving modes D to G, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the button vibration notice effect, and to improve the interest of the game. Become. In addition, in the probability variable/time-saving modes D to G in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal modes A to C, the button vibration advance notice performance can be made to have rarity, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the button vibration notice effect may be executed more easily (at a higher execution rate) in the variable probability/time saving modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. In addition, if it is a low-probability short-time gaming state, the normal mode A is easier to execute the look-ahead continuous effect than the normal mode B or C, so that the button vibration notice effect is performed between the normal modes A to C. The execution ratio may be different, and if it is a high-probability short-time gaming state or a low-probability short-time gaming state, than the high-probability / time-saving modes E ~ G, the button vibration notice effect is executed in the probable variable mode D. By making it easy, the execution ratio of the button vibration notice effect may be changed between the variable probability/time saving modes D to G. In this way, since it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for a big win when the button vibration notice effect is executed between the effect modes, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the eighth characteristic of various tables related to the continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. 37 to 40, specific reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) are scheduled to be executed in normal modes A to C. (Look-ahead result), specific reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in probability variable / time-saving mode D ~ G (specific game state) In the case, it is difficult to execute the button vibration forewarning effect (the execution ratio is low). Therefore, in the probability variable/time-saving modes D to G in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal modes A to C, the button vibration advance notice effect can be made to have rarity, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a ninth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. easy (high execution rate). Therefore, in the probability variable/short time modes D to G in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal modes A to C, it is possible to make the performance of the performance of the character action notice rarer, and to improve the interest of the game. .

As a tenth feature of various tables related to continuous advance notice effects shown in FIGS. If the continuous notice effect that ends with one fluctuation effect in time saving mode D to G is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect ) is difficult to execute (percentage of execution is low). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eleventh feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. If the continuous notice effect that ends with two fluctuation effects in normal modes A to C is executed, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect ) is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a twelfth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Modes D ~ G (specific game state) than when the continuous notice effect of only one variation effect is executed, in the normal mode A ~ C when the continuous notice effect of only one variation effect is executed The ready-to-win effect (normal ready-to-win effect, SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect) is more likely to be executed in the variable effect which is the notice target of the continuous notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. In the case where the continuous notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in the variable probability mode D ~ G (specific game state) than the case where the continuous notice effect of only one variable effect is executed in the mode A ~ C In this case, the normal fluctuation effect without the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 14th feature of various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 to 40, the normal mode In the case where the continuous notice effect over three times of variable effects is executed in A to C, the reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is executed in the variable effect that is the subject of the notice of the continuous notice effect. easy. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifteenth feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. In the case where the continuous advance notice performance over three times of fluctuation performance is executed in D to G, it is easier to execute the normal fluctuation performance without the ready-to-win performance in the fluctuation performance to be the notice target of the continuous advance notice performance. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 16th feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. In the case where a continuous notice effect over three times of fluctuation effects is executed in D to G, the reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation effect that is the target of the notice of the continuous notice effect (for example, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect ) is easy to execute. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the seventeenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Although it is possible to execute the object action foretelling performance, the degree of expectation for a big hit when the role object action foretelling performance is executed is different between the normal modes A to C and the probability variable/time-saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. The ratio (100%) of operating any one of the movable production members 17A to 17C is higher than the ratio (0%) of operating all the movable members 17A to 17C used in production. . Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of misunderstanding that a jackpot is won just because the performance for notifying the action of the accessory is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As the 19th feature of various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. The proportion (0%) of the production button 6a in the normal state is higher than the proportion (0%) in which it is in the protruded state. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the effect button 6a projecting (projecting only in the decided effect described later), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Incidentally, in the strong notice of the button vibration notice effect, the effect button 6a may be vibrated in a protruded state instead of being vibrated in the normal state. Even in this case, when the button vibration notice effect is executed in the normal modes A to C and the probability variable / time saving modes D to G, the effect button 6a is in the normal state rather than the ratio of the effect button 6a to the protruding state. It is better to make the ratio of .

As a twentieth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. high-speed fluctuation period), a weak notice of the performance notice of the performance (weak operation of the first movable production member 17A + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the effect notice production (display of a blue effect image around the production pattern 16a) is executed, the weak notice of the button vibration notice effect executed without an effective period (display of the operation promotion image) (weak vibration of the effect button 6a for 1 second) is executed. , the expectation of the jackpot increases. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a 21st feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. high-speed fluctuation period), a strong notice of the character object action notice production (strong action of the second movable production member 17B + red light emission) and a strong notice of the effect notice production (display of a red effect image around the production pattern 16a) The degree of expectation for the big win is higher when the strong notice of the button vibration notice effect (strong vibration of the effect button 6a for 3 seconds) is executed than when is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by using the operation means that the player can operate, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the 22nd feature of various tables related to the continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. Also, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 11, the continuous notice effect is more likely to be executed. Also, as shown in FIGS. Continuous announcement performance is more likely to be executed when a game ball wins in a first start port 10 during normal modes A to C than in a case where a game ball wins in one start port 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, an appropriate game effect can be executed according to the type of effect mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 38 (1), when the game ball wins the second starting port 11a during the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G button vibration notice effect can be executed, but FIG. 38 (2) , even if the game ball wins the first starting port 10 during the variable probability/time saving mode DG, the button vibration notice effect is not executed (execution is restricted (FIG. 38 (2))). That is, when the game ball wins in the second start port 11a than when the game ball wins in the first start port 10a in the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G, the button vibration notice effect is executed. easy.

Incidentally, as the continuous advance notice effect, in addition to the above-described continuous notice effect, any one or all of the winning entrance lamp NR, the board lighting device 23, and the frame lighting device 27 may be used to execute a lamp change effect. good. In addition, when the lamp change effect is executed by the winning hole lamp and the board lighting device 23 (or the frame lighting device 27), the jackpot expectation is higher than the case where the lamp change effect is executed by the winning hole lamp. be high.

Concretely, the lamp change effect includes the first notification that is notified at the timing when the game ball enters the starting port 10, and the second notification that is notified at the symbol variation start timing different from the first notification.

The first notification can be performed in the first mode (the winning entrance lamp blinks or emits blue light) and the second mode (the winning entrance lamp emits red light), and the second notification is performed in the first mode and the second mode. It is possible to execute a third mode (the winning hole lamp and the lighting device for the board emit light, or the winning hole lamp and the lighting device for the frame emit light).
Alternatively, the first notification includes the first mode (the winning hole lamp flashes or emits blue light), the second mode (the winning hole lamp emits red light), and the third mode (the winning hole lamp and board lighting device or the winning hole The lamp and the frame lighting device emit light), and the second notification can be executed in the same first mode and second mode as the first notification, but in the same third mode as the first notification. does not change.

Also, as a continuous notice effect, when "1st notification of lamp light emission effect & button vibration notice effect" and "2nd notice of lamp light emission effect & button vibration notice effect" are provided (multiple types of notice effects is executed), when SP reach or SPSP reach is executed in the variable effect of the notice target, rather than "first notification of lamp light emission effect & button vibration notice effect", "second notification of lamp light effect & "Button vibration notice effect" may be easier to execute, or "Lamp light effect first notice & button vibration notice effect" than "Lamp light effect second notice & button vibration notice effect" may be made easier to execute.

In addition to the continuous notice effect described above, as the continuous notice effect, different loss effect patterns 16a of the same color (for example, "2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 6" displayed in red in one or a plurality of fluctuation effects) (Tiger)” may be stopped and displayed to intermittently suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit, so that a chance prediction effect may be executed. The degree of expectation for the big hit of the chance eye is "yellow"<"green"<"red".

Also, based on FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, the chance notice effect and the button vibration notice effect may be executed. In this case, when the losing performance pattern 16a is stop-displayed in the losing fluctuation performance, and the losing performance pattern 16a (normal losing, ready-to-win losing) not suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win is stop-displayed, the button vibration notice performance is not executed. When the same-color losing performance symbol 16a suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit is stopped and displayed, it can be said that the button vibration forewarning effect can be executed.

When the chance notice effect and the button vibration notice effect are executed, and when the yellow or green losing effect pattern 16a is stopped and displayed, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a is weakened for one second. Along with the vibration, the production button 6a flashes white. On the other hand, when the red losing effect pattern 16a is stopped and displayed, the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a strongly vibrates for only 3 seconds, and the effect button 6a blinks in red.

(Variation effect pattern determination process)
FIG. 41 is a flow chart for explaining the variation production pattern determination processing by the production control unit 130m.
The sub CPU 130a executes a variation performance pattern determination process when the special figure variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is stored in the reception buffer. In this variation production pattern determination process, various production devices (production button device 6A, selection button device 6B, production lever device 6C, board drive device) such as image display devices 16 and 18 are displayed during the variable display of special symbols. 17 (movable production members 17A to 17C), board lighting device 23, frame lighting device 27) is determined.

In step S801, the sub CPU 130a acquires the effect random number value updated in step S540.
Next, in step S802, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42 or 43 with reference to the current game state and effect mode.

In step S803, the sub CPU 130a selects one variable effect pattern from among a plurality of variable effect patterns based on the variable effect pattern determination table set in step S802 and the random value for effect acquired in step S801. to decide.
Next, in step S804, the sub CPU 130a sets a variable effect pattern designation command in the transmission data storage area in order to transmit the variable effect pattern determined in step S803 to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. When the variable effect pattern designation command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 or the lamp control unit 150, the effect button device 6A, the selection button device 6B, the effect lever device 6C, the voice output device 9, The image display devices 16 and 18, the board driving device 17 (movable effect members 17A to 17C), the board lighting device 23, and the frame lighting device 27 are controlled.

In step S805, the sub CPU 130a sets the effect execution time (variable effect time) of the variable effect pattern determined in step S803 to the variable effect timer counter of the sub RAM 130c. It should be noted that the variable effect timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S602. The sub CPU 130a can specify the remaining effect execution time (variable effect time) of the variable effect by the variable effect timer counter, in other words, the time elapsed since the variable effect was started.
In step S806, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect data corresponding to the variable effect pattern in the variable effect data storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S807, the sub CPU 130a specifies special symbol variation display data for causing the first special symbol second display device 20a or the second special symbol second display device 20b to perform special symbol variation display (blinking of the LED). set to the processing area of . As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S605, and the created data is output in step S606. The variable display of the second display 20a or the second special symbol second display 20b is started.

In step S808, the sub CPU 130a sets a special symbol variable display designation command for variably displaying the special symbol TZ in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Incidentally, the special symbol variation display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control section 140 in the data output process of step S606. Then, the variable display of the special symbol TZ in the special symbol variable display area is performed by the image control unit 140 .

(Variation production pattern decision table)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a normal mode variable effect pattern determination table referred to for determining a variable effect pattern in normal modes A to C. FIG.
FIG. 43 (1) is a variable effect pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol in the probability variation / time reduction mode D ~ G, FIG. 43 (2) is the variation of the first special symbol in the probability variation / time reduction mode D ~ G It is a figure which shows the variable production|presentation pattern determination table for probability variation / time reduction mode referred in order to determine the variable production|presentation pattern corresponding to a display.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the variable performance pattern determination table is associated with a special figure variation pattern designation command, a selection rate (%) of each variable performance pattern, and a selected variable performance pattern. As a reference, the production configuration (production mode) in each variable production pattern is described.

The "fluctuation effect pattern" refers to the image display devices 16 and 18, the audio output device 9, the effect button device 6A, the selection button device 6B, the effect lever device 6C, the board driving device 17 (movable Effect members 17A to 17C), the board lighting device 23, the frame lighting device 27, the winning entrance lamp NR, and other various effects devices are used to produce variable effects.

"Normal fluctuation" in the column of effect configuration indicates that normal fluctuation display (production time: 8 seconds) in which the ready-to-win state does not occur is performed by the effect pattern 16a.
"Long fluctuation" means that the production time is longer than the normal fluctuation production (production time: 8 seconds) (production time: 10 seconds), and the long fluctuation display without reach state that does not generate the reach state is performed. .

“Shortened variation” means that the rendering time is shorter than the normal variable rendering (rendering time: 8 seconds) (rendering time: 4 seconds), and the shortened variation display without the reach state is performed. .
"Super-shortened fluctuation" means that the production time is shorter than the reduced-variation production (production time: 4 seconds) (production time: 3 seconds), and the ultra-shortened fluctuation display without reach that does not generate the reach state is performed. ing.

"Pseudo" is a pseudo-continuous notice effect, and is a effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit by performing temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo-continuous effect) of the effect pattern 16a one or more times during one fluctuation effect. be.
"Pseudo-flashing" means that, as a result of executing the fanning production of whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice will be executed, a pseudo-flashing fluctuation production that results in the fact that the pseudo-continuous notice will not be executed (pseudo-failure) is executed. It is shown that.
"Pseudo 1" indicates that the first temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 16a are performed as a pseudo continuous notice.
"Pseudo 2" indicates that the effect pattern 16a is temporarily stopped and changed again (pseudo continuous effect) for the second time as a pseudo continuous notice.
"Pseudo 3" indicates that the effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped and changed again (pseudo continuous effect) for the third time as a pseudo continuous notice.

"Normal reach" indicates that the normal reach effect described above is performed.
"Normal '7'ready-to-win" indicates that the above normal ready-to-win effect is performed in the ready-to-win state by the effect pattern 16a of "7".

"SP reach" indicates that the above-described SP reach effect is performed. A special effect image, a movie, or the like is displayed as the SP reach effect. For example, a battle effect in which an ally character battles with an enemy character or a mission effect in which a commanded mission is performed is performed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-described special SP reach effect is performed.

"SPSP ready-to-win" indicates that the above-described SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed. A special effect image or movie is displayed as the SP reach production, for example, a battle production or mission production different from the SP reach production, or a battle production developed from the SP reach production battle or a mission developed from the SP reach production. A mission is performed.
"Full-rotation reach" indicates that the above-described full-rotation reach effect is performed.
"Special reach A" indicates that a special reach performance is performed rather than the normal reach performance.
“Special ready-to-reach B” indicates that a special ready-to-reach performance is performed rather than the special ready-to-reach performance.
“Special ready-to-reach C” indicates that a special SPSP ready-to-reach effect is performed rather than the SPSP ready-to-reach effect.

“SP development” indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP ready-to-win effect is executed is performed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that the SPSP ready-to-win effect will be executed.
“Full-rotation development” indicates that a development effect suggesting that a full-rotation reach is performed is performed.
"Decision" means that a decision effect that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will be executed is executed according to the operation of the effect button 6a or the operation of the effect lever 6h during the valid period or the elapse of the valid period. showing.

"Re-lottery" refers to whether or not the production pattern 16a temporarily stopped in the jackpot display mode according to the judgment result of the jackpot will be in a jackpot display mode that is advantageous to the player (from the even-numbered pattern that is a normal jackpot to the odd-numbered jackpot that is a certainty). Whether or not the symbols are matched, and whether or not the most advantageous jackpot game is executed from the odd-numbered symbols matching other than 7) is aroused, and then promotion success performance is performed in which an advantageous jackpot display mode is performed. It shows that a re-lottery effect is performed in which either promotion failure effect that does not result in an advantageous jackpot display mode is executed.
"Resurrection" means that a revival performance in which either a revival failure performance or a revival success performance is executed to indicate whether or not a revival jackpot will be achieved after the ready-to-win performance is executed and results in a failure performance is performed. showing.

In the variable production pattern determination table for normal modes A to C shown in FIG. 42, in the case of the special symbol 00 (losing), the variable production pattern 03 (normal reach production), and the fluctuation production patterns 05 and 06 (SP reach production), even numbers 70% of the ready-to-win production is performed with the production pattern 16a of "7", 30% of the ready-to-win production is performed with the odd-numbered production pattern 16a other than "7", and the ratio of the ready-to-win production is performed with the production pattern 16a of "7". is 0%.

In the case of special pattern 00 (losing) and variable production patterns 05 to 10 (SP reach production or SPSP reach production), the ratio of reach production performed with even production pattern 16a is 55%, odd numbers other than "7" The ratio of the ready-to-win performance with the performance pattern 16a is 43%, and the ratio of the ready-to-win performance with the performance pattern 16a of "7" is 2%.

In the case of the special symbol 01 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable performance patterns 13 and 14 (SP reach performance), the ratio of the reach performance to be performed with the even number performance symbols 16a is 60%, and the odd number performance symbols 16a other than "7". 40% of the reach effects are performed.

In the case of the special symbol 01 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 17 to 21 (SPSP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to be performed with the even number production pattern 16a is 6%, and the odd number production pattern 16a other than "7". 90% of the ready-to-win performance is performed with , and 4% of the ready-to-win performance is performed with the effect pattern 16a of "7".

In the case of the special pattern 02 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 17 to 21 (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to be performed with the even number production pattern 16a is 60%, "7". The ratio of the ready-to-win effect to be performed with the odd-numbered effect pattern 16a other than the above is 40%, and the ratio of the ready-to-win effect to be performed with the effect pattern 16a of "7" is 0%.

In the case of special symbol 03 (ordinary jackpot) and variation patterns 17 to 21 (normal ready-to-win effect, SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect), the ratio of ready-to-win effect with even-numbered effect pattern 16a is 100%.

In the case of a special pattern 04 (probable variable jackpot), a special pattern 05 (probable variable jackpot), a special pattern 06 (normal jackpot) and a variable production pattern 30 (special SP ready-to-win production), a ready-to-win production is performed with an even number of production patterns 16a. The percentage is 100%.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for variable/time saving modes D to G shown in FIG. , SPSP ready-to-win performance), the ratio of ready-to-win performance with even-numbered performance patterns 16a is 60%, and the ratio of ready-to-win performance with odd-numbered performance patterns 16a other than "7" is 40%.

In the case of the special pattern 04 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 43 and 44 (SP reach production), the proportion of the reach production performed with the even number production pattern 16a is 60%, and the odd number production patterns 16a other than "7". 40% of the reach effects are performed.

In the case of the special pattern 04 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 45 and 46 (SP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to be performed with the even number production pattern 16a is 20%, and the odd number production pattern 16a other than "7". 30% of the ready-to-win performance is performed with , and 50% of the ready-to-win performance is performed with the effect pattern 16a of "7".

In the case of the special pattern 04 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 47 to 51 (SPSP reach production), the ratio of the reach production to be performed with the even number production pattern 16a is 3%, and the odd number production pattern 16a other than "7". 2% of the ready-to-win production is performed with , and 95% of the ready-to-win production is performed with the effect pattern 16a of "7".

In the case of the special pattern 04 (probability variable jackpot) and the variable production patterns 52 and 53 (full rotation reach production), the ratio of the reach production performed with the even number production pattern 16a is 20%, and the odd number production patterns other than "7". The ratio of ready-to-win production performed in 16a is 30%, and the ratio of ready-to-win production to be performed in the production pattern 16a of "7" is 50%.

In the case of the special symbol 05 (normal jackpot) and variable production patterns 54 to 59 (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production), the ratio of the ready-to-win production with the even production pattern 16a is 100%. .

As the first feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1), reach production (normal reach production, SP The ratio of the ready-to-win production with the even-numbered production pattern 16a (the production pattern 16a that is usually a big hit) is higher than the ratio of the ready-to-win production and the SPSP ready-to-win production. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the odd-numbered performance symbol 16a other than "7" results in a big win, thereby improving the interest in the game.

As a second feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1), the proportion of the ready-to-win production performed with the even-numbered production pattern 16a (the production pattern 16a that usually becomes a big hit) is "7". The ratio of reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) is lower in the performance pattern 16a (the most advantageous probability variable jackpot performance pattern 16a). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance pattern 16a of "7" results in a big win, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a third feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1), reach production (normal reach production, SP Reach production (normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production) is performed with the production pattern 16a of "7" (the production pattern 16a that becomes the most advantageous probability variable jackpot) than the ratio of the reach production, SPSP reach production) is performed. less Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the joy of the player when the performance pattern 16a of "7" results in a big win, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1), the ready-to-win effect is executed with the even-numbered effect pattern 16a or the odd-numbered effect pattern 16a other than "7". When the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 16a of "7", the expectation for the big win is higher. Therefore, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player as to which type of effect pattern the ready-to-win effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the fifth feature of the variable production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1), the probability variation / time saving mode D ~ G is the most advantageous probability variation than the normal mode A ~ C In the case of a big hit, the ready-to-win effect (SPSP ready-to-win effect) is likely to be executed with the effect pattern 16a of "7". Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the variable probability/time saving modes D to G, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a sixth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1), in the normal modes A to C, even if the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 16a of "7", the jackpot is not determined. However, in the probability variable/time saving modes D to G, when the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 16a of "7", the big hit is determined. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect in the variable probability/time saving modes D to G, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As the seventh feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 (1), when the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G is better than when the normal mode A ~ C, SPSP reach performance A variation performance pattern for a big win, in which a failure performance is performed and then a resurrection success performance is performed, is likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big hit variation effect in the variable probability mode from becoming monotonous, and to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 (2), the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G, and in the case of a loss determination result, loss variation A normal variable effect is executed as the effect (that is, the ready-to-win effect is not executed). Therefore, the game ball enters the first start port 10 during the normal modes A to C than when the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time reduction mode D to G and the loss variation effect is executed. The ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed when winning and the losing variation effect is executed.
In addition, the type of variable performance pattern in which the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time saving mode D to G and the loss variation performance is executed is the first start port 10 in the normal mode A to C. There are fewer types of variable performance patterns executed in the losing variable performance when the game ball wins or wins in the second starting port 11a during the probability variable/time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute a game suitable for the current game state, thereby improving the interest in the game.

As the ninth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 (2), when the game ball wins the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G and the big hit variable effect is executed , the special ready-to-win effect (special ready-to-reach B) of the same effect mode is likely to be executed (execution ratio is high).
In addition, the type of reach effect that is executed in the big hit variation effect by winning the game ball in the first start port 10 during the variable probability / time saving mode D ~ G is the game at the first start port 10 during the normal mode A ~ C There are fewer types of ready-to-win performances that are executed in the big hit variable performance by winning the ball or entering the second starting port 11a during the probability variable/time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute a game suitable for the current game state, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, although the ready-to-win performance is always executed in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, a variable performance pattern may be provided in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is executed.

(Jackpot announcement production decision processing)
FIG. 44 is a flow chart for explaining the jackpot announcement effect determination processing by the effect control unit 130m.
The sub CPU 130a executes the jackpot announcement effect determination process based on the variable effect pattern determined in the variable effect pattern determination process.

In step S810, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern executed in the current variation effect.
In step S811, the sub CPU 130a determines the notice effect pattern of the pre-reach notice effect that makes the player expect that the jackpot game will be executed in the effect period (high-speed fluctuation period) before the reach in the current variable effect. A pre-reach announcement determination table is selected to determine whether or not to execute the announcement effect and the type of announcement pattern to be executed.

In step S812, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute a dialog notice effect. The process proceeds to S813, and if the speech announcement effect is not to be executed (step S812; No), the process proceeds to step S815.

"Dialogs notice effect" means that an effective period is generated during a variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period), an operation promotion image is displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 6a, and the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period. This is a kind of big win advance notice performance in which a speech image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed on the image display device 16 according to the elapse of the effective period, and a voice corresponding to the speech image is output from the voice output device 9. - 特許庁

In step S813, the sub CPU 130a selects the dialogue announcement pattern determination table (see FIG. 46) for determining the dialogue announcement pattern of the dialogue announcement effect and determines the dialogue announcement pattern.
In step S814, the sub CPU 130a sets a speech announcement effect command corresponding to the speech announcement pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a dialog announcement effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a dialog announcement effect corresponding to the dialog announcement pattern is executed during the variation effect.

In step S815, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice effect is to execute the step-up notice effect, and if the step-up notice effect is to be executed (step S815; Yes). , the process moves to step S816, and if the step-up notice effect is not to be executed (step S815; No), the process moves to step S818.

"Step-up advance notice effect" refers to the first step (first stage) to fifth step (final stage) without generating an effective period during the variable effect (high-speed fluctuation period) and without displaying an operation promotion image. ) is a kind of jackpot announcement effect in which step effects are executed in a predetermined order until any one of a plurality of steps (stages) is reached.

In step S816, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 47) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice effect and determines the step-up notice pattern.
In step S817, the sub CPU 130a sets a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern in the transmission buffer. Thereby, the step-up notice effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the step-up notice effect corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation effect.

In step S818, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect, and if it is a variable effect pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect (step S818; Yes). , the process moves to step S819, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect (step S818; No), the process moves to step S821.

In step S819, the sub CPU 130a selects the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 48) for determining the pseudo-continuous effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous effect and determines the pseudo-continuous effect pattern.
In step S820, the sub CPU 130a sets a pseudo-continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is executed during the variable effect.

In step S821, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing the development performance (SP development performance, SPSP development performance, full rotation performance), and determines whether or not the current variation performance pattern is a variation performance pattern for executing the development performance. If it is an effect pattern (step S821; Yes), the process moves to step S822, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes an extended effect (step S821; No), the process moves to step S824.

In step S822, the sub CPU 130a selects the development effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 49) for determining the development effect pattern and determines the development effect pattern.
In step S823, the sub CPU 130a sets a development effect command corresponding to the development effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the development effect is executed during the variable effect.

In step S824, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing a ready-to-win performance (normal reach performance, SP ready-to-reach performance, SPSP ready-to-reach performance, full rotation ready-to-reach performance). (step S824; Yes), the process proceeds to step S825, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a ready-to-win effect (step S824; No), this big hit notice effect determination process is terminated. .

In step S825, the sub CPU 130a selects a cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 50) for determining a cut-in effect pattern indicating whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the mode of effect.
"Cut-in effect" means that an effective period is generated during the variable effect (during the pre-reach effect or during the reach effect) and an operation promoting image is displayed, and when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period or the effective period elapses In response, the image display device 16 displays a cut-in image suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win, and the sound output device 9 outputs a cut-in effect sound corresponding to the cut-in image.

In step S826, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a cut-in effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect, and if it is a cut-in effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect (step S826; If the pattern is not a cut-in effect pattern for executing a cut-in effect (step S826; No), the process is moved to step S828.

In step S827, the sub CPU 130a sets a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the cut-in effect command is transmitted to the image control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the development effect is executed during the variable effect.

In step S828, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, and if it determines that it is a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect (step S828; Yes ), when it is determined that it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a determined effect (step S828; No), the process proceeds to step S831.

In step S829, the sub CPU 130a selects the determined effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 51) for determining the determined effect pattern and determines the determined effect pattern.
In step S830, the sub CPU 130a sets a final effect command corresponding to the final effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the determined effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the determined effect is executed during the variable effect.

In step S831, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect, and if it is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect (step S831; Yes). , the process moves to step S832, and if it is not a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect (step S831; No), the process moves to step S834.

In step S832, the sub CPU 130a selects a re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 55) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect and determines the re-lottery effect pattern.
In step S833, the sub CPU 130a sets a re-lottery effect command corresponding to the re-lottery effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a re-lottery effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the re-lottery effect is executed during the variation effect.

In step S834, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable effect pattern is a big hit variable effect pattern for executing a fixed effect. If Yes), the process proceeds to step S835, and if it is not a big hit variable effect pattern for executing a fixed effect (step S834; No), this time's big hit notice effect determination process is terminated.

"Fixed production" means that before the three production patterns 16a are fixed and displayed in a combination display mode indicating the judgment result of the big hit (that is, before the judgment pattern of the special pattern is confirmed and displayed as a big hit pattern), This is a kind of jackpot notification performance for definitely notifying the player of the jackpot.

In step S835, the sub CPU 130a selects a confirmed effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 57) for determining the effect pattern of the confirmed effect and determines the confirmed effect pattern.
In step S836, the sub CPU 130a sets a confirmed effect command corresponding to the confirmed effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the fixed effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the fixed effect is executed during the variable effect.
In step S837, the sub CPU 130a selects a resurrection effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 58) for determining resurrection effect patterns and determines development effect patterns.
In step S838, when the effect pattern for executing the resurrection effect is determined, the sub CPU 130a sets a resurrection effect command corresponding to the determined resurrection effect pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the resurrection effect command is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the resurrection effect is executed during the variable effect.

Various productions determined by the jackpot announcement production decision process (pre-reach production (dialogue announcement production, step-up announcement production, pseudo continuous production), development production, cut-in production, decision production, re-lottery production, final production, resurrection production) , there is a case where the vibration effect is executed by the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h.
The mode of vibration production is button/lever vibration time (long vibration, short vibration), button/lever vibration intensity (strong vibration, weak vibration), button light emission/lever light emission (white, red, rainbow light). , button/lever vibration pattern (repeated vibration in small steps, only one vibration, etc.), vibration operation of movable production members 17A to 17C (weak vibration operation with a small vibration width, strong vibration operation with a large vibration width). or one or more combinations.

(Preliminary decision table before reach)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a pre-reach announcement determination table referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the pre-reach announcement effect.
As shown in FIG. 45, the before-reach announcement determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each announcement pattern, and the announcement pattern to be selected.

Three types of advance notice patterns of the advance notice effect before reach are set: "no notice", "word notice effect", and "step-up notice effect" in which the advance notice effect before reach is not executed. Expectations for the jackpot are: No notice <Dialogue notice effect <Step-up notice effect.

The first feature of the advance notice decision table before reach shown in FIG. 45 is that the advance notice effect before reach is more likely to be executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss in the judgment result of the big hit, and the fluctuation effect with a low expectation for the big win. The before-reach announcement performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win is determined than when the pattern is determined. It is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the execution of the jackpot game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that when the big hit determination result is a loss, the pre-reach notice effect is executed in the probability variable / short time modes D to G rather than in the normal modes A to C. hard to be It becomes difficult to execute a useless pre-reach pre-notice effect in the variable probability/time-saving mode in which the symbol variation time is likely to be shortened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a third feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. Modes D to G are more difficult to execute the pre-reach announcement effect. It becomes difficult to execute a useless pre-reach pre-notice effect in the variable probability/time-saving mode in which the symbol variation time is likely to be shortened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fourth feature of the before-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 45, the degree of expectation for big win is higher when the step-up notice effect is executed than when the dialogue notice effect is executed. It is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.
It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big win may be higher in the case where the dialogue foretelling effect is executed than in the case where the step-up foretelling effect is executed.

As a fifth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. 45, the first When a game ball wins in the starting port 10, the pre-reach announcement performance is more likely to be executed.
In addition, in the probability variable/time saving mode, when the game ball wins the second starting port 11a than when the game ball wins the first starting port 10, the pre-reach notice performance is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute an appropriate game effect in accordance with the current effect mode, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first start port 10 during the probability variable/time saving mode and the big hit variation performance is executed, the execution ratio of the advance notice performance before the ready-to-win performance is different according to the type of the ready-to-win performance to be executed. The pre-ready-to-win announcement performance is more likely to be executed when the special ready-to-reach B is performed than the special ready-to-reach A is performed, and the pre-ready-to-win announcement performance is more likely to be performed when the special ready-to-reach C is performed than the special ready-to-reach B is performed.

(Dialogue notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a dialog announcement pattern determination table referred to when determining a dialog announcement pattern of a dialog announcement effect.

As shown in FIG. 46, the big hit determination result, the type of variation effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each speech notice pattern, and the speech notice pattern to be selected are associated with the speech notice pattern determination table. For reference, the effect structure of each notice pattern is described.

"Valid period: single hit/3 seconds" in the column of effect configuration indicates that the effective period of the dialogue advance notice effect ends when the effect button 6a is operated once or three seconds elapse.

The "operation prompting effect" in the effective period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 6a during the effective period of the speech advance notice effect. Specifically, it consists of an opaque effect button image that imitates the effect button 6a and a gauge image that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period (3 seconds) in which a single hit operation of the effect button 6a is valid by the length of the gauge. An operation prompting image is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promoting effect means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a normal state that does not protrude and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image. This indicates that the effect button 6a emits white light.
The "button state" indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the valid period, and the "normal" button state indicates the normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude.

"Normal dialogue (text color: black)" in the dialog image/sound column and the text color column is a normal dialog that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed. It indicates that the dialogue will be output as voice.
“Chance dialogue (text color: black)” indicates that the chance dialogue that has the possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black characters and that the chance dialogue is output by voice.

"Reach lines (text color: black)" indicates that the lines for which the ready-to-win effect is to be executed are displayed in black characters and that the lines for reach are output by voice.
"Reach dialogue (character color: red)" indicates that the reach dialogue for which execution of the reach effect is confirmed is displayed in red characters and that the reach dialogue is output by voice.

“Hot lines (character color: red)” indicates that hot lines that are highly likely to execute a jackpot game are displayed in red characters, and that ready-to-win lines are output by voice.
“Extremely hot lines (text color: gold)” indicates that intensely hot lines that have a very high possibility of executing a jackpot game are displayed in gold letters, and that the intensely hot lines are output by voice. ing.

"Possible words (text color: rainbow)" indicates that the positive words confirming the execution of the jackpot game are displayed in rainbow colored characters, and that the positive words are output by voice.
The expected degree of jackpot in each dialogue production mode is “normal dialogue (black)” < “chance dialogue (black) < “reach dialogue (black)” < “reach dialogue (red)” < “heat dialogue (red)” < “ Fierce lines (gold)"<"Accurate lines (rainbow)".

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a vibrates 1 from the time the effect button 6a is operated at the start of the display of the dialogue or from the end of the valid period. It shows that a weak vibration production that vibrates weakly over a period of seconds is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor 6d strongly vibrates for 1 second from when the effect button 6a is operated at the start of display of the dialogue or from the end of the effective period. Which indicates that.
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is “weak vibration” < “strong vibration”.

A first feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 is that when a speech with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (heat speech or higher) is displayed, it is possible to execute a vibration presentation in which the presentation button 6a is vibrated. there is Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the dialogue forewarning pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46, the dialogue foretelling effect of intensely hot dialogue with a higher expectation for a big win than the heat dialogue is executed than when the dialogue foretelling effect of the heat dialogue is executed. Vibration effect of the effect button 6a is more likely to be executed in the case of Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

When the speech announcement performance of hot lines is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher when the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is executed than when the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed when the dialogue forewarning effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the speech notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 is that the vibration presentation of the presentation button 6a, which is executed when a speech with a high degree of expectation for a big win (more than a heat speech) is displayed, is for a relatively short time. ing. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of mistaking that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the speech advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are types. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the dialogue notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. Since the vibration period of the vibration performance when operated and the vibration period of the vibration performance when the performance button 6a is not operated during the effective period are the same vibration period (1 second), a big win is expected depending on the vibration intensity. It is possible to suggest the degree and improve the interest of the game.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the speech advance notice effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed, and the strong vibration effect is longer than the vibration time of the weak vibration effect. may be lengthened.

In addition, the expected degree of jackpot when the vibration production of the production button 6a is executed at the time of the dialogue announcement production is the same in the normal modes A to C and the probability variable / time saving modes D to G, but in the normal modes A to C It may be possible for the probability variation / time reduction mode D to G to have a higher jackpot expectation than the probability variation / time reduction mode D to G, and for the probability variation / time reduction mode D to G to have a higher jackpot expectation than the normal mode A to C. good too. By doing so, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of the performance mode, and it is easy for the player to increase the player's expectation of winning in the probability variable/time-saving modes D to G which are advantageous to the player, thereby improving the amusement of the game. It is possible to

Further, the effective period is terminated by the operation of the effect button 6a or the expiration of the effective period, and the speech announcement effect is executed. You may make it not perform an advance notice production. When the dialogue announcement effect is not executed, the vibration effect is not executed either.

In addition, the effective period is generated (with the operation promotion image displayed) to execute the dialogue notice effect, but the dialogue notice effect is executed without generating the effective period (operation promotion image is not displayed) You may make it When executing the dialogue announcement effect without generating the effective period (without displaying the operation prompting image), only one second of weak vibration effect or only one second of strong vibration effect may be performed.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table referred to when determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 47, the step-up notice pattern determination table corresponds to the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and the step-up notice pattern to be selected. attached. For reference, the effect structure of each notice pattern is described.

"SU1→SU2" in the effect mode column indicates that the first step effect and the second step effect are executed in order.
"SU1→SU2→SU3" indicates that the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect are executed in order.
"SU1→SU2→SU3→SU4" indicates that the first step effect, the second step effect, the third step effect, and the fourth step effect are executed in order.
"SU1→SU2→SU3→SU4→SU5" indicates that the first step effect, second step effect, third step effect, fourth step effect, and fifth step effect are executed in order.
"SU1->SU2->SU3->SU5" indicates that the fifth step effect is executed after the first step effect, the second step effect and the third step effect are executed in this order.
In each step performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

"Yes" in the column of effect sound indicates that a step-up effect sound is output.
1st step sound effects in the 1st step production, 2nd step sound effects in the 2nd step production, 3rd step sound effects in the 3rd step production, 4th step sound effects in the 4th step production, and 1st step sound effects in the 5th step production A 5-step sound effect is output. These first to fifth step sound effects are different sound effects.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at "SU5"" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor 6d weakly vibrates the effect button 6a for 1 second from the start of the fifth step effect. It indicates that

The jackpot expectation of each step-up production mode is “SU1 → SU2” < “SU1 → SU2 → SU3” < “SU1 < SU2 < SU3 < SU4” < “SU1 < SU2 < SU3 < SU4 < SU5” < “SU1 < SU2<SU3<SU5”.

A first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. (No promotion image is displayed) Vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with a high expectation of a big win is performed is for a relatively short time. . Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of mistaking that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. ) has only one predetermined type (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up notice performance in which the player cannot grasp the type of vibration performance without operating the performance button 6a, it is possible to suppress the complication of the performance mode and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

As a fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, the step-up notice performance with a low jackpot expectation when the variable probability modes D to G become a jackpot rather than the normal modes A to C. is difficult to implement. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, when the variable probability/time saving mode D ~ G becomes a big hit than the normal mode A ~ C, the weak vibration production is easily executed. . Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. No display of operation promotion image) The degree of expectation for a big hit when the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

A seventh feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. No sound (sound effect) is output. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the vibration performance due to the output of the performance sound, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that normal modes A to C are better than probability variable / time saving modes D to G, without generating an effective period in the step-up notice effect (no display of operation promotion image) Vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be increased in the case of

(Pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 48 shows a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a pseudo-continuous effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 48, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table corresponds to the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of the variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and the pseudo-continuous effect pattern to be selected. attached. For reference, the effect configuration of each pseudo-continuous effect pattern is described.

"Valid period: single hit/3 seconds" indicates that the effective period of the pseudo-continuous effect ends when the effect button 6a is operated once with a single hit or 3 seconds elapse.
The "operation promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 6a during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image that imitates the effect button 6a, and a gauge image that indicates the remaining period of the operation valid period (3 seconds) in which one single hit operation of the effect button 6a is effective by the length of the gauge. is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promoting effect means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a normal state that does not protrude and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image. This indicates that the effect button 6a emits white light.
"Protruding button white" means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a that is in a projecting state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a emits white light. indicates that
The degree of expectation for a big win for each operation prompting image is "normal button white"<"protruding button white".

The "button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the effective period, and the "normal" button state indicates the normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude. , "Protrusion" indicates that the production button 6a is in a protruding state.
The degree of jackpot expectation for each button state is "normal"<"protruding".

"Pseudo-failure" in the column of the effect mode means that the pseudo-failure in which the central effect symbol 16a suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped and the normal effect symbol 16a is temporarily stopped. is shown.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that the pseudo-continuous success is achieved by temporarily stopping the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect as the central effect symbol 16a.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the production button 6a is operated for 1 second from the end of the effective period or when the production button 6a is operated when the pseudo symbol is stopped. It shows that a weak vibration effect is executed in which weak vibration is performed over a period of time.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that when the button vibration motor 6d is operated when the effect button 6a is stopped or when the effective period ends, a strong vibration effect is executed for 1 second. It is shown that.
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is “weak vibration” < “strong vibration”.

“With role product action” in the column of role product action in pseudo-success indicates that any one of the movable production members 17A to 17C performs a role product action production in which it operates and emits light in a predetermined manner.
The "role object action effect" means that after any of the movable effect members 17A to 17C starts moving from the standby position to the effect position, any of the movable effect members 17A to 17C that has moved to the effect position is in the standby position. It is a production until the return to is completed.
Specifically, the first movable effect member 17A emits blue or red light, and after performing a weak movement with a small movement width in which the blade part housed in the sheath moves leftward from the standby position, it returns to the standby position. .

"With sound effects" in the column of sound effects for pseudo-failure indicates that a failure sound effect is output.
"With sound effect" in the column of effect sound for pseudo-success indicates that the effect sound for pseudo-success is output.

The first feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that when a variable effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is executed and a pseudo-continuous success effect is performed, the effective period of the effect button 6a is generated ( With display of operation prompting image) Vibration effect for vibrating the effect button 6a is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that the variation effect pattern has a high degree of expectation for a big win, and the vibration effect that is executed when the pseudo-continuous success effect is performed has a relatively short time. ing. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types depending on Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 48, the same production device (button vibration motor, movable production member) is used in normal modes A to C and probability variable / time saving modes D to G Pseudo-continuous performance (pseudo-continuous success performance) can be executed, but the degree of expectation for a big hit is high when the pseudo-continuous performance (pseudo-continuous success performance) using the same performance device is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation in the variable probability / time saving modes D to G, which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the interest of the game. Become.

As a fifth feature of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. There is a case where a continuous effect (pseudo continuous success effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Incidentally, there is a case where the effect button 6a during the effective period when the simulated consecutive success effect is performed in the variable effect pattern (variable effect pattern in which the all-rotation ready-to-win effect is executed) with a high degree of expectation for the big hit is projected. However, the projecting state may be prevented.

Further, although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong start effect as the vibration effects executed in the pseudo continuous success effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be used.
In addition, the effective period is generated (with the display of the operation promotion image) and the pseudo continuous success effect and the pseudo continuous failure effect are executed, but the effective period is not generated (no operation promotion image is displayed) A pseudo consecutive success effect or a pseudo consecutive failure effect may be executed. As for the vibration effect to be executed in the simulated continuous success effect, only weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or only strong vibration effect for 3 seconds may be performed, or only weak vibration effect for 1 second or only strong vibration effect for 1 second may be performed. good too.

In addition, pseudo-continuous production (pseudo-continuous success production) using the same production device (button vibration motor, movable production member) is performed in normal modes A to C rather than variable / time saving modes D to G. You may make it the big-hit expectation degree of a case become high.
Also, the degree of expectation for a big win may be higher in the normal mode B or C than in the normal mode A when the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect) using the same effect device is executed. .
In addition, the variable probability mode D or E is designed to have a higher expectation for a big hit when a pseudo continuous performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using the same performance device is executed than the time saving mode F or G. good too.

Also, in the pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous success effect), the character action effect using the first movable effect member 17A is executed. , the execution ratio of the performance of the role object action using the second movable effect member 17B may be increased, or the first movable effect member 17A may be used more than the role object action effect using the second movable effect member 17B. You may make it the execution ratio of the role object operation|movement production|presentation which was used become high.
Note that the role object action effect using the second movable effect member 17B is an action in which the second movable effect member 17B emits red light and moves downward from the standby position to the front side of the central area of the display screen of the first image display device 16. It is a production that returns to the standby position after performing a strong action with a large width.

In addition, even if the game ball wins in the first start port 10 during the probability variable / time saving mode D to G, only the normal fluctuation effect is executed in the case of the determination result of losing, so the pseudo continuous effect (pre-reach effect) Not executed (execution restricted).
In other words, when the game ball wins in the first start port 10 in the normal mode A to C than in the case where the game ball wins in the first start port 10 in the variable probability / time saving mode D ~ G, pseudo It is easy to perform a continuous performance.

(Development effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a development effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a development effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 49, the development performance pattern determination table includes performance modes, jackpot determination results, types of variable performance patterns, types of development performances for which development performance patterns are determined, and selection rates (%) of each development performance pattern. ), and the selected development effect pattern is associated with it. For reference, the production configuration of each development production pattern is described.

The “valid suggestive effect” is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images simulating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed on the first image display device 16, and a plurality of translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position. be.
"None" in the effective suggestive production column indicates that the effective suggestive production is not executed, and "Yes (gase)" means that the effective suggestive production is executed, but the effective period does not occur after that. "Yes" indicates that the effective suggestive effect is executed and the effective period occurs after that.

"Valid period: long press/4 seconds" indicates that the development effect progresses step by step by long pressing of the effect button 6a and that the effective period of the development effect ends when 4 seconds elapse.
The "operation promoting effect" in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 6a during the valid period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image displayed at a specific position without executing the effective suggestive effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestive effect, and the operation effective period during which one single-press operation of the effect button 6a is valid. An operation prompting image composed of a gauge image indicating the remaining period of (4 seconds) by the length of the gauge and a character image of "long press" is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promoting effect means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a which is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image. This indicates that the button 6a emits white light.
"Normal button red" means that a button image that imitates the production button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque production button image, and the production button 6a emits red light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the effective period column indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the effective period, "normal" indicates the normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude, and "protruding ” indicates that the effect button 6a is in a projecting state.

"SP notification" in the column of the development mode indicates that the SP development effect suggesting the development to the SP ready-to-win effect is executed as a result of the development effect.
"SPSP notification" indicates that an SPSP development effect suggesting development to an SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed as a result of the development effect.
"Full spin notification" indicates that a full spin development production suggesting development to a full spin ready-to-win production is executed as a result of the development production.

The "SP development pattern" in the column of the image of the content of the development effect indicates that the SP development pattern suggesting the development to the SP ready-to-win effect is derived and displayed.
"SPSP development pattern" indicates derivation display of an SPSP development pattern suggesting development to SPSP ready-to-win production.
"Full spin development pattern" indicates derivation display of a full spin development pattern suggesting development to a full spin ready-to-win effect.

"Development sound effect A" in the effect sound column of the development effect content indicates that the development effect sound A is output when the SP development pattern is derived and displayed.
"Development sound effect B" indicates that the development sound effect B is output when the SPSP development pattern is derived and displayed.
"Development sound effect C" indicates that the development sound effect C is output when the full rotation development pattern is derived and displayed.
The development sound effect A, the development sound effect B, and the development sound effect C are different sound effects.

The "weak action" in the column of character action means that the first movable production member 17A emits blue light when various patterns are derived and displayed (at the end of the effective period), and the blade part is stored in the sheath from the standby position. It shows that the robot returns to the standby position after performing a weak motion with a small motion width moving to the left.
"Strong action" means that the second movable effect member 17B emits red light at the time of derivation display of various symbols (at the end of the valid period), and from the standby position to the front side of the central area of the display screen of the first image display device 16. It indicates that a strong action effect is executed in which a strong action with a wide action width of downward movement is performed.
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each character action effect is "weak action"<"strong action".

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the production button 6a is weak for 1 second from the time of derivation display of various development symbols (end of the valid period). It shows that a vibrating weak vibration effect is executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor 6d strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time when various advanced symbols are derived and displayed (at the end of the effective period), and a strong vibration effect is executed. there is
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration effect is “weak vibration” < “strong vibration”.

As a first feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. A vibrating effect is executed in which the effective period of the button 6a is generated and the effect button 6a is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the full-rotation development effect, in which the expectation of a big win is higher than the SPSP development effect, is executed rather than the SPSP development effect. , the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is likely to be executed.
Also, when the SPSP development performance is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher when the vibration performance is executed than when the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed when the SPSP development effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The third feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that it is a variation effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big win, and is executed when a development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) with a high degree of expectation for a big win is performed. The vibration effect that is displayed is a relatively short time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly effective performance while suppressing the inconvenience of making the player misunderstand that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49, the vibration of the vibration effect that is executed when the variation effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for the big win and the development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed There are two types of intensity depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49, the same effect device (button vibration motor 6d, first movable effect member 17A or 2nd movable production member 17B) using the development production (SPSP development production, etc.) can be executed, but rather than normal modes A ~ C, the probability variable / short time mode D ~ G is the production device (button vibration motor 6d, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high when the development effect using the movable effect members 17A to 17C) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the game performance depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation in the variable probability / time saving modes D to G, which are advantageous for the player, and to improve the interest of the game. Become.
Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effects executed in the development effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.

In addition, normal modes A to C are more advanced than variable / time saving modes D to G using the same production device (button vibration motor 6d, first movable production member 17A or second movable production member 17B) The degree of expectation for a big win may be increased when (SPSP development effect, etc.) is executed.
In addition, in normal mode B or C, development effects using the same effect device (button vibration motor 6d, first movable effect member 17A or second movable effect member 17B) were executed more than in normal mode A. You may make it the big-hit expectation degree of a case become high.
In addition, the probability variation mode D or E may be higher than the time saving mode F or G when the development performance using the same performance device is executed.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting port 10 during the probability variable/time saving modes D to G and the special reach is performed, the development effect can be executed. Therefore, when the game ball enters the first starting port 10 during the probability variable/time saving modes D to G and the special reach is executed, the vibration performance can be executed along with the execution of the development performance.

(Cut-in effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 50 shows a cut-in effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a cut-in effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the cut-in notice effect pattern determination table, the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern (reach type), the selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, the selected cut An in-effect pattern is associated. For reference, the production configuration of each cut-in production pattern is described.

The “valid suggestive effect” is an introductory effect suggesting that the validity period may occur. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed on the first image display device 16, and the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.

"Valid period: single hit/4 seconds" means that the effective period of the cut-in notification effect ends when the effect button 6a is single-hit, or 4 seconds elapse without the effect button 6a being operated. This indicates that the
The “operation prompting effect” in the valid period column is an effect that prompts the operator to operate the operating means during the valid period. Specifically, the opaque effect button image displayed at a specific position without executing the effective suggestive effect or as a result of executing the effective suggestive effect, and the operation effective period during which one single-press operation of the effect button 6a is valid. An operation prompting image composed of a gauge image indicating the remaining period of (4 seconds) by the length of the gauge and a character image of "press" is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promoting effect means that a button image imitating the effect button 6a which is in a normal state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image. This indicates that the button 6a emits white light.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image simulating the effect button 6a that is in a projecting state and emits red light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and that the effect button 6a emits red light. showing.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a projecting state and emits rainbow light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and that the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. showing.

"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the effective period.
"Normal" in the button state column indicates a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude.
"Protrusion" indicates a protruding state in which the production button 6a protrudes.

“Blue cut-in” in the image column of the cut-in rendering mode indicates that a cut-in image with a blue frame is displayed on the first image display device 16 .
“Green cut-in” indicates that a green frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 16 .
“Red cut-in” indicates that a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 16 .
The degree of expectation for a big hit of each cut-in image is "blue cut-in"<"green cut-in"<"red cut-in".

"Sound effect A" in the column of effect sound indicates that the cut-in sound effect A is output when the blue cut-in is displayed.
"Sound effect B" indicates that the cut-in sound effect B is output when the green cut-in is displayed.
"Sound effect C" indicates that the cut-in sound effect C is output when the red cut-in is displayed.
The cut-in sound effect A, the cut-in sound effect B, and the cut-in sound effect C are different sound effects.

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column is when the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a starts displaying the cut-in image (when the effect button 6a is operated or when the effective period ends) It shows that a weak vibration presentation is executed for three seconds from .
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor 6d strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from when the cut-in image starts to be displayed (when the effect button 6a is operated or when the effective period ends). indicates that it will be executed.
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each vibration production is "weak vibration production"<"strong vibration production".

A first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a big win is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the effective period of the effect button 6a is generated. (With display of operation prompting image) Vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high expectation of a big win is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) is relatively long. It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types depending on the degree. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by the vibration intensity of the vibration presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although there are a weak vibration effect and a strong vibration effect as the vibration effect executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effect or only the strong vibration effect may be performed.
In addition, the effective period is generated (with the operation prompt image displayed) and the cut-in effect is executed, but the effective period is not generated (the operation prompt image is not displayed) and the cut-in effect is executed. You may do so. When the cut-in effect is executed without generating the valid period, only 3 seconds of weak vibration effect or only 3 seconds of strong vibration effect may be performed, or only 1 second of weak vibration effect or 1 second of strong vibration effect may be performed. may be used only.

(decision production pattern decision table)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a determined effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a determined effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 51, the determined effect pattern determination table includes the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern (reach type), the effect mode of each ready-to-win effect, and the selection rate (%) of the effect mode of each ready-to-win effect. ), and a determined effect pattern corresponding to the selected effect mode is associated. For reference, the production configuration of each determined production pattern is described.

"Battle A to C" in the column of the production mode of the ready-to-win production are productions in which a friend character and an enemy character battle (in battles A to C, different enemy characters appear). At the end of the battle, the last attack (kick attack/punch attack/lariat) for the ally character to defeat the enemy character accompanying one single-hit operation of the production button 6a or one tilting operation of the production lever 6h during the valid period. Attack) is carried out, and if the enemy character falls, the battle is won, and if the enemy character does not fall, the battle is defeated.

"Mission A" is an effect in which large rocks are destroyed step by step as the effect button 6a is hit repeatedly. If the rock can be completely destroyed during the valid period, the mission will be successful, and if the rock cannot be completely destroyed during the valid period, the mission will be failed.

"Mission B" means that the level value of the level meter (speed meter) of the running motorcycle increases step by step (for example, 0→1→2...10 (MAX) 10 level values). If the level value of the level meter reaches MAX during the validity period, the mission succeeds, and if the level value of the level meter does not reach MAX during the validity period, the mission fails.

"Effective suggestive effect" in the effect configuration column is an introductory effect that suggests that the effective period may occur. Specifically, a translucent effect button image simulating the effect button 6a and a translucent effect lever image simulating the effect lever 6h are moved and displayed on the first image display device 16, and the translucent effect button is directed toward a specific position. It is an effect that gathers images and translucent effect lever images.

In the case of a judgment result of a big hit, a vibration performance (for example, a strong vibration for 2 seconds) may be performed by strongly vibrating the performance button 6a when the effective suggestion performance is performed. Also, even if the execution ratio of the vibrating effect in the effective suggestive effect is higher when the jackpot symbols with odd-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed than when the jackpot symbols with even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed. good. When the vibration performance is executed during the effective suggestion performance, it is notified that the big win expectation is high.

The "effective period" in the column of the effect configuration means that the effective period of the determined effect ends with the operation of the effect button 6a (single hit operation/continuous hit operation/long press operation) or the operation of the effect lever 6h (tilt operation ) or when five seconds elapse without the effect button 6a/effect lever 6h being operated.

The "type of operation means" in the column of effective period indicates the type of operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) whose operation is valid during the effective period. The operation becomes effective, and if it is the "production lever", it indicates that the operation of the production lever 6h becomes effective.

The "operation prompting effect" is a effect that prompts the user to operate the operation means (the effect button 6a and the effect lever 6h) during the effective period. Specifically, the operation of the opaque effect button image or the opaque effect lever image displayed at a specific position and the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is effective as a result of executing the effective suggestive effect or without executing the effective suggestive effect. An operation prompting image composed of a gauge image indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period (5 seconds) by the length of the gauge and a character image of "press, repeat, press and hold, or close" is displayed.
It should be noted that the operation promotion effect ends with the operation of the operating means (the effect button 6a, the effect lever 6h) during the valid period, or when the valid period (5 seconds) elapses without the operating means being operated. .

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promoting effect means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a is displayed. indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image simulating the effect button 6a that is in a projecting state and emits red light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and that the effect button 6a emits red light. showing.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a projecting state and emits rainbow light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and that the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. showing.

"Normal lever" indicates that a lever image imitating the production lever 6h of a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque production lever image.
“Large lever rainbow” indicates that a lever image simulating the effect lever 6h larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image.
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each operation promotion effect is "normal button white"<"protruding button red"<"normal lever"<"protruding button rainbow"="large lever rainbow".

"State of operation means" indicates the state of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the effective period, and "normal" is a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude. , If it is the production lever 6h, it is a normal state that does not protrude, and "protrusion" indicates that it is in a protruding state if it is the production button 6a, and if it is the production lever 6h, it is in a protruding state indicates that there is
The jackpot expectation degree of the state of the operating means is "normal"<"protruding".

The "operation mode" indicates the type of operation mode of the operation means (the production button 6a, the production lever 6h) during the effective period.
"Single hit" in the operation mode column indicates that the effect button 6a is pressed once from the position in the normal state or the protruded state to the pressed position, and "Consecutive hits" means that the effect button 6a is pressed from the position in the normal state. "Long press" indicates that the effect button 6a is continuously pressed to the pressed position, and "tilting" means that the effect lever 6h is moved to the normal state. It shows tilting in the front-rear direction from the position.

The “decision failure effect” in the column of the determination effect mode indicates that an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed.
"Determined success effect" indicates that an effect suggesting that a jackpot game is executed is executed.
"Failure image" in the result image column indicates that a dark image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 16, and "success image" indicates that a success effect image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 16. is displayed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the column of button/lever vibration is determined by the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the production button 6a, and after strong vibration for 4 seconds from the start of the successful production, 1 A strong vibration performance (determined success vibration performance) that strongly vibrates over 5 seconds with an interval of seconds is executed, and a lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the performance lever 6c determines 4 from the start of the success performance. It shows that a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second after the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds.

"Rainbow luminescence (11 seconds)" in the column of button/lever luminescence is determined by the button luminescence LED 6e for illuminating the production button 6a for 11 seconds from the start of the successful production (from the strong vibration of the production button 6a). rainbow light emission over a long period), and the lever light emission LED 6k for lighting the production lever 6h is determined for 11 seconds from the start of the successful production (longer period than the production lever 6h strongly vibrates) It shows that it emits rainbow light.

"None" in the column of role product action indicates that the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
"Yes" in the column of role product action is a role product action effect (determined action effect) in which the movable effect members 17A to 17C operate and emit light in a predetermined manner. The execution period of the performance of the action of the role (decision motion performance) is 10 seconds from the start of the determination success performance.
The "role object action effect (determined action effect)" means that the movable effect members 17A to 17C start moving from the standby position to the effect position all at once, and then the movable effect members 17A to 17C at the effect position move to the standby position. It is a production until the return of is completed.
Note that the performance of the action of the movable performance members 17A to 17C is performed from the time when the movable performance members 17A to 17C start moving from the standby position to the performance position until the time when the movable performance members 17A to 17C start returning from the performance position to the standby position. may be

More specifically, an effect action in which the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left, and an effect action in which the second movable effect member 17B moves downward from the standby position to the front side of the center of the screen of the image display device 16. , and the effect action in which the blade portion of the third movable effect member 17C moves upward is performed all at once (determination action), and after each movable effect member 17A to 17C emits rainbow light, each movable effect member 17A to 17C Return to standby position. The role product action effect in which the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C perform the effect action all at once is executed when the decisive effect among the plurality of kinds of jackpot notification effects is performed.

On the other hand, in the pseudo-continuous production and development production, the performance action (weak action) by the first movable production member 17A or the production action (strong action) by the second movable production member 17B is performed. That is, in the pseudo-continuous production and development production, a role product action production different from the role product action production in which the first to third movable production members 17A to 17C perform the production action all at once is executed.

“None” in the column of sound effects indicates that the sound output device 9 does not output sound effects (sound effects).
"Success sound effect" indicates that the sound output device 9 outputs a success sound effect as a dramatic sound. As for the success effect sound, a success effect sound A is output in the case of a decision success performance with the performance button 6a as an operation target, and a success sound effect different from the success effect sound A is output in the case of a decision success performance with the performance lever 6h as the operation target. A sound effect B is output.
Note that the success effect sound may be the same for the determined success performance with the performance button 6a as the operation target and the determination success performance with the performance lever 6h as the operation target, or success when the performance button 6a is in the normal state. Even if the sound effect, the success sound effect when the production button 6a is in the projecting state, the success sound effect when the production lever 6h is in the normal state, and the success sound effect when the production lever 6h is in the projecting state are different. good.

"Non-luminous" in the column of lamp light emission indicates that the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 do not emit light, and "Rainbow light emission" means that the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 do not emit light. It indicates that it emits light.

In this way, the determined success effect includes an image display effect using a success effect image, a role object action effect using the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C, a button vibration effect using the effect button 6a, and a button that emits rainbow light from the effect button 6a. It consists of a series of effects such as a light effect, a lamp light effect in which the lamps of the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit rainbow light, and a sound effect in which a success sound effect is output from the sound output device 9. The effect is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the operation of the operation means during the fixed effective period.
On the other hand, in the determination failure effect, the character action effect, the vibration effect, the button light effect, the lamp light effect and the sound effect are not executed.

In addition, since the effect button device 6A and the effect lever device 6C are provided in the storage plate (receiving plate) 5, when the button vibration motor 6d that vibrates the effect button 6a is driven, the vibration acts as a transmission member. It is transmitted to the production lever 6h through the plate 5. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the effect lever 6h is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 6a through the storage plate 5.例文帳に追加

In other words, when the player is operating one of the operating means with the operating hand, if a vibration effect is executed to vibrate the other operating means, the vibration is transmitted to the player's operating means via the other means. It is designed to be transmitted.

In addition, since the effect button device 6A, the effect lever device 6C and the firing handle 7 are provided in the storage dish 5 attached to the opening and closing door 3 having the window 3a, the button vibration motor 6d that vibrates the effect button 6a is driven. Then, the vibration is transmitted to the firing handle 7 through the opening/closing door 3 and the storage dish 5 which serve as transmission members. Further, when the lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the effect lever 6h is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 6a through the storage plate 5. - 特許庁A vibrating motor may be provided in the firing handle 7 to vibrate the firing handle 7 itself.

The effect button device 6A may be provided with a decoration unit connected to the inside of the button body of the effect button 6a so as to be relatively operable, and a driving mechanism for operating the button body and the decoration unit individually or in conjunction with each other. good. In this case, the button body is assembled so as to move up and down relative to the decoration unit. In addition, the decoration unit is provided with a plurality of LEDs (light emitting units). Further, a cover portion is provided so as to surround the outer surface of the button main body portion and the decoration unit and moves up and down.
For example, when a spherical decoration unit is provided, an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 6a whose decorative unit emits red light is displayed in the operation promoting effect, and a single hit operation of the effect button 6a results in a success effect. From the start of the execution, the decoration unit that emits red light by driving the drive mechanism rotates for 4 seconds, and then rotates again for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. Button 6a) strongly vibrates (4 seconds→5 seconds).
Incidentally, the decoration unit may be used instead of the production lever 6h.

As a first feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, when a determination success effect is executed, a vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, the effective period occurs over the longest period as the effective period generated during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h, thereby improving the interest of the game.

As a third feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h vibrates over the longest period as the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of the winning performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fourth feature of the decided effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, the period of rainbow emission of the effect button 6a is longer than the vibration period of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h (10 seconds including the pause period) ( 11 seconds). Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As a fifth feature of the decision effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, the decision success effect is the same regardless of whether the state of the effect button 6a (effect lever 6h) during the decision effective period is in the normal state or in the protruding state. (strong vibration (4 seconds→5 seconds)). Therefore, even if the state of the performance button 6a during the determined effective period is normal state or protruding state, it is possible to effectively inform that the big winning game is to be executed, and to improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

As a sixth feature of the decision effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the determined success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds→5 seconds)). Therefore, regardless of the type of operation means, it is possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a seventh feature of the determination effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, the vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the determination success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)) regardless of the type of reach effect. . In other words, even when the jackpot performance pattern 16a with even-numbered patterns is stop-displayed and even when the jackpot performance pattern 16a with odd-numbered patterns is stop-displayed, the vibration performance mode of the vibration performance in the determined success performance. are the same (strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)). Therefore, regardless of the type of the jackpot effect pattern 16a, it is possible to effectively notify that the jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the decision effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, when a decision success effect accompanying the operation of the operation means is executed, the operation mode of the operation means Push operation, tilting operation of the effect lever 6h) and the vibration effect mode of the vibration effect in the determined success effect are the same (strong vibration (4 seconds→5 seconds)) regardless of the type of operation means. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game is to be executed regardless of the operation mode of the operation means and the type of the operation means in the determined effective period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a ninth feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, the jackpot pattern with "7" pattern is stopped and displayed rather than the jackpot pattern with even number pattern or "7" pattern is stopped. In this case, it is easier to execute the determined success effect involving the operation of the effect lever 6h. Therefore, it is possible to give rarity to the decision success effect accompanying the operation of the effect lever 6h, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that, in the decided production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 51, normal mode A ~ C, probability variable / time-saving mode D ~ G, the ratio of execution of successful production determined production lever 6h is the same, normal mode Rather than A to C, the probability variation / time reduction mode D ~ G may have a higher ratio of execution of the successful performance determined with the operation of the production lever 6h, or the probability variation / time reduction mode D ~ G Also, in the normal modes A to C, the ratio of execution of the determined success effect involving the operation of the effect lever 6h may be higher.

Incidentally, at least two or more operation means may be used as the above-mentioned determination success vibration effect. Specifically, the effect button 6a and the effect lever 6h, the effect button 6a and the firing handle 7, or the effect button 6a, the effect lever 6h and the firing handle 7 are used to perform a successful vibration effect (long-term strong vibration). . As a result, it is possible to execute a decision success vibration effect that can give a strong impact.

For example, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, a success vibration effect determined by the effect button 6a, the effect lever 6h and the launch handle 7 is executed.
In the case of the 4R probability variable jackpot, a decision success vibration performance is executed by the performance button 6a and the performance lever 6h.
In the case of a 4R normal jackpot, a decision success vibration presentation is executed by the presentation button 6a and the shooting handle 7. - 特許庁

In addition, even if the game ball wins in the first start port 10a during the variable probability / time saving mode D to G and the judgment result is a big hit, a decision effect (effect It is possible to execute a success image, a decision success vibration effect, and a decision motion by the movable effect members 17A to 17C. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify that the big winning game will be executed.

(Information table for decision success production)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a determined success effect information table referred to when executing a determined success effect.
Decided success production (image production, role movement production, vibration production, button lighting production, lamp lighting production and sound production) is the production content of the reach production involving the operation of the operation means during the fixed effective period during the SPSP reach production ( Based on the battle/mission), when it starts at the start of operation of the operation means (production button 6a, production lever 6h), when it starts after the operation of the operation means (production button 6a, production lever 6h) is started, There is

When battle A or battle B is executed as the SPSP ready-to-win production, a fixed effective period (5 seconds) is started during execution of battle A or battle B (at the end), and one single hit operation of the production button 6a. An operation prompting image (an opaque effect button image, a gauge image, and a character image of "press") is displayed.
Then, when a single hit operation of the performance button 6a is started during the determination valid period, the determination success performance is started. On the other hand, if the performance button 6a is not single-hit during the determined effective period, the determined success performance is started at the end of the determined effective period.

When Battle C is executed as the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the validity period (5 seconds) determined during the execution of Battle C is started, and an operation prompting image (opaque effect lever image) prompting a single tilting operation of the effect lever 6h is displayed. , gauge image, and character image of “Close”) are displayed.
Then, when one tilting operation of the performance lever 6h is started during the determination effective period, the determination success performance is started. On the other hand, when the tilting operation of the production lever 6h is not performed during the fixed effective period, the fixed success production is started at the end of the fixed effective period.

When mission A (big rock destruction mission) is executed as an SPSP reach effect, an effective period (5 seconds) determined during the execution of mission A is started, and an operation promotion image (opaque A production button image, a gauge image, and a character image of "Consecutive hits") are displayed.
Then, after the continuous hitting operation of the performance button 6a is started during the determination effective period, the determination success performance is started when the large rock is completely destroyed. On the other hand, when the production button 6a is not repeatedly hit during the fixed effective period, the fixed success production is started at the end of the fixed effective period.

When mission B (successful mission to reach level meter MAX) is executed as SPSP ready-to-reach production, a fixed valid period (5 seconds) is started while mission B is being executed, and an operation prompting a long-pressing operation of the production button 6a is performed. A promotion image (an opaque effect button image, a gauge image, and a “long press” character image) is displayed.
Then, when the level value of the level meter reaches MAX after the long pressing operation of the performance button 6a is started during the determination effective period, the determination success performance is started. On the other hand, when the long pressing operation of the performance button 6a is not performed during the fixed valid period, the fixed success performance is started at the end of the fixed valid period.

In this way, the determined success effect is executed regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated during the effective period.
In addition, the start timing of the determined success performance in the case of the battle performance based on the single-hit operation of the performance button 6a or the performance lever 6h, and the decision success performance in the case of the battle performance based on the continuous hitting operation or the long-pressing operation of the performance button 6a. is different from the start timing of

Therefore, in the case of the strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect), in the case of the battle effect based on one single-hit operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h, one single-hit operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is performed. When it is started (due to the start of operation of the operating means), a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started. On the other hand, when the performance button 6a or the performance lever 6h is not single-hit, a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) is started at the end of the determined effective period.

In addition, in the case of a mission effect based on a continuous hitting operation or a long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a, after the continuous hitting operation or long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a is started (not due to the start of operation of the operation means) When the mission is successful A strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started. On the other hand, when the effect button 6a is not repeatedly hit or long-pressed, a strong vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is started at the end of the fixed effective period.

Further, in the case of mission A based on the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 6a, after the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 6a is started and immediately before the large rock is completely destroyed, a one-second strong vibration effect is performed.
In addition, in the case of mission B based on the long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a, when the level value of the level meter reaches the level value immediately before reaching the MAX after the long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a is started, a strong vibration effect is performed for 1 second. is executed.

In the case of mission B based on the long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a, the level value of the level meter reaches a predetermined specific value (2, 4, 6, 8) after the long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a is started. A vibration effect (weak vibration) may be performed every time, or the effect mode of the vibration effect (vibration period, vibration intensity, etc.) may be varied. For example, when the level value of the level meter is the first specific value (“2”), the vibration mode of the vibration effect (“bull” at the vibration time of 0.2 seconds) and the second specific value (“4”) The vibration mode of the vibration presentation ("blurring" with a vibration time of 0.3 seconds) may be varied.

In addition, when the battle effect based on the continuous hitting operation or long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a is executed, after the continuous hitting operation or long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a is started, the determined success effect (determined success vibration effect) at the time of winning the battle. is started.
That is, even with the same ready-to-win effect (battle effect), the start timing of the determined success effect (determined success vibration effect) differs depending on the operation mode of the effect button 6a.

(Execution start timing and end timing of decision success effect)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the execution start timing and end timing of the determined success effect (success image, determined success vibration effect, determined accessory effect) associated with the presence or absence of operation of the operating means.
FIG. 53(1) is a diagram showing the execution start timing and end timing of the decision success effect (decision success vibration effect) when no button operation is performed during the valid period. FIG. 53 (2-1) and (2-2) show the execution start timing and end of the determined success effect (success image, determined success vibration effect, determined role effect) when the button is operated during the valid period. It is a figure which shows a timing.

Comparing FIGS. 53(1), (2-1) and (2-2), the determined success effect is executed whether or not the operating means is operated during the validity period.
Also, the execution start timing of the determined success effect differs depending on the operation timing of the effect button 6a during the valid period (timing depending on the presence or absence of operation) (timing of T1 or T2).
The end timing of the decided success effect is the same regardless of the operation timing of the effect button 6a during the effective period (timing of T7).
Therefore, the display start timing of the success effect image, the vibration start timing of the strong vibration effect, and the operation start timing of the character action effect differ depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing, and the display of the success effect image is different. The period, the execution period of the strong vibration production (determined success vibration production), and the execution period of the character action production are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53 (2-1), when the production button 6a is operated during the effective period (timing of T2), it is more ( Timing T3), the display start timing of the success effect image is earlier, so the display period of the success effect image is longer.
That is, when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period, the success effect image starts to be displayed at the start of the operation, and continues to be displayed until the success effect is completed.

Further, when the production button 6a is operated during the effective period (timing of T2), the vibration start timing of the strong vibration production is earlier than when the production button 6a is not operated during the effective period (timing of T3). Therefore, the execution period of the strong vibration effect becomes longer (the execution period of the strong vibration effect becomes variable). Specifically, when the production button 6a is operated during the valid period, the vibration motor 6d starts strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds) at the start of the operation, and strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds) is repeated.
In other words, when the execution period of the vibration performance is variable, the vibration performance is executed until the same timing (the timing when the determined success performance ends) regardless of whether or not the performance button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing.

Also, when the production button 6a is operated during the effective period (timing of T2), the operation start timing of the performance of the character action production is higher than when the production button 6a is not operated during the effective period (timing of T3). Since it is faster, the performance period of the performance of the role product action becomes longer (the performance period of the performance of the role product action becomes variable). Specifically, when the production button 6a is operated during the valid period, the deciding motion of the movable production members 17A to 17C is started at the start of the operation, and the timing (timing of T6) before the completion of the successful decision production is completed. ), the movable production members 17A to 17C remain in the production position, and then the movable production members 17A to 17C return to the standby position.
In other words, when the performance period of the performance of the performance of the performance of the role product is variable, the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance is performed until the same timing (the timing when the success performance ends) regardless of whether or not the performance button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. executed.

As shown in FIG. 53 (2-2), regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing, the execution period of the strong vibration effect and the execution period of the character action effect are unchanged. good too. Specifically, when the production button 6a is operated during the valid period, the execution period of the strong vibration production and the character action production ends at the timing (timing T5) before the timing at which the determined success production ends. , only the successful effect image will continue to be displayed.
In other words, when the execution period of the strong vibration effect and the execution period of the character object action effect are unchanged, the strong vibration effect and the character object action effect end depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. different timing.

In the case of the cut-in effect described above, the execution period remains unchanged regardless of the operation timing of the effect button 6a during the valid period (similar to FIG. 53 (2-2)). Therefore, since the execution period of the vibration performance is also unchanged, the start timing and the end timing of the vibration performance correspond to the operation timing of the performance button 6a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the players from having excessive expectations.

(Vibration production information table for matching patterns)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a symbol-matching vibration effect information table referred to when the symbol-matched big win effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the big win variation effect.
"Jackpot pattern matching" means that the jackpot display mode ("222" even number pattern, "777" odd-numbered symbols, etc.) to form and stop display.
It should be noted that the big win display mode may be formed by the production pattern 16a of the highly decorative display mode (7 and the pig character) composed of numbers and characters, and may be stopped and displayed.

In the big hit variation performance, the big hit variation performance pattern in which the big hit patterns are aligned by executing the determined performance accompanied by the operation of the performance button 6a/performance lever 6h during the ready-to-win performance, and the operation of the performance button 6a/performance lever 6h during the ready-to-win performance. There is a big hit fluctuation performance pattern in which a determined performance without accompanying is executed and the big winning patterns are aligned.

The big hit fluctuation production pattern in which the decision production not involving the operation of the production button 6a / production lever 6h is executed during the ready-to-win production and the jackpot pattern is complete is the fluctuation production pattern of the SP reach big hit (variation production pattern 14: Fig. 42).
Specifically, the effective period determined at the end of the SP ready-to-play effect does not occur (no display of the operation promotion image), the image display effect by the effect image, the character action effect by the third movable effect member 17C, the effect button 6a Vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds), button light emission effect in which the effect button 6a emits rainbow light, lamp light emission effect in which the lamps of the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 emit rainbow light, from the audio output device 9 After a series of success performances such as a sound performance of outputting a success effect sound is executed, the performance pattern 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed with the D symbols aligned.

In the performance of the character action by the third movable effect member 17C, the blade part of the third movable effect member 17C emitting rainbow light is pulled out of the sheath and tilted to the front side of the display screen of the first image display device 16. A decision operation for returning to the standby position is performed later. The action mode of this deciding action is different from the deciding action executed in the deciding success effect involving the operation of the operating means. It should be noted that the operation mode may be the same as that of the winning action executed in the winning effect involving the operation of the operating means.

As shown in FIG. 54 (1), during the ready-to-win production, the determined success production is executed, and the production pattern 16a is temporarily stopped in either display mode of the even number pattern matching ("222") or the odd number pattern matching ("777"). Even when it is displayed (first timing), the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the production button 6a strongly vibrates for 4 seconds without generating an effective period (without displaying the operation prompting image). A strong vibration effect is executed.

When the production pattern 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in any of the display modes of the even number pattern matching ("222") and the odd number pattern matching ("777") without executing the determined success effect during the ready-to-win effect (first timing) Even so, a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a strongly vibrates for 4 seconds without generating an effective period (without displaying an operation prompting image).

In this way, even if the final effect is executed and the jackpot effect pattern 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in any of the display modes of even numbered patterns ("222") and odd numbered patterns ("777"), the effective period (without displaying the operation prompting image), the vibration effect is executed in the same vibration mode (strong vibration, vibration period of 4 seconds).
In addition, even if the jackpot production pattern 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in any of the display modes of even numbered patterns ("222") and odd numbered patterns ("777") without execution of the determined production, the effective period is Vibration performance is executed in the same vibration mode (strong vibration, vibration period of 4 seconds) without generating (without displaying the operation prompting image).
In other words, the vibration effect executed when the jackpot pattern is aligned is the jackpot effect in either display mode of even pattern matching (“222”) or odd pattern matching (“777”) regardless of whether or not the decision effect is executed. Even when the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the vibration mode is the same (strong vibration, vibration period of 4 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 54(2), when the performance symbol 16a with the big hit symbols at the second timing after the first timing is temporarily stopped and displayed, the vibration period of the vibration performance differs depending on the type of symbol. there is
Even if the effect pattern 16a is temporarily stopped in any of the display mode of the even number pattern matching (for example, "222") and the odd number pattern pattern matching other than 7 (for example, "333"), the valid period is generated. A strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a strongly vibrates for 1 second (without displaying the operation promoting image).
On the other hand, when the production pattern 16a is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display mode of "7" pattern alignment, button vibration for vibrating the production button 6a without generating the effective period (without displaying the operation promotion image). A strong vibration effect is executed in which the motor 6d strongly vibrates for four seconds.

(Re-lottery effect pattern decision table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 55, the re-lottery effect pattern determination table includes the type of effect mode, whether there is a promotion (whether it is planned to be promoted), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery effect pattern, and the re-lottery effect to be selected. A pattern is associated. As a reference, the effect configuration of each re-lottery effect pattern is described.

"Valid period: single hit / 3 seconds" indicates that the valid period in the re-lottery effect ends with one operation of the effect button 6a or ends when 3 seconds elapse without the effect button 6a being operated. ing.
In the re-lottery effect, the effective suggesting effect is not executed, but the effective suggesting effect may be executed. Further, when the promotion success effect is executed in the re-lottery effect, the vibration effect may be executed during the effective suggestion effect. A player's sense of expectation can be heightened even before execution of promotion success presentation.

The "operation prompting effect" is a effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 6a during the effective period. Specifically, the remaining period of the opaque effect button image displayed at a specific position without executing the effective suggestion effect and the operation effective period (3 seconds) during which one single hit operation of the effect button 6a becomes effective is gauged. An operation prompting image composed of a gauge image indicated by the length of and a character image of "Press" is displayed.

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promoting effect means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a is displayed. indicates that white light is emitted.
"Normal button red" means that a button image imitating the production button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits red light is displayed as an opaque production button image, and that the production button 6a emits red light. showing.
"Normal button rainbow" means that a button image simulating the effect button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits rainbow light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and that the effect button 6a emits rainbow light. showing.
The degree of expectation for the jackpot of each promotion effect is “normal button white” < “normal button red” < “normal button rainbow”.

"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 6a during the effective period. "Normal" in the button state column indicates a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude.

"Promotion failure effect" in the column of re-lottery effect mode refers to a non-promoted pattern that does not become a effect pattern that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect (for example, even number pattern → even number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7" → odd-numbered symbols other than "7") are derived and displayed (temporary stop display).
"Promotion success effect" means that the promotion pattern (for example, even number pattern → odd number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7" → "7" pattern) that becomes a production pattern that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery effect is derived and displayed. (temporary stop display).

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the production button 6a strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time of derivation display of the promotion pattern (end of the valid period). It shows that the strong vibration effect to be performed is executed.

"Rainbow luminescence (4 seconds)" in the button luminescence column means that the button luminescence LED 6e for illuminating the production button 6a is displayed for 4 seconds (at the end of the valid period) from the time the promotion symbol is derived (at the end of the valid period) (the production button 6a is strong). It shows rainbow emission over a longer period of time than when vibrating.

"Non-promoted sound effect" in the column of sound effects indicates that a non-promoted sound effect is output when a non-promoted symbol is derived and displayed.
"Promoting sound effect" indicates that a promotional sound effect is produced when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed.

As a first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 55, when the promotion success effect is executed, a vibrating effect is executed in which the valid period is generated and the effect button 6a is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the fact that the symbol has been promoted to a big win pattern that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 55, the rainbow light emission of the effect button 6a is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the valid period is generated (with the display of the operation promotion image) and the re-lottery effect is executed, but the re-lottery effect is performed without generating the valid period (without the display of the operation prompt image). may be executed.

(The number of times the button vibration is executed after the decision success effect is started)
FIG. 56 shows that in the big hit fluctuation effect in which the re-lottery effect is executed, the decision success effect is started until the big hit effect pattern is fixed and stopped (determined success effect, pattern matching effect, re-lottery effect, pattern matching effect, It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of button vibration of design confirmation stop).

As shown in FIG. 56, after the start of the decided success effect, there are cases where the jackpot effect pattern 16a with even-numbered patterns is fixed and stopped, and when the jackpot effect pattern 16a with odd-numbered patterns is fixed and stopped. , the number of times the button vibration runs is different.

Specifically, when the even-numbered pattern (“2” pattern) is not promoted to the odd-numbered pattern in the re-lottery production and the jackpot production pattern 16a with the even-numbered pattern is confirmed and stopped, after the success production is started. The number of times the button vibration is executed until the pattern confirmation is stopped is three times.
In the re-lottery performance, when the odd numbered symbols (“3” symbols) other than the “7” symbols are not promoted to the “7” symbols, and the jackpot performance symbols 16a with the odd numbered symbols other than the “7” symbols are fixed and stopped. , the number of executions of the button vibration from the start of the decision success performance to the stop of the symbol determination is three.

On the other hand, in the re-lottery production, the even numbered pattern ("2" pattern) is promoted to the odd numbered pattern ("7" pattern), and when the jackpot production pattern 16a with the odd numbered patterns is fixed and stopped, the decided success production is started. The number of times the button vibration is executed from the moment the game is played until the symbol decision is stopped is four times.
In the re-lottery production, when odd numbered patterns ("3" patterns) other than "7" patterns are promoted to "7" patterns and the jackpot production patterns 16a with "7" patterns are fixed and stopped, a determined success production is performed. The number of executions of the button vibration is four from the start to the stop of design determination.

In this way, the case where the re-lottery performance derives and displays the promoted symbols that become the big winning symbols that are advantageous to the player rather than the case that the non-promoted symbols that do not become the big winning symbols that are advantageous to the player are derived and displayed in the re-lottery performance. The number of executions of the button vibration and the number of executions of the character performance from the start of the determination success performance to the stop of the design determination are larger. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the execution of a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, increase the player's joy of winning the jackpot, and improve the amusement of the game.

Even when the non-promoting symbols which do not become the big winning patterns advantageous to the player are temporarily stopped and displayed after the determined successful performance, and even when the big winning symbols advantageous to the player are temporarily stopped and displayed, the determined success vibration performance of the determined success performance. are the same (vibration period of 4 seconds to 5 seconds for strong vibration).

When the performance symbols with matching symbols are temporarily stopped after the decided success performance, even if the big winning symbols that are not advantageous to the player are temporarily stopped, the big winning symbols that are advantageous to the player are temporarily stopped. Even when it is stopped, the vibration mode of the button vibration is the same (vibration period of 4 seconds with strong vibration).

(Fixed production pattern decision table)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a confirmed effect pattern determination table that is referred to when deciding the effect pattern of the confirmed effect.

As shown in FIG. 57, the determined effect pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each determined effect pattern, and the selected determined effect pattern. For reference, the effect configuration of each fixed effect pattern is described.

"-" in the execution timing column indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is not executed, and "O" indicates the timing at which the fixed effect is executed.
"Decision sound" in the column of effect sound indicates that a confirmation sound is output to notify that a jackpot game is to be executed.
The "handle rainbow light emission" in the column of light emission means that the handle LED for lighting the firing handle 7 emits a rainbow from the time when the confirmation sound is output to the stop of fluctuation (for more than 4 seconds until the production pattern 16a stops displaying). It indicates that it emits light.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the column of button vibration means that the button vibration motor 6d for vibrating the effect button 6a strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the output of the confirmation sound. It is shown that.

A first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that when a fixed effect is executed, a vibrating effect for vibrating the effect button 6a is executed without generating an effective period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a big winning game is to be executed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 57 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 7 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained even after the strong-vibration presentation ends, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Resurrection effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a resurrection effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a resurrection effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 58, the resurrection effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the ready-to-win type, the selection rate (%) of each resurrection effect pattern, and the resurrection effect pattern to be selected. For reference, the effect configuration of each resurrection effect pattern is described.

In "SP ready-to-win" in the variable effect pattern column, when the result of judging a big hit is a big hit and a resurrection effect pattern is selected in which no resurrection effect is executed, it is suggested that the SP ready-to-win effect results in battle victory/mission success. A winning/success suggesting performance is performed, and the performance symbols 16a with all D symbols (only numbers) are temporarily stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, when the jackpot determination result is a loss or a jackpot and a revival production pattern for executing a revival production is selected, a defeat/success suggestion production suggesting battle defeat/mission failure is carried out in the SP ready-to-win production. Then, the effect pattern 16a indicating the reach loss is temporarily stopped and displayed.

The "effective period" in the effect configuration column means that the effective period of the resurrection effect ends with the operation of the effect button 6a (single hit operation/continuous hit operation) or with the operation of the effect lever 6h (tilting operation). This indicates that the game will end or will end when 4 seconds elapse without the production button 6a/production lever 6h being operated.

The "type of operation means" in the column of effective period indicates the type of operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) whose operation is valid during the effective period. The operation becomes effective, and if it is the "production lever", it indicates that the operation of the production lever 6h becomes effective.

The "operation prompting effect" is a effect that prompts the user to operate the operation means (the effect button 6a and the effect lever 6h) during the effective period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image, a gauge image showing the remaining period of the operation effective period (4 seconds) in which the operation of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is valid, by the length of the gauge, An operation prompting image composed of a character image of "push, repeat or pull" is displayed.
It should be noted that the operation promotion effect ends with the operation of the operating means (the effect button 6a, the effect lever 6h) during the effective period, or when the effective period (4 seconds) elapses without the operation means being operated. .

"Normal button white" in the column of the operation promoting effect means that a button image that imitates the effect button 6a that is in a non-protruding normal state and emits white light is displayed as an opaque effect button image, and the effect button 6a is displayed. indicates that white light is emitted.
"Normal lever" indicates that a lever image imitating the production lever 6h of a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque production lever image.

"State of operation means" indicates the state of the operation means (effect button 6a, effect lever 6h) during the valid period, and "normal" is a normal state in which the effect button 6a does not protrude. .

The "operation mode" indicates the type of operation mode of the operation means (the production button 6a, the production lever 6h) during the effective period.
"Single hit" in the operation mode column indicates that the effect button 6a is pressed once from the position in the normal state or the protruded state to the pressed position, and "Consecutive hits" means that the effect button 6a is pressed from the position in the normal state. Depressing operation to the depressing position is continuously performed a plurality of times, and "tilting" refers to tilting the production lever 6h in the front-rear direction from the normal position.

"Recovery failure effect" in the column of resurrection effect mode indicates that an effect suggesting that the jackpot game is not executed is executed.
“Resurrection success effect” indicates that an effect suggesting that a jackpot game is executed is executed.
"Failure image" in the result image column indicates that a dark image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 16, and "success image" indicates that a success effect image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 16. is displayed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds)" in the column of button/lever vibration is a strong vibration effect (resurrection A strong vibration effect (successful recovery vibration effect) is executed in which the lever vibration motor 6j for vibrating the effect lever 6h strongly vibrates for 4 seconds from the start of the successful recovery effect. Which indicates that.

"Rainbow light emission" in the column of button/lever light emission is determined by the button light emission LED 6e for lighting the production button 6a for 6 seconds from the start of the successful production (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 6a). Rainbow light is emitted for 6 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 6a) from the start of the success production, which is determined by the lever light emission LED 6k for lighting the production lever 6h. It is shown that.

"None" in the column of role product action indicates that the movable effect members 17A to 17C do not operate.
"Yes" in the column of role product action indicates that the third movable production member 17C performs a role product action production in which it operates and emits light in a predetermined manner.
Specifically, the third movable effect member 17C at the standby position emits rainbow light, the blade is pulled out of the sheath, and tilts to the front side of the display screen of the first image display device 16. After performing the effect operation, it moves to the standby position. A role object action production is performed by a strong action with a large movement width to return.

“None” in the column of sound effects indicates that the sound output device 9 does not output sound effects (sound effects).
"Success sound effect" indicates that the sound output device 9 outputs a success sound effect as a dramatic sound. As for the success effect sound, success sound effect A is output in the case of the resurrection success production with the production button 6a as the operation object, and success effect sound A is output in the case of the resurrection success production with the production lever 6h as the operation object. A success sound effect B with a different sound is output.
Incidentally, the success effect sound may be the same for the resurrection success effect with the effect button 6a as the operation target and the resurrection success effect with the effect lever 6h as the operation target.

"Non-luminous" in the column of lamp light emission indicates that the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 do not emit light, and "Rainbow light emission" means that the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 do not emit light. It indicates that it emits light.

A first feature of the resurrection effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that when a resurrection effect is executed, a vibrating effect (successful resurrection vibrating effect) is generated to generate an effective period and vibrate the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h. ) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that the recovery jackpot will be achieved, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A second feature of the resurrection effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h is performed over a longer period than the vibrating period of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h. Therefore, even after the vibration of the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

A third feature of the resurrection effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58 is that even when the resurrection success effect is executed in accordance with the operation of the effect button 6a, even when the resurrection success effect is executed in accordance with the operation of the effect lever 6h. , the vibration mode of the vibration effect in the resurrection success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds)). Therefore, regardless of the type of operation means, it is possible to effectively notify that the recovery jackpot game will be performed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

A fourth feature of the revival effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 6h tilting operation), the vibration mode of the vibration effect in the recovery success effect is the same (strong vibration (4 seconds)). Therefore, regardless of the operating mode of the operating means during the validity period, it is possible to effectively notify that the recovery jackpot will be achieved, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a fifth feature of the resurrection effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58, the resurrection effect is more likely to be executed in the variable probability/shorter working hours modes D to G than in the normal modes A to C. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big hit variation effect in the variable probability mode from becoming monotonous, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the resurrection effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 58, when the big hit determination result is a big hit, the probability variable / short time mode D ~ G is better than the normal mode A ~ C, the game with a successful resurrection effect The jackpot symbols of "7" patterns are likely to be stop-displayed in which the jackpot game most advantageous to the player is executed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to raise expectations in the variable probability/shorter working hours modes D to G, which are advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.
It should be noted that the resurrection performance can be executed even in the case of SPSP ready-to-play (for example, SPSP ready-to-play in which the determined performance is not executed), and the resurrection performance pattern is determined with reference to the resurrection performance pattern determination table shown in FIG.

(Example of production when continuous notice production and step-up notice production are executed)
59 and 60, description will be given of an effect example in the case where the button vibration notice effect (continuous notice effect) and the step-up notice effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 59(1), in the first image display device 16, the effect symbol 16a of "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" and the special symbol TZ of "216" indicating the failure are displayed for a predetermined time. It is in the state of fixed stop display. In addition, a pending number "3" is displayed in the first pending number display area 16e, and three pending icons "⊚ (white)" are displayed in the first pending icon display area 16b. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, the lighting device 23 for the board is lighting up the lamp.

The pattern fixing period in which the production pattern 16a is fixed and stopped is set to the same time (for example, 0.5 seconds) regardless of the type of variation production pattern to be executed or the big hit determination result.
The variable display of the special symbols TZ is continuously performed in a fixed display mode during the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols to the stop display.
In addition, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is positioned at a position ( For example, it is displayed near the lower left end of the display screen of the first image display device 16). It should be noted that, as a more preferable aspect, it is preferable that the image is always displayed in a visible state without being blocked by the effect operation of the first movable effect members 17A to 17C.

The display of the reserved numbers in the first reserved number display area 16e and the second reserved number display area 16f is maintained in a visible state even if the production operation of the movable production members 17A to 17C is performed, as with the special symbol TZ. The image is displayed at a position considered to be easy to read (for example, the edge of the display screen of the first image display device 16). It should be noted that, as a more preferable aspect, it is preferable that the display is always visible without being blocked by the performance action of the performance accessory.

As shown in FIG. 59(2), when the design determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, at least a part of the three performance symbols 16a performs a predetermined operation and the special symbols (performance symbols 16a) are variably displayed. is performed.

As the fluctuation start suggesting effect HS, for example, the face of "dog, cat, tiger" in the decoration part of the three effect patterns 16a of "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" displayed as fixed stop is enlarged. At the same time, a variation start operation is performed in which the eyes of "dog, cat, tiger" change, and the variable display of the special design (performance design 16a) is started in a display mode different from the display mode of the fixed and stopped performance design 16a. It is suggested that

Since the player's attention to the performance pattern 16a can be attracted by performing the variation start suggesting performance HS, the player can be made to surely recognize that the next pattern variation display will start after the pattern determination is stopped. It becomes possible.

Along with the start of the variable start suggestion effect HS, the first pending number display area 16e changes from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons shift toward the variable icon display area 16d. Further, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started along with the start of the variable start suggestion effect HS.

In addition, along with the start of the fluctuation start suggestion production HS, the first production of the button vibration notice production over three fluctuation productions is started. Specifically, the effect button 6a weakly vibrates for one second, and a weak advance notice is given in which the effect button 6a flashes white.

After that, immediately after the shift of the hold icon is completed, when the hold icon (the hold icon "◎" on the left end in the figure) that is the target of the notice of the button vibration notice effect changes to a blue icon, the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS ends, and As shown in 59(3), the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 16a in the normal size is started. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR emits the same blue light as the blue icon, and the lamp changing effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 59(4), when the variable time elapses, the three production patterns 16a are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination display mode "2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 5 (koala)" indicating a normal failure. Along with the fixed stop display, the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed in combination with "245".

As shown in FIG. 59(5), when the pattern fixing period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the next variation effect is started, and the variation start suggesting effect HS is performed.
Along with the start of the variable start suggestion effect HS, the first pending number display area 16e changes from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons shift toward the variable icon display area 16d. Further, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started along with the start of the variable start suggestion effect HS.

Further, along with the start of the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS, the second effect of the button vibration notice effect is started. Specifically, the effect button 6a is weakly vibrated for one second, and a weak advance notice is given in which the effect button 6a blinks white.

After that, immediately after the shift of the hold icon is completed, when the hold icon (the hold icon "◎" on the left end in the figure), which is the target of the notice of the button vibration notice effect, changes to a red icon, the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS ends, and the change start indication effect HS ends. As shown in 59(6), the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 16a in the normal size is started. Also, the winning entrance lamp NR emits the same red light as the red icon, and a lamp change effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 59(7), when the fluctuation time has passed, the three production patterns 16a are temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination display mode "3 (rabbit) 1 (cat) 2 (dog)" indicating a normal failure. Along with the fixed stop display, the special symbol TZ is stop-displayed in combination with "312".

As shown in FIG. 59(8), when the symbol fixing period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the change effect for the notice target is started, and the change start suggesting effect HS is performed. Along with the start of the variable start suggestion effect HS, the first pending number display area 16e changes from "1" to "0", and one pending icon shifts toward the variable icon display area 16d side. Further, the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started along with the start of the variable start suggestion effect HS.

Further, along with the start of the fluctuation start suggestion effect HS, the third effect of the button vibration notice effect is started. Specifically, a strong advance notice is given by strongly vibrating the production button 6a for 3 seconds and blinking the production button 6a in red.

After that, when the shift of the pending icon is completed, as shown in FIG. 59(9), the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 16a in the normal size is started, but the strong notice of the button vibration effect continues. becomes. After that, the strong vibration and red flashing of the production button 6a are stopped, and the third production of the button vibration notice production is completed.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the third effect of the button vibration notice effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 60(10), the first step effect (SU1) of the step-up notice effect is started. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a first step image showing how the bus arrives, and outputs a first step sound effect.

When the first step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 60(11), the second step effect is started and the second step effect (SU2) is started. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a second step image showing a female character getting off from an arriving bus and the bus running away, and outputs a second step effect sound.

When the second step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 60 (12), the third step is developed and the third step effect (SU3) is started. Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a third step image showing a male character appearing and a female character approaching the male character that has appeared, and outputs a third step effect sound. be.

When the third step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 60(13), the fourth step effect is started (SU4). Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a fourth step image showing a female character and a male character approaching each other, and outputs a fourth step sound effect.

When the fourth step effect ends, as shown in FIG. 60 (14), the fifth step progresses to start the fifth step effect (SU5). Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a fifth step image showing two characters talking with each other while smiling, and outputs a fifth step sound effect.
Also, while the effect button 6a is turned off, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 6a is weakly vibrated for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect is not accompanied by the operation promotion effect, no effect sound is output when the operation promotion image is displayed or the effect sound is output when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period. The lighting effect of the lamp by the lighting device 23 for the board is continuously performed.

When one second has passed since the start of the weak vibration effect, as shown in FIG. 60 (15), the weak vibration of the effect button 6a stops, the weak vibration effect ends, and two seconds after the end of the weak vibration effect, The fifth step effect ends. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (16), SP ready-to-win effect is executed after normal ready-to-win effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, or SP ready-to-win effect is executed after normal ready-to-win effect is executed. become.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, after the number of reservations displayed in the reservation number display area 16e decreases with the start of the fluctuation production (after the start of the fluctuation start suggestion production) The button vibration notice effect is started before the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 16a is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable performance has started, and to make it easier for the player to notice that the button vibration notice performance is being executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 59, when the button vibration notice effect is executed, the effect button 6a is flashed in white although the operation promotion effect is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the performance button 6a is not operated, the player can easily notice that the button vibration forewarning performance is being executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 60, the vibration production is not executed during the first to fourth step productions of the step-up notice production, and the vibration production is executed during the fifth step production with the highest expectation for the big win. It's like Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 60, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the 5th step production is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the 5th step production of the step-up notice production. is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the step performance, prevent the inconvenience of making the player misunderstand that the big win is fixed due to the long vibration performance, and improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 60, the vibration production executed during the fifth step production does not accompany the operation promotion production. Effect sound (operation effect sound, operation effect sound of movable effect member, etc.) when operating 6a is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration effect without the operation promoting effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, even during the vibration production of the production button 6a, the lamp lighting production by the board illumination device 23 is continued. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the presentation effect by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the lamp light emission presentation by the vibration presentation accompanied by the operation promotion presentation, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the effect button 6a is not illuminated in the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect in the step-up notice effect, but the effect button 6a is kept in a predetermined state (for example, yellow) over the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light by blinking, etc.). By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production when button vibration notice production and speech notice production are executed)
59 and 61, description will be given of an effect example in the case where the button vibration notice effect (continuous notice effect) and the speech notice effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 59(9), the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the production pattern 16a in the normal size is started, but the strong notice of the button vibration production continues. After that, the strong vibration and red flashing of the production button 6a are stopped, and the third production of the button vibration notice production is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61(17), when a predetermined period of time has passed after the third effect of the button vibration notice effect is completed, as shown in FIG. second) is generated, and the dialog announcement effect is started. Specifically, an operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining period of the effective period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is displayed. Along with the output, the production button 6a emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is single-hit or the effective period passes without being operated, the hot line "I hope you can expect it" is displayed in a red character image SF as shown in FIG. 61 (19). At the same time, a sound (dramatic sound) corresponding to the hot lines is output. In addition, while the effect button 6a is turned off, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 6a is weakly vibrated for one second, but the lamp emission effect by the board illumination device 23 continues.

When one second elapses after the start of the weak vibration performance, the weak vibration performance ends, and two seconds after the end of the weak vibration performance, the speech announcement performance ends. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (20), after the variable display of the performance pattern 16a is continuously performed, a pseudo continuous performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, a normal performance is executed, or a normal reach is performed. The SP ready-to-win effect is executed after the effect is executed, or the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed after the normal ready-to-win effect is executed.

Thus, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 61, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the dialog preview effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue preview effect. there is Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the speech announcement production. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 61, since the vibration production executed during the speech announcement production does not accompany the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image is displayed. The display effect sound and the effect sound when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period are not output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the speech announcement production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 61, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the speech announcement effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 61, even during the vibration production of the production button 6a accompanied by the operation promotion production, the lamp lighting production by the board illumination device 23 is continued. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the presentation effect by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the lamp light emission presentation by the vibration presentation accompanied by the operation promotion presentation, and to improve the amusement of the game.

It should be noted that the effect button 6a is not illuminated in the vibration effect executed during the dialog preview effect, but the effect button 6a is kept in a predetermined manner (for example, blinking white, blinking yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light.

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed during the dialog preview effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing at which the effective period passes when the effect button 6a is not operated) 0.5 seconds after) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

It should be noted that if the effect button 6a is not operated during the effective period, the dialogue announcement effect may not be executed. In addition, when the dialogue foretelling effect is not executed, the vibration effect may not be executed, or may be executed.

(Example of effect when pseudo-continuous effect is executed)
Using FIG. 62, an example of an effect when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 62(1), in the first image display device 16, the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the effect symbol 16a of "5 (koala)" is temporarily stopped in the right area. It is temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the production pattern 16a continues in the central area. As shown in FIG. 62(2), the pseudo-continuous effect is started without generating the effective period of the effect button 6a (without displaying the operation prompting image). Specifically, in the central area, a pseudo-influence effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo symbol (NEXT symbol) suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped.

After that, when the fanning effect ends, as shown in FIG. 62(3), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the central area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success effect sound is output.
As shown in FIG. 62(4), the production pattern 16a changes again (pseudo 2). After that, when a predetermined period of time elapses, as shown in FIG. 62(5), in the first image display device 16, the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left area, and "5 (chicken)" is displayed in the right area. Koala)" is temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the production pattern 16a continues in the central area.

As shown in FIG. 62(6), a pseudo-influence effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped in the central area. At this time, the effective period of the effect button 6a occurs, and an operation prompting image GS (an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a emitting white light and a gauge image) is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image GS is displayed. is output. Also, the effect button 6a emits white light.

After that, when the performance button 6a is single-hit or the valid period passes without being operated, as shown in FIG. A sound effect is output. Also, the production button 6a is turned off, and a weak vibration production is started in which the production button 6a is weakly vibrated for one second.

When one second has passed since the start of the weak vibration effect, as shown in FIG. 62(8), the weak vibration of the effect button 6a stops and the weak vibration effect ends. Then, the character object announcement effect is executed in which the blade portion housed in the sheath portion of the first movable effect member 17A that emits red light moves leftward, and the effect pattern 16a changes again (pseudo 3 ).

When the effect operation time (1 second) of the first movable effect member 17A elapses, the pseudo continuous success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. The pattern 16a is temporarily stopped in the ready-to-win state, and the normal ready-to-win production is started. Thereafter, SP ready-to-win performance is executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed according to the variable performance pattern, or SPSP ready-to-win performance is to be executed after normal ready-to-win performance is executed.

According to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 62, the vibration effect can be executed when the pseudo-continuous effect accompanied by the operation promoting effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 62, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the pseudo consecutive success effect is shorter than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo consecutive success effect. there is Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the pseudo consecutive success production. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 62, since the vibration effect executed during the pseudo-continuous effect is accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation prompting image), the display when displaying the operation prompting image A sound effect and a sound effect when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period (operation effect sound, success effect sound, etc.) are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 62, the execution period of the vibration effect executed in the pseudo-continuous effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 6a is operated and the operation timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 62, even during the vibration production involving the effective period of the production button 6a, the lamp lighting production by the board lighting device 23 is continued. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance effect by not performing processing such as temporary stop of the performance light emission by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 6a, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Although the effect button 6a does not emit light in the vibration effect executed during the simulated continuous effect, the effect button 6a is kept in a predetermined manner (for example, blinking white or blinking yellow) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light.

Also, regarding the vibration effect executed during the simulated continuous effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing at which the effective period passes when the effect button 6a is not operated). 0.5 seconds after) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, during the pseudo-continuous performance, the effective period of the performance button 6a is generated and the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is executed. An effect may be executed, or the effective period of the effect button 6a may be generated but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and develops into SP reach production)
With reference to FIG. 63, a description will be given of an effect example in which the development effect is executed and develops into the SP ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIG. 63(1), the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal ready-to-win effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 63(2), the SP development effect is started. In the SP development production, there are “SPSP development” that suggests development to SPSP reach production, “SP development” that suggests development to SP reach production, and “Kasu ” is rotated in a predetermined direction, and after a stimulating effect is performed to incite which of “SPSP development”, “SP development”, and “cass” will be selected, “SPSP development”, A roulette performance is performed in which either "SP development" or "cass" is determined.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 63(3), "SP development" is determined, and it is notified that the game will develop into SP ready-to-win. After that, as shown in FIG. 63(4), a transition effect is performed in which the screen is whited out. As shown in FIG. 63(5), the left and right performance symbols 16a rotate and move to the display area near the left and right upper ends of the screen, and the performance symbols 16a of only "4" are reduced. As shown in 6), the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

(Example of production when development production is executed and develops into SPSP reach production)
As shown in FIG. 64(1), the normal ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect symbol 16a of "4 (chicken)" temporarily stopped in the left and right areas. After that, as shown in FIG. 64(2), the SPSP development effect is started. In SPSP development production, "SPSP development" that suggests development to SPSP reach production, "SP development" that suggests development to SP reach production, and "Full rotation" that suggests development to full rotation reach production A roulette wheel marked with rotates in a predetermined direction, and after a stimulating effect is performed to incite which of "SPSP development", "SP development", and "full spin" is selected, "SPSP development", " A roulette performance is performed in which either "SP development" or "full rotation" is determined.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 64(3), an effective suggestion effect YS is started to suggest that the operation of the effect button 6a may be effective. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images simulating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images are gathered at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. An opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 6a that emits red light, a gauge image, and a "long press" character image) are displayed at the position, and the display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output. Also, the production button 6a emits red light.

After that, if the effect button 6a is kept pressed for a long time, an effect is performed in which the speed of the roulette is slowed down step by step. As shown in 5), "SPSP development" is determined and it is notified that it will develop into SPSP reach, and the blade part housed in the sheath part of the first movable production member 17A that emits blue light is directed to the left. A moving performance action is performed. Further, in a state where the effect button 6a is turned off, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 6a is weakly vibrated for one second. In addition, the lamp lighting effect by the board illumination device 23 continues.

As shown in FIG. 64(6), the weak vibration of the effect button 6a stops, the weak vibration effect ends, and a transition effect is performed in which the screen is whited out. As shown in FIG. 64(7), the left and right performance symbols 16a rotate and move to the display area near the left and right upper ends of the screen, and the performance symbols 16a of only "4" are displayed in reduced size. As shown in (8), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started. Incidentally, with the start of the SPSP ready-to-win effect, the pending icon and the corresponding icon are hidden.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, it is suggested whether or not the production will develop into a production with a high degree of expectation for a big win (expectation for a big win) depending on the type of development determined in the roulette production as the development production. is doing. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the types developed by the roulette presentation, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the effective suggestive production may be executed in the development production, so that the player's expectation for the development of the ready-to-win production with high expectation for big win is heightened. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the development production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development production. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the development production. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly think that the big win has been confirmed due to the long vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the vibration production executed during the development production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image). display effect sound and effect sound (operation effect sound, etc.) when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, the production effect of the development production can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the development production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 6a is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. there is Therefore, it is possible to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 6a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, even during the vibration production with the effective period of the production button 6a, the lighting device 23 for the board continues the lamp lighting production. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the performance effect by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the light emission performance by the vibration performance accompanied by the effective period of the performance button 6a, and to improve the interest of the game.

Although the effect button 6a is not illuminated in the vibration effect executed during the development effect, the effect button 6a emits light in a predetermined manner (for example, blinking white or blinking yellow) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. You can let it run.

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed during the development effect, the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, from the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 6a is not operated) 0.5 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect is variable).

Also, during the development performance, the effective period of the performance button 6a is generated and the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is executed, but the vibration performance is executed without generating the effective period of the performance button 6a during the development performance. Alternatively, the effective period of the effect button 6a may be generated, but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Production example in which cut-in production is executed during SP reach production)
With reference to FIG. 65, an example of an effect when a cut-in effect is executed during the SP ready-to-win effect and a jackpot is achieved will be described.

As shown in FIG. 65(1), the effect patterns 16a of "4" in the left and right areas are displayed in reduced size at the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the battle effect is executed as SP reach effect, and the ally character is the enemy character. I will unleash an attack technique to defeat the.

At the end of the battle, as shown in FIG. 65(2), an effective suggestion effect YS is started to suggest that the operation of the effect button 6a may be effective for the cut-in effect. Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images simulating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position in the center of the screen. Further, when the timing comes before the predetermined time when the validity period is set, the button change effect is started. Specifically, when the button drive motor 6c operates, the effect button 6a begins to change to a projecting state (specific state).

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 65(3), the effective period of the effect button 6a (single hit 4 seconds) occurs, and a projecting state in which red light is emitted at the specific position. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a, a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period, and a character image of "Press" is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is displayed. is output, the effect button 6a in the projecting state emits red light.

Thereafter, when the performance button 6a is single-hit or the effective period elapses without being operated, a cut-in performance is executed as shown in FIG. 65(4). Specifically, the first image display device 16 displays a red-framed cut-in image KF (“It's a great chance!”), and outputs a cut-in effect sound C corresponding to the red cut-in. Also, the production button 6a is turned off, and a weak vibration production is started in which the production button 6a is weakly vibrated for 3 seconds. The lamp lighting effect by the board illumination device 23 continues.

After that, when one second has passed since the output of the cut-in effect sound C ended, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect end, and as shown in FIG. Unleash the last attack technique to corner the enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 65(6), when three "4" production patterns 16a are aligned (symbol alignment) and the temporary stop is made, the production button 6a is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds (strong vibration effect ( When the big hit determination vibration effect) is started, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light. However, since the execution of this strong vibration presentation does not accompany the effective period of the presentation button 6a, the display effect sound when displaying the operation prompting image and the presentation sound (sound effect) when operating the presentation button 6a are not output.

When 4 seconds have passed since the start of the strong vibration effect, as shown in FIG. 65(7), the blade of the third movable effect member 17C emitting rainbow light is pulled out of the sheath and placed in front of the screen of the first image display device 16. A series of success effects (involving the operation of the operation means) in which the effect action of tilting, the success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and the strong vibration effect (successful vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for 5 seconds. A non-determined success effect) is executed.

When the return of the third movable effect member 17C to the standby position is completed, as shown in FIG. 65(8), a victory confirmation effect (display of a victory image) indicating that the ally character has won the enemy character is performed. Also, the strong vibration effect by the effect button 6a continues.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 66(9), the performance symbol 16a of "444" is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image), and the board lighting device 23 and the effect The button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 66(10), a stop suggestion effect TS is executed to suggest that the effect symbol 16a shifts from a temporary stop to a fixed stop. Specifically, a scene change effect by an eye-catching display that captures the player's line of sight in such a manner as to temporarily change the scene to a display state (for example, a character image) different from the stop display state of the effect pattern 16a. is executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(11), the production symbol 16a of "444" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combined display mode of "444". After the pattern fixing stop period (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 66 (12), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp lighting effect by the board lighting device 23 are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is to be executed are displayed, and the characters "BONUS" are highlighted by displaying a back light flash behind the characters. After that, when the opening effect ends, the first round game is started.

As described above, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 65, the effective suggestion effect may be executed in the cut-in effect, suggesting to the player that the expectation of the big win is high before the effective period occurs. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 65, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in production and the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration production executed during the cut-in production are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the cut-in production. In addition, the vibrating presentation can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 65, since the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect is accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation prompting image), the display when displaying the operation prompting image A sound effect or a sound effect (an operation effect sound, a cut-in sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 6a is operated during the valid period is output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the cut-in production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 65, even during the vibrating production accompanied by the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation prompting image SG), the lamp lighting production by the board lighting device 23 continues. ing. Therefore, the production effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the lamp light emission production by the vibration production accompanying the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), and the interest of the game can be improved. becomes possible.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 65, when the temporary stop is made in the state where three production patterns 16a in the display mode of only number patterns are aligned (D pattern alignment), the vibration production during the cut-in production is reduced. Also, the strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is executed over a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to effectively inform the player of the fact that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 66, a strong vibration production (big hit confirmation vibration production) is executed when the jackpot production pattern 16a with matching symbols is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reconfirm that the jackpot has been won, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the strong vibration production (big hit confirmation vibration production, big hit confirmation Vibration effect, opening vibration effect) does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation prompting image). It is designed not to output the production sound (operation sound effect, other sound effect) at the time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused during the vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 6a (the display of the operation promoting image), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. .

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, when the big win is achieved as a result of the execution of the SP ready-to-win production, the vibration production is executed during the temporary stop of the production pattern 16a to be the big win, Vibration production is not executed during the fixed stop. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game without making the player misunderstand that the fluctuation performance is still continuing due to the vibration performance.

Although the effect button 6a is not illuminated in the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect, the effect button 6a is kept in a predetermined manner (for example, flashing white, flashing yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. It may be made to emit light.

Also, during the effective period of the cut-in effect, the lighting device 23 for the board continues the effect of emitting the lamp. The lamp lighting effect of the board lighting device 23 may be temporarily stopped until the time elapses, and then the lamp lighting effect of the board lighting device 23 may be resumed. In this way, the operation prompting image displayed on the first image display device 16 can be made conspicuous, and the player can recognize that the scene is tense, thus making it possible to enhance the interest of the game. .

In addition, regarding the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 6a is not operated) 2 seconds later) (execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In the production example shown in FIG. 65, the cut-in production is performed at the end of the SP ready-to-play production. It seems that the production button 6a is more likely to protrude (protrusion rate increases) when the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach effect than when the cut-in effect is performed in the middle of the ready-to-win effect. can be

Incidentally, if the effect button 6a is not operated during the valid period, the cut-in effect may not be executed. When the cut-in effect is not executed, the vibration effect may not be executed or may be executed.

(Production example 1 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production)
With reference to FIG. 67, a description will be given of an example of an effect in which a winning effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win battle effect and a big win is achieved.

As shown in FIG. 67(1), the effect patterns 16a of "4" in the left and right areas are reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and a battle effect is executed as an SPSP ready-to-win effect. I will unleash an attack technique to defeat the.

In the middle stage of the battle, as shown in FIG. 67(2), a chance-up effect is performed to suggest that there is a high possibility that the game will develop into an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win (winning effect). Specifically, a character image of "CHANCE UP" is displayed in red on the first image display device 16, and a backlight flashes from behind the character image. Further, a strong vibration effect is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a is flashed white.

When the chance-up effect ends, as shown in FIG. 67(3), a text image of "co-fight" is displayed indicating that the number of allied characters has become two. At the end of the battle, as shown in FIG. 67(4), a line image of "Let's go!" When the game is about to start, as shown in FIG. 67(5), an effective suggesting effect YS is started to suggest that the operation of the effect button 6a may be effective for a final effect.

Specifically, a plurality of semi-transparent effect button images simulating the effect button 6a are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position in the center of the screen. Further, when the timing comes before the predetermined time when the validity period is set, the button change effect is started. Specifically, when the button drive motor 6c operates, the effect button 6a begins to change to a projecting state (specific state).

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 67(6), the effective period of the effect button 6a (single hit 5 seconds) occurs, and the projecting state of emitting red light at the specific position. An operation prompting image SG composed of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a, a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period, and a character image of "Press" is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is displayed. is output, the effect button 6a in the projecting state emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is single-hit or the valid period passes without being operated, as shown in FIG. 67(7), a determined success effect is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C emit rainbow light, the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left, and the second movable effect member 17B waits. A performance motion of moving downward from the position to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16 and a performance motion of moving the blade portion of the third movable performance member 17C upward are performed all at once (decision motion). A success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and a success effect sound is output.

Further, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, when the first to third movable production members 17A to 17C return to the standby position and the determined success production and strong vibration production are completed, as shown in FIG. image display) is performed. Also, a strong vibration effect is executed by the effect button 6a. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(9), it is temporarily stopped in a state where three "4" production patterns 16a are aligned (symbols are aligned), and a strong vibration production ( When the big hit determination vibration effect) is started, the lighting device 23 for the board and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light. However, since the execution of this strong vibration presentation does not accompany the effective period of the presentation button 6a, the display effect sound when displaying the operation prompting image and the presentation sound (sound effect) when operating the presentation button 6a are not output.

When a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(4), the effect symbol 16a is switched to the normal size "444" and temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image), and the board lighting device 23 and the effect The button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 70(5), a stop suggestion effect TS is executed to suggest that the effect symbol 16a shifts from a temporary stop to a fixed stop.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(6), the production symbol 16a of "444" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combined display mode of "444". After the pattern fixing stop period (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 70(7), the opening effect of the big win game and the lamp light effect by the lighting device 23 for the board are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is to be executed are displayed, and the characters "BONUS" are highlighted by displaying a back light flash behind the characters. After that, when the opening effect ends, the first round game is started. Incidentally, when the characters "BONUS" are displayed, the effect button 6a may simply emit rainbow light without performing the vibration effect by the effect button 6a.

(Production example 2 when the decision production is executed during the SPSP reach production)
With reference to FIG. 68, a description will be given of an example of an effect in which a winning effect is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win mission effect, resulting in a big win.

As shown in FIG. 68(1), the effect pattern 16a of "4" in the left area and the right area is reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the mission effect is executed as the SPSP ready-to-win effect. and get the level MAX!!” message is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 68(2), the effective period of the effect button 6a (long press for 5 seconds) occurs, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits white light, and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period. Then, an operation prompting image SG composed of a character image of "long press" is displayed, a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 6a emits white light.
In addition, a level meter is displayed to notify the level values (Lv.1 to Lv.10) in 10-level scale display from level 1 to level 10 (MAX) with level 0 as the initial value.

A long-pressing operation of the effect button 6a is started, and accompanying the long-pressing operation, an increase display is performed in which the level value of the level meter gradually increases toward level 10 (MAX). Further, when the performance button 6a is pressed for a long time, a meter effect sound is output according to the change in the level value of the level meter. It should be noted that if the long-pressing operation is not performed, the level value of the level meter is not increased.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the long press operation of the effect button 6a, the level value reaches level 5 as shown in FIG. 68(3). The production button 6a continues to emit white light. After that, the level value of the level meter gradually increases toward level 10 (MAX) in association with the long-pressing operation. As shown in FIG. 68(4), when the level value reaches level 9, a strong vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second while the effect button 6a is pressed for a long time.

When the level value reaches level 10 (MAX) as shown in FIG. 68(5) after the strong vibration effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 68(6), a determined success effect is executed. Specifically, in a state in which the first to third movable effect members 17A to 17C emit rainbow light, the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left, and the second movable effect member 17B waits. A performance motion of moving downward from the position to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16 and a performance motion of moving the blade portion of the third movable performance member 17C upward are performed all at once (decision motion). A success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and a success effect sound is output.

Further, a strong vibration effect (determined success vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds and then strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, when the first to third movable production members 17A to 17C return to the standby position and the success production and the strong vibration production are completed, as shown in FIG. character image display) is performed. Also, a strong vibration effect is executed by the effect button 6a. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(8), the center "4" production pattern 16a is temporarily stopped while being highlighted in front of the left and right "4" production patterns 16a (symbols are aligned). A strong vibration effect (big hit determination vibration effect) is started in which the button 6a is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds, and the board illumination device 23 and the effect button 6a emit rainbow light. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a, the display effect sound when displaying the operation prompting image SG and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 6a is operated are output. not.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 70(4), the pattern is switched to the normal size "444" effect symbol 16a and temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image), and the board lighting device 23 and the effect The button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 70(5), a stop suggestion effect TS is executed to suggest that the effect symbol 16a shifts from a temporary stop to a fixed stop.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(6), the production symbol 16a of "444" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combined display mode of "444". After the pattern fixing stop period (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 70(7), the opening effect of the big win game and the lamp light effect by the lighting device 23 for the board are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, the characters "BONUS" indicating that the 4R jackpot game is to be executed are displayed, and the characters "BONUS" are highlighted by displaying a back light flash behind the characters. After that, when the opening effect ends, the first round game is started.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, there is a case where the effective suggestive production is executed in the final production, and in addition to the occurrence of the valid period, the expectation of the big win is high. can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the operation period (10 seconds) of the movable production members 17A to 17C in the determined success production and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration production executed in the determined success production is the same as Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the determined success production. In addition, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game is a big win by means of the vibration effect, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the vibration production (decision success vibration production) executed during the decision production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image). A display sound effect when displaying the promotion image and a sound effect when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period (operation effect sound, success sound effect, operation effect sound of the movable effect member, etc.) are output. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect of the decided success production, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Note that the example of the effect shown in FIG. 68 is a determined success effect that is executed when the effect button 6a is single-hit during the effective period, but is executed when the effect lever 6h is tilted during the effective period. 68 is the same as the example shown in FIG.

It should be noted that the lighting device 23 for the board continues the effect of lighting the lamp during the effective period of the determined effect, but the effect button 6a is operated immediately before or after the effective period occurs, or the effective period elapses. The lamp lighting effect of the board lighting device 23 may be temporarily stopped until the board lighting device 23 is played, and then the lamp lighting effect of the board lighting device 23 may be resumed. In this way, the operation prompting image displayed on the first image display device 16 can be made conspicuous, and the player can recognize that the scene is tense, thus making it possible to enhance the interest of the game. .

In addition, the movable production members 17A to 17C, the board lighting device 23, and the production button 6a were designed to emit rainbow light at the time of the determined success production. The lighting device 23 for the board may be turned off, or the lighting device 23 for the board may be turned off while the movable production members 17A to 17C emit rainbow light.

In addition, when executing the determined success effect, the rainbow light emission of the movable effect members 17A to 17C, the board lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 6a is started first. After the start, the rainbow emission of the movable production members 17A to 17C and the board lighting device 23 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the movable production members 17A to 17C may be started first, and then the production button 6a and the board The lighting device 23 may start to emit rainbow light.

Further, when the SPSP ready-to-win production is executed, the stop suggesting effect or the production pattern 16a is temporarily stopped in a display mode including characters, and then the production pattern 16a is fixed and stopped. In the case of losing as a result, the stop suggesting effect or effect pattern 16a is temporarily stopped in a display mode including the character, and then the effect pattern 16a is fixed and stopped, and in the case of a big hit, the stop suggesting effect or effect is performed. The design 16a may not be temporarily stopped in the display mode including characters, but the performance design 16a may be fixed and stopped in the display mode of only the number patterns.

(Example of a successful promotion in the re-lottery production)
With reference to FIG. 69, an example of the effect when the re-lottery effect is executed and the promotion is successful will be described.

When the strong vibration effect shown in FIG. 67(9) or FIG. 68(8) is completed, as shown in FIG. 68(1), a temporary Although it is stopped and the strong vibration effect is terminated, the board lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a continue to emit rainbow light. When one second elapses from that point, the lighting device 23 for the board restarts the effect of lighting the lamp, and the effect button 6a is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(2), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three production patterns 6a of "4" are synchronously fluctuated (for example, all kinds of numbers of production patterns 16a are rotated once ("1" → "2" ... " 9”→“1”) is synchronously fluctuated for a predetermined time that can always be seen).

In addition, it is composed of an opaque effect button image that imitates the effect button 6a that emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the effective period. is displayed, the display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the production button 6a emits red light.

After that, when the performance button 6a is single-hit or the effective period elapses, promotion success performance suggesting promotion to the probability variable jackpot is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(3), the third movable effect member 17C emits a rainbow light, the blade portion is extracted from the sheath portion, and the effect action is performed to tilt to the front side of the screen of the first image display device 16. done. A success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and a promotion sound effect is output. Also, a strong vibration effect (successful promotion vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for 3 seconds. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.

When the first to third movable production members 17A to 17C return to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 69(4), the production pattern 16a of "777" switched from the production pattern 16a of "444" protrudes from the screen. is temporarily stopped in the enlarged size display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(5), the production pattern 16a of "777" returns to the normal size display mode and is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image), and the board lighting device 23 and the effect The button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 69(6), a stop suggestion effect TS is executed to suggest that the effect symbol 16a shifts from a temporary stop to a fixed stop.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(7), the effect symbol 16a of "777" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combined display mode of "777". After the pattern determination stop period (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 69(8), the opening effect of the big hit game and the lamp light effect by the board illumination device 23 are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, a character image of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed to indicate that a 10R jackpot game is to be executed, and a back light flash is displayed behind the character to highlight the character image of "SUPER BONUS". be done. After that, when the opening effect ends, the first round game is started.

When the promotion success effect is executed, the rainbow light emission of the third movable effect member 17C, the board lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a is started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 6a is started first. After that, the rainbow emission of the third movable effect member 17C and the board lighting device 23 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the third movable effect member 17C is started first, and then the effect button 6a and the board lighting are started. A rainbow emission of the device 23 may be initiated.

Although the vibration performance is executed at the time of the determination success performance or the promotion success performance, the vibration performance may be executed at the time of the determination success performance, and not executed at the promotion success performance.
Alternatively, the vibration performance may be executed during the promotion success performance, while the vibration performance may not be executed during the determined success performance.
Alternatively, the vibration effect may not be executed during the determined success effect and the promotion success effect.

To effectively improve performance effects of each of the determination success performance and the promotion success performance because the motion mode of the performance of the performance of the performance of the success of the determination and the motion mode of the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance of the promotion success are different from each other. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production in case promotion fails in re-lottery production)
With reference to FIG. 70, an effect example in the case where the re-lottery effect is executed and promotion fails will be described.

When the strong vibration effect shown in FIG. 67(9) or FIG. 68(8) is completed, as shown in FIG. Although the game is temporarily stopped and the strong vibration effect ends, the board illumination device 23 and the effect button 6a continue to emit rainbow light. After one second has elapsed, the lighting device 23 for the board restarts the effect of lighting the lamp, and the effect button 6a is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(2), a re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, three production patterns 6a of "4" are synchronously fluctuated (for example, all kinds of numbers of production patterns 16a are rotated once ("1" → "2" ... " 9”→“1”) is synchronously fluctuated for a predetermined time that can always be seen).

In addition, it consists of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a that emits white light at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period. The operation prompting image SG is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output. Also, the effect button 6a emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 6a is single-hit or the effective period passes without being operated, promotion failure performance is performed to suggest that the game will not be promoted to the probability variable jackpot. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(3), a temporary stop is displayed in a display mode in which the production pattern 16a of "444" protrudes from the screen, and a non-elevation effect sound is output.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(4), the effect pattern 16a of "444" is temporarily stopped after returning to the normal size display mode. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image), and the board lighting device 23 and the effect The button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 70(5), a stop suggestion effect TS is executed to suggest that the effect symbol 16a shifts from a temporary stop to a fixed stop.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(6), the production symbol 16a of "444" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combined display mode of "444". After the pattern fixing stop period (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 70(7), the opening effect of the big win game and the lamp light effect by the lighting device 23 for the board are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening performance, a character image of "BONUS" is displayed to indicate that a 4R jackpot game is to be executed, and a backlight flash is displayed behind the character image to highlight the character image of "BONUS." be. After that, when the opening effect ends, the first round game is started.

(Example of production when resurrection production is executed)
Using FIG. 71, a description will be given of an effect example when the resurrection effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 71(1), the effect patterns 16a of "4" in the left and right areas are reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and a battle effect is executed as an SPSP ready-to-win effect. I will unleash an attack technique to defeat the.

At the end of the battle, as shown in FIG. 71(2), the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, and a defeat confirmation effect indicating battle defeat is performed. At this time, the production pattern 16a of "454" indicating the reach loss is temporarily stopped in a reduced size display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71(3), the effect pattern 16a is changed to the normal size of "7 (pig) 7 (pig) 7 (pig)" including the decorative portion (character) and temporarily stopped. After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed, a resurrection effect is performed as shown in FIG. 71(4). Specifically, a moving image showing a friendly character trying to stand up after being knocked down by an enemy character and a message image of "Stand up!" 4 seconds) occurs, and an opaque effect button image simulating a red light emitting effect button 6a, a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period, and an operation prompting image SG composed of a character image of "Continuous hit" are displayed. Then, the display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the production button 6a emits red light.

After that, when the performance button 6a is operated repeatedly or the valid period passes without being operated, a resurrection success performance suggesting execution of a jackpot game (resurrection jackpot) is performed. Specifically, when the ally character stands up and revives, as shown in FIG. 71(5), the blade portion of the third movable effect member 17C emitting rainbow light is pulled out of the sheath portion and the screen of the first image display device 16 is displayed. A performance operation of tilting to the front side of is performed. A success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and a success effect sound A is output. Also, a strong vibration effect (resurrection success vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for four seconds. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.

Then, the strong vibration effect ends, but after the board lighting device 23 and the effect button 6a continue to emit rainbow light, the recovery success effect ends. After that, as shown in FIG. 71(6), the display mode of the production pattern 16a of "777" is temporarily stopped. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big hit confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image), and the board lighting device 23 and the effect The button 6a emits rainbow light.

After that, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 71(7), a stop suggestion effect TS is executed to suggest that the effect symbol 16a shifts from a temporary stop to a fixed stop.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71(8), the production symbol 16a of "777" is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the combined display mode of "777". After the pattern fixing stop period (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 71(9), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the lamp lighting effect by the lighting device 23 for the board are started. In addition, a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 6a is strongly vibrated for one second, and the effect button 6a emits rainbow light.

In the opening effect, a character image of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed to indicate that a 10R jackpot game is to be executed, and a back light flash is displayed behind the character to highlight the character image of "SUPER BONUS". be done. After that, when the opening effect ends, the first round game is started.
Incidentally, when the character image of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed, the effect button 6a may simply emit rainbow light without performing the vibration effect by the effect button 6a.
Alternatively, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may be performed only when the character image of "SUPER BONUS" is displayed, and the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may not be performed when the character image of "BONUS" is displayed. .

(Variable mission production)
During the jackpot game (round game), there is a case where a probability variable mission effect is executed to determine whether or not the high probability short-time game state is reached. For example, in the 4R round game in the 10R jackpot game, the effective period of the production button 6a (five-second consecutive hits) occurs, and a probability variable mission production (for example, a mission production to challenge panel destruction by button repeated blows) is started.

During the valid period, an operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. When the performance button 6a is operated and the panel is destroyed, or when the valid period elapses without the performance button 6a being operated, the mission success performance is executed. In the mission success effect, the third movable effect member 17C emits rainbow light, the blade is pulled out of the sheath, and the effect action of tilting to the front side of the screen of the first image display device 16 is performed. A success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 16, and a success effect sound is output. Also, a strong vibration effect (successful promotion vibration effect) by the effect button 6a is executed for 5 seconds. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the production button 6a emit rainbow light.
In this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the high-probability short-time gaming state will occur after the jackpot game, and to improve the amusement of the game.
In addition, when the player can select one of the probability variable mode D and the probability variable mode E corresponding to the high probability time-saving gaming state by operating the production button 6a and the cross key 6f, the production button 6a is operated. However, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a is not executed.

According to the production example shown in FIG. 71, the vibration production (successful recovery vibration production) executed during the successful recovery production is accompanied by the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image). A display effect sound at the time of display and a production sound (operation effect sound, success effect sound, operation effect sound of the movable production member, etc.) when the production button 6a is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to execute a dramatic and impactful resurrection success effect that turns the player's disappointment about the loss into joy, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

According to the production example shown in FIG. 71, the execution period of the vibration production executed at the time of the resurrection success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 6a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Regarding the vibration effect executed at the time of the resurrection success effect, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period passes when the effect button 6a is not operated) 4 seconds later) (execution period of vibration effect may be variable).

(Production example 1 when the setting is changed from normal mode to time saving mode)
With reference to FIG. 72, a description will be given of an effect example in which the setting is changed to the time saving mode triggered by the stop display of the specific losing symbol in the normal mode with the loss variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 72(1), after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the production pattern 16a is started, as shown in FIG. 72(2), "1 (cat) 2 (dog) 3 ( When the production pattern 16a (specific lost pattern) of "rabbit" is fixed and stopped, the vibration production by the production button 6a is executed. Specifically, the production button 6a is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds, and the production button 6a is flashed in red. In addition, the time-saving mode input effect sound is output, and the board illumination device 23 and the frame illumination device 27 emit red light.

Then, as shown in FIG. 72(3), a character image of "chance mode entry" indicating confirmation of the time saving mode is displayed, and the production button 6a emits white light. As a result, the player reliably recognizes that the game has transitioned to the time-saving mode (low-probability time-saving game state). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 72(4), a right-handed image prompting the shooting of the game ball toward the right area 4a2 of the game area 4a is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light.
In the chance mode (time saving mode), the same effect image (background image, effect pattern image, etc.) as in the normal time saving mode (low probability time saving game state after the jackpot game) is displayed. A special effect image (special background image, special effect pattern image, etc.) corresponding to the chance mode may be displayed.

According to the production example shown in FIG. 72, when the specific losing pattern is stopped in the normal mode, the production pattern 16a can attract the player's attention to the production pattern 16a by executing the vibration production. can.
Incidentally, instead of the vibration effect by the effect button 6a, the movable effect members 17A to 17C may be used to perform the role object effect. In this case, in a state in which the first movable effect member 17A and the second movable effect member 17B emit red light, the blade portion of the first movable effect member 17A moves to the left, and the second movable effect member 17B moves to the standby position. to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16 may be performed all at once.
In addition, as the specific losing pattern, instead of the predetermined losing effect pattern 16a of "1 (dog) 2 (cat) 3 (rabbit)", a time saving pattern in which the characters "time saving" are displayed, a figure pattern ( For example, "★★★"), or a display mode combining the effect pattern 16a and a figure pattern (for example, "1★2") may be used.

(Production example 2 when the setting is changed from normal mode to time saving mode)
With reference to FIG. 73, a description will be given of an effect example in which the settings are changed to the time saving mode when the loss variation effect reaches a predetermined number of times in the normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 73(1), after the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the production pattern 16a is started, as shown in FIG. 73(2), "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 ( Tiger)" is displayed in a fixed stop mode, and there are three times remaining until the time saving mode is entered.

As shown in FIG. 73 (3), when the scrolling display of the performance pattern 16a is started, a time saving mode entering effect is executed to tell that there are three remaining times until entering the time saving mode. Specifically, a countdown image "3" is displayed to notify that there are three times remaining until entering the time saving mode, a count sound effect is output, and the production button 6a emits white light. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the frame illumination device 27 emit white light.
After that, as shown in FIG. 73(4), the production pattern 16a of "2 (dog) 4 (chicken) 5 (koala)" indicating the failure is fixed and stopped, and there are two times remaining until entering the time saving mode. .

As shown in FIG. 73 (5), when the scrolling display of the production pattern 16a is started, a countdown image "2" is displayed to notify that there are two times remaining until entering the time saving mode, and the count effect is displayed. A sound is output, and the production button 6a emits white light. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the frame illumination device 27 emit white light.
After that, as shown in FIG. 73(6), the performance pattern 16a of "3 (rabbit), 1 (cat), 2 (dog)" indicating the failure is fixed and stopped, and there is only one remaining time until the time saving mode is entered. .

As shown in FIG. 73 (7), when the scroll display of the production pattern 16a is started, a countdown image "1" is displayed to notify that there is only one remaining time until entering the time saving mode, and the count effect is displayed. A sound is output, and the production button 6a emits white light. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the frame illumination device 27 emit white light.
After that, as shown in FIG. 73(8), the production pattern 16a of "5 (koala), 6 (tiger), and 8 (fox)" indicating the failure is fixed and stopped, and the remaining 0 times until entering the time saving mode, that is, , Entering the short-time mode.

As shown in FIG. 73 (9), when the scroll display of the effect pattern 16a is opened, a countdown image "0" indicating that the number of fluctuations until entering the time saving mode has been reached is displayed, and the count effect is displayed. A sound is output, and the production button 6a emits white light. Also, the board illumination device 23 and the frame illumination device 27 emit white light.
Further, as shown in FIG. 73(10), a rendering operation in which the blade portion of the first movable rendering member 17A moves leftward while the first movable rendering member 17A and the second movable rendering member 17B emit red light, The effect operation in which the second movable effect member 17B moves downward from the standby position to the front side of the center of the screen of the first image display device 16 is performed all at once. Moreover, while an effect image is displayed, the time saving mode rush effect is output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73(11), a character image of "chance mode entry" indicating confirmation of the time saving mode is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light. As a result, the player reliably recognizes that the game has transitioned to the time-saving mode (low-probability time-saving game state). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 73(12), a right-handed image prompting the shooting of the game ball toward the right area 4a2 of the game area 4a is displayed, and the effect button 6a emits white light.

According to the production example shown in FIG. 73, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of the time saving mode by the time saving input mode fanning production, and to attract the player's attention to the production pattern 16a.
In addition, since it is possible to heighten the player's delight at entering the time-saving mode by the accessory presentation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Incidentally, instead of the vibration effect by the movable effect members 17A to 17C, the vibration effect by the effect button 6a may be performed. The production button 6a is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds and flashes in red, or the production button 6a is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds and the production button 6a is lit in red.
In addition, a light guide plate may be arranged on the front side of the image display device 16, and the light guide plate may emit light instead of the board lighting device 23 and the frame lighting device 27 in the time saving mode rush effect. The light guide plate may emit light together with the lighting device 23 for the board and the lighting device 27 for the frame.

(Example of effect when the operation means is operated while waiting for a customer)
Using FIG. 74, an example of an effect of the operating means (the effect button 6a, the cross key 6f) during the customer waiting state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 74 (1), when the transition to the customer waiting state in which the variable effect and the jackpot effect are not executed, the effect button 6a and the effect button 6a and A valid period during customer waiting is started in which the operation of the cross key 6f is valid. Since the effective period during customer waiting is maintained until the variable performance is started, it can be generated over a period longer than various effective periods generated during the variable performance.

As shown in FIG. 74(2), the first image display device 16 displays a top screen including the stop-displayed effect pattern 16a, the effect button icon, and the cross key icon. When the effect button 6a is operated, the menu top screen MT including the menu screen, the effect button icon, and the cross key (selection button) icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 74(3) without vibrating the effect button 6a. be done.

On the menu screen, for example, menu items such as "pachilog", "first pachinko course", "volume/light intensity adjustment", "return", a selection key (cross key) icon, and an enter button (effect button) icon are set. ing.

The player can select any of the desired selection items using the cross key 6f. For example, on the menu screen, one of a plurality of selection items is highlighted (blinking display, display that changes the color of the selection item, etc.). The highlighted selection item becomes the selection target. The player switches the highlighted selection item using the cross key 6f, and determines the highlighted selection item by operating the effect button 6a. This means that the desired selection item is determined. When the selection item is determined, the screen corresponding to the determined selection item is switched from the menu screen and newly displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 6a to decide "pachilog", the pachilog top menu is displayed without vibrating the effect button 6a. “Pachilog” is, simply put, a game in which game history information is stored in a gaming machine.
When the player operates the performance button 6a and decides "first pachinko course", the guidance movie for beginners is reproduced without vibrating the performance button 6a.
When the player operates the effect button 6a to determine "volume/light amount adjustment", the sound volume/light amount adjustment screen is displayed without vibrating the effect button 6a.

When the left and right buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, a volume adjustment screen is displayed. On this screen, a volume gauge (volume value level meter) showing a plurality of volume levels, an explanation of "change volume with left and right buttons", and a volume control screen are displayed. A cross key icon is displayed for change operations. When the left and right buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, the volume gauge is displayed in a state indicating the volume one level higher or lower than the current volume without vibrating the cross key 6f or the effect button 6a, and voice output is also performed. A volume change confirmation sound is output from the device 9 in a voice corresponding to the changed volume.

When the up and down buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, a light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. On this screen, a light intensity gauge (light intensity value level meter) showing a plurality of light intensity levels, an explanation of "change light intensity with up and down buttons", and a light intensity adjustment screen are displayed. A cross key icon is displayed for change operations. When the up and down buttons of the cross key 6f are operated, the light intensity gauge is displayed in a state indicating the light intensity one step higher or lower than the current light intensity without vibrating the cross key 6f or the production button 6a, and voice output is also provided. A light quantity change confirmation sound corresponding to the changed light quantity is output from the device 9 .

When the player operates the effect button 6a to decide "return", the menu screen is erased without vibrating the effect button 6a. On the other hand, when the effect button 6a is not operated while the menu screen is displayed, a demonstration effect image including the effect button icon is displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 45 seconds) has elapsed since the menu screen was displayed, as shown in FIG. 74(4). is displayed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 74, the effect button 6a related to various advance notice effects (dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) occurring during the variable effect Even if the effect button 6a or the cross key 6f is operated during the customer waiting valid period that can occur over a period longer than the valid period, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 6a (by vibrating the effect button 6a) (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 6f that is transmitted) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the production button 6a or the cross key 6f is operated during the customer waiting state, and to avoid the inconvenience of giving the player an unpleasant feeling. becomes.

In addition, regarding the effective period of the cross key 6f related to the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the fluctuation production (variation display of special symbols) and the jackpot production (jackpot game), various advance notice productions (speech) that occur during the fluctuation production It can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.), but during the effective period of the cross key 6f related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment , even if the cross key 6f is operated, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 6f transmitted by vibrating the effect button 6a) is not executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the production button 6a or the cross key 6f is operated during the customer waiting state, and to avoid the inconvenience of giving the player an unpleasant feeling. becomes.

In addition, as for the valid period of waiting for customers, an effective suggesting effect suggesting that the valid period may occur before the valid period occurs is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though the information beneficial to the player (the effect to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving

In addition, regarding the effective period of the cross key 6f related to the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment that occurs during the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot performance (jackpot game), the effective suggestive performance is executed before the valid period occurs. It is designed not to be Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though the information beneficial to the player (the effect to expect the execution of the jackpot game) is not executed, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of giving

In addition, compared to the case where the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period during customer waiting, which can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the effect button 6a that occurs during the variable effect (display period of the operation prompting image), During the effective period of the effect button 6a (the display period of the operation promotion image) related to various advance effects (dialogue advance effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) that occur during the variable effect, the effect button 6a is operated, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a is more likely to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the effective period of the effect button 6a related to various advance notice effects that occur during the variable effect is the relatively short first effective period (effective period accompanied by the display of the operation promotion image related to the dialogue advance notice effect, etc.) and the relatively short effective period. Although there is a long second effective period (effective period accompanied by the display of an operation prompting image related to the determined effect, etc.), the customer who can occur over a period longer than the effective period of the effect button 6a that occurs during the variable effect. The vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a is more likely to be executed when the effect button 6a is operated during the second effective period than when the effect button 6a is operated during the waiting valid period. . Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period of waiting for customers, the vibration effect of vibrating the effect button 6a at a predetermined rate may be executed. At a rate lower than when the effect button 6a is operated during the effective period of the effect button 6a related to various advance notice effects (dialogue notice effect, pseudo-continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) Vibration production should be executed.

(Summary of various vibration effects executed in specific effects)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing various vibration effects executed during the pre-reach effect and various vibration effects executed during the mid-reach effect/post-reach effect in the specific effect.
The specific effect is a change effect pattern of losing/big win with reach in the change effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 .
In the specific production, the vibration production with operation executed during the production after reach (second production) rather than the type of vibration production with operation (dialogue notice production) executed during the production before reach (first production) Since there are many types (development production, cut-in notice production, decision success vibration production, re-lottery promotion vibration production, resurrection success vibration production, etc.), vibration production with operation is more effective during reach than before production / The execution ratio is higher in the post-reach production.

Further, in the specific performance, the ratio of execution of the operation-free vibration performance with matching jackpot patterns is higher in the post-reach performance than in the pre-reach performance.
Further, in the specific effect (the specific effect of the notice target), the execution ratio of the button vibration notice effect at the time of fluctuation start is higher in the pre-reach effect than in the post-reach effect.

As a first feature related to the vibration effect, the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the dialog announcement effect with the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image). , The step-up notice effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is the degree of expectation of the jackpot (the ratio of executing the big hit confirmation vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the pattern matching) Determined by success production, the rate of execution of success vibration production (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) etc.) is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the type of pre-reach announcement effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image) is longer than the case where the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed in the step-up notice effect that is not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promoting image). In the case where the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second or strong vibration 1 second) is executed in the serif notice effect with display), the expectation of the jackpot (vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the pattern alignment is executed You may make it the ratio etc. which a vibration production|presentation (strong vibration 4 seconds -> 5 seconds) is performed by a ratio and a determined production|presentation become high.

As a second feature related to the vibration effect, the vibration effect that is executed as a big hit notice effect has a relatively short vibration period. , Vibration production (1 second) during development production, etc.) and 2nd vibration production with a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration production (during cut-in production, successful success production, fixed production, etc.) There is a vibration effect longer than a second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the second effect period (normal reach effect) and the third effect period (SP /SPSP ready-to-reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) during the first effect period than during the second effect period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without mistaking him for a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the look-ahead vibration effect (button vibration notice effect) is also the first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration time. After the production period (pre-reach production), there is a second production period (normal reach production) and a third production period (SP/SP SP reach production). The first vibration effect is easily executed (performed at a high rate).

As a third feature related to the vibration effect, in the variable effect in which there is a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect) after the second effect period (normal reach effect) after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), 1st vibration effects (vibration effects (1 second) such as dialogue announcement effects, step-up announcement effects, simulated continuous effects, development effects, etc.) are executed during the 1st effect period than during the 3rd effect period. (high rate of execution). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation without mistaking him for a big win, and to improve the interest in the game.

As a fourth feature related to the vibration effect, the vibration effect that is executed as a big hit notice effect includes the first vibration effect with a short vibration period (at the time of the dialogue notice effect, the step-up notice effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, and the development effect). Vibration effects such as time (1 second)) and a second vibration effect with a longer vibration period than the first vibration effect (during cut-in effects, successful decisions, confirmed effects, etc. Vibration effects longer than 1 second ( 3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first production period (pre-reach production), there is a second production period (normal reach production) and a third production period (SP/SPSP reach production). In the variable production, the second vibration production is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) during the second production period than during the first production period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a fifth feature related to the vibration effect, in the variable effect in which there is a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect) after the second effect period (normal reach effect) after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), Compared to the first production period, the third production period is longer than the second vibration production (during cut-in production, successful decision production, fixed production, etc.). seconds → 5 seconds)) is likely to be executed (the execution rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth feature of the vibration effect, during the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the ratio of executing the first vibration effect (1 second) with the effect button 6a in the normal state protrudes the effect button 6a. Higher than the rate of executing the first vibration effect (1 second) as the state. Therefore, the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused during the first presentation period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a seventh feature related to the vibration effect, during the third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the ratio of executing the second vibration effect (3 seconds or more) with the effect button 6a in the projecting state is higher than the effect button. It is higher than the ratio of executing the second vibration effect with 6a as the normal state. Therefore, in the first effect period (pre-reach effect), the expectation of the player is not excessively aroused, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As an eighth feature related to the vibration effect, the vibration effect that is executed as a big hit notice effect includes the first vibration effect with a short vibration period (at the time of the dialogue notice effect, the step-up notice effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, the development effect). Vibration effect such as time (1 second)) and 2nd vibration effect with a longer vibration period (production period) than the 1st vibration effect (during cut-in effect, decision success effect, re-lottery promotion success effect, resurrection success There are vibration effects longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds), such as during production and final production, and continuous production of a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice) (pseudo continuous production ) is executed and the ready-to-win production is executed, the second vibration production (3 seconds) is better when the first vibration production (1 second) is executed than when the first vibration production is not executed. above) is likely to be executed (the ratio of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation of whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a ninth feature related to the vibration production, the vibration production executed as a big hit announcement production has a second vibration production (during the cut-in production, a determined success production) with a longer vibration period (production period) than the first vibration production There are vibration effects longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) such as during re-lottery promotion success effects, resurrection success effects, and confirmation effects (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)). In the variable production, the reach production by the second type production pattern (even number pattern) is easier to execute than the reach production by the first type production pattern (odd number pattern other than the "7" pattern) (the execution rate is high ), it is difficult to execute the reach production by the third type production pattern (“7” pattern) than the reach production by the second type production pattern (even number pattern) (the ratio of execution is low), the second type The second vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the ready-to-win effect is executed by the third type of effect pattern ("7" pattern) than when the ready-to-win effect is executed by the effect pattern (even number pattern) ( frequently executed). Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the type of effect symbol for executing the ready-to-win effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a tenth feature related to the vibration production, in the jackpot fluctuation production in which the ready-to-win production is executed, the vibration production (pre-reading vibration production (button vibration notice production) without the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) during the production before the reach )), step-up notice effect, confirmed effect), the number of times of execution of vibration effect (development effect, pattern matching, confirmed effect) without effective period (display of operation promotion image) during the effect after reach more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation during the post-reach performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As an eleventh feature related to the vibration effect, a specific reach effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is executed rather than a jackpot variation effect in which a predetermined reach effect (normal reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed. The number of executions of the vibration performance (development performance, pattern matching, fixed performance) without an effective period (display of the operation promotion image) during the performance after the ready-to-win is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big win variation presentation from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twelfth feature related to the vibration production, in the losing variation production in which the ready-to-win production is executed, the vibration production (development production, pattern matching, fixed production) without an effective period (display of operation promotion image) during the production after reach ), the number of times of execution of vibration effects (pre-reading vibration effects (button vibration notice effects), step-up notice effects, confirmation effects) without an effective period (display of operation promotion image) during the reach pre-production. tends to increase. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by a vibration effect that is not accompanied by an effective period (display of an operation prompting image), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a thirteenth feature related to the vibration production, the notice after the reach, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the notice production before the reach, than the case where the notice production before the reach (line notice production, step-up notice production) is executed in the variable production. The vibration effect of the effect button 6a (activation of the button vibration motor 6d) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high) when the effect (cut-in effect, development effect) is executed.
Also, when the pre-reach pre-announcement performance is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher when the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is executed than when the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player as to whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 6a will be executed when the pre-reach announcement performance is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As a 14th feature related to the vibration effect, the probability variation / time saving mode D ~ G is more than the normal mode A ~ C, the effective period of the effect button 6a in the notice effect after reach (display of the operation promotion image) Accompanied. The degree of expectation for a big win increases when the vibration performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that normal modes A to C are more likely than variable / time-saving modes D to G, the jackpot when the vibration production with the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is executed in the advance notice production after reach Expectations may be raised. Even in this case, the playability can be varied depending on the type of the performance mode, and the expectation of the player can be easily heightened in the variable probability/time-saving modes D to G, which are advantageous for the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. It is possible to

A fifteenth feature related to the vibration effect is that in the first effect period (before reach) in the variable effect, the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is executed more than the vibration effect of the effect button 6a is not executed. However, when the expectation of a big hit is high and in the big hit variation performance, the performance button 6a is performed in the post-reach performance (period after the determined success performance) regardless of whether or not the vibration performance of the performance button 6a is executed during the pre-reach performance. Vibration production (vibration production when the pattern is aligned) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the big win by means of the vibration effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

A sixteenth feature related to the vibration effect is the vibration effect (at the time of the dialogue announcement effect, during the pseudo-continuous effect, during the development effect, One of the vibration effects such as cut-in effects) is executed in one of a plurality of types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different expectations for big wins, but the effect that is executed during the variable effect Vibration effects (one of the vibration effects such as step-up notice effect, pattern alignment, etc.) not accompanied by the effective period of the button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) are executed in one predetermined vibration mode. be. Therefore, in the case where it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode without an effective period (display of the operation prompting image), it is possible to suppress the complication of the presentation mode of the vibration presentation and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

As a seventeenth feature related to the vibration production, in the production period before reach in the big hit variation production, the vibration production (vibration production at the time of the dialog announcement production) with the effective period of the production button 6a (display of the operation promotion image) is executed. and a case where a vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of step-up notice effect) is executed without the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image), and then (after-reach effect period). (At the time of decision success performance, at the time of re-lottery promotion success performance, at the time of resurrection success performance, vibration performance of 3 seconds or more at the time of pattern alignment) is executed. Vibration performance (vibration performance at the time of step-up notice performance) without accompanying is more likely to be executed (performed at a higher rate) during normal modes A to C than during probability variable/time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect related to the vibration rendering that is not accompanied by the effective period of the rendering button 6a (display of the operation prompting image), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As an eighteenth feature related to the vibration effect, when the jackpot variable effect is executed, the big hit notice is given depending on the type of the jackpot effect pattern 16a (even number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7", "7" pattern). It is possible to vary the execution mode of the vibration production in the production (execution or not, execution timing, etc.). The vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of the jackpot performance pattern 16a. Therefore, it is possible to uniformly congratulate the player on winning a big win while heightening the expectation for the big win by the vibration presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a 19th feature related to the vibration production, after executing the vibration production (decision success vibration production, etc.) with the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) in the jackpot fluctuation production, the effective period (display of the operation promotion image) is performed. It is possible to execute a vibration performance without accompanying (symbol alignment, etc.), and for a vibration performance (decision success vibration performance, etc.) accompanied by an effective period (display of an operation prompting image), the timing of starting vibration is variable depending on the operation timing of the production button 6a. On the other hand, the timing to start the vibration is predetermined for the vibration effect (symbol matching, etc.) that does not accompany the valid period (display of the operation prompting image). Therefore, depending on whether or not the valid period (display of the operation prompting image) is accompanied, the vibration effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twentieth feature related to vibration production, specific production (pseudo continuous production, , etc.) can be executed, but the degree of expectation for a big hit when a specific effect is executed is different between the normal modes A to C and the probability variable/time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

The 21st feature related to the vibration production is the stage production (step-up notice production, pseudo Continuous production, etc.) can be executed, but the staged production (step-up notice production, pseudo-continuous production, etc.) is the same in normal mode A to C and variable / time saving mode D to G 3rd step effect, 4th step effect, 5th step effect, or pseudo-continuous effect, 1 time or 2 times). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of production mode, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a 22nd feature related to vibration production, it is possible to execute any of a plurality of operation promotion productions with different jackpot expectations in normal modes A to C and probability variable / time saving modes D to G, and production button 6a It is possible to execute operation effects (any of development effects, cut-in effects, and decision effects) according to the operation of, and in normal modes A to C and variable / time-saving modes D to G, when the operation effects are executed The degree of expectation for big win is higher when the effective suggesting performance is executed and the operation promoting performance is executed than when the operation promoting performance is executed without executing the effective suggesting performance. Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for whether or not the effective suggestive effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.
Incidentally, when the vibration performance is executed during the effective suggestion performance, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the vibration performance is not executed during the effective suggestion performance.

A 23rd feature of the vibration effect is that the vibration effect with a relatively short period of time (for example, 1 second), which is executed in conjunction with the big win notice effect, is effective during the effective period of the effect button 6a (display of the operation promotion image ) and may be executed without an effective period (display of an operation promotion image), but the vibration period that is executed with the jackpot announcement effect is relatively long ( 3 seconds or longer) is executed with an effective period (display of an operation prompting image). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect for the operation of the performance button 6a, and to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-fourth feature of the vibration effect is that, in the final effect, a battle effect involving a single hit operation of the effect button 6a or a tilting operation of the effect lever 6h is executed, and a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 6a or the effect button 6a. In the case where a mission effect involving a long-pressing operation is executed, the start timing of execution of the decision success effect after operating the effect button 6a or the effect lever 6h (the display start timing of the success effect image, the decision success vibration effect) The vibration start timing, the movable start timing of the deciding motion, and the light emission start timing of the lamp light emission (rainbow)) are different. Therefore, it is possible to execute a decision success effect (decision success vibration effect) at an appropriate timing according to the effect mode of the decision effect accompanying the operation of the operation means, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a twenty-fifth feature relating to the vibration performance, the decision success vibration performance of the same vibration performance mode is executed in the decision success performance accompanied by the single pressing operation of the performance button 6a and the decision success performance accompanied by the tilting operation of the performance lever 6h. However, the success effect sound (success sound effect A) output in the decision success effect accompanying the single-press operation of the effect button 6a and the success sound effect (success effect sound) output in the decision success effect accompanying the tilting operation of the effect lever 6h B) is different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the success effect sound from becoming monotonous in the determined success presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.
In addition, after execution of the winning success effect with a single hit operation of the effect button 6a and the success success effect of winning with the tilting operation of the effect lever 6h, the vibration effect in the same vibration effect mode (vibration effect when the symbols are aligned) is executed. be. Therefore, it is possible to uniformly congratulate a big win regardless of the performance content of the determined performance, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

As a twenty-sixth feature related to the vibration effect, the decision success vibration effect involving the tilting operation of the effect lever 6h is performed more quickly than the even-number pattern matching or the jackpot pattern of the "7" pattern matching is stopped and displayed. It is easier to execute when the jackpot pattern of is stopped and displayed. Therefore, rarity can be imparted to the decision-success vibration presentation accompanying the operation of the presentation lever 6h, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
It should be noted that if the performance other than the determined success performance is changed during the variable performance, the pending icon or the variable icon changes to a display mode (red, rainbow) with high expectations for a big hit, the performance button 6a or the performance lever 6h is set to 1. You may vibrate weakly or strongly per second.

As a twenty-seventh feature related to the vibration effect, when the jackpot variable effect is executed, even if the jackpot effect pattern 16a of even pattern pattern (“222”) is stopped and displayed, odd pattern pattern (“777”) is displayed. Even when the jackpot performance pattern 16a is stopped and displayed, the vibration performance mode (strong vibration for a long time) of the winning vibration performance executed when the success effect image is displayed along with the execution of the winning success performance is the same. It has become. Therefore, while raising the expectation for the big win by the vibration effect, it is possible to uniformly celebrate the big win regardless of the type of the jackpot effect pattern that is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Also, in the probability variable/time saving modes D to G, when the game ball enters the first start port 10 and the big hit variation effect is executed, and when the game ball enters the second start port 11a and the big hit change effect is executed. Even if the jackpot production pattern 16a with even numbered patterns ("222") is stopped and displayed, and even if the jackpot production pattern 16a with odd numbered patterns ("777") is stopped and displayed, the decision is successful. The vibration effect mode (strong vibration for a long time) of the vibration effect is the same.

In addition, when the game ball wins in the first start port 10 in the normal modes A to C and the jackpot variation effect is executed, and in the probability variable / time reduction mode D to G, the game ball wins in the first start port 10 Even when the jackpot performance pattern 16a with even numbered patterns ("222") is stop-displayed, the jackpot performance pattern 16a with odd numbered patterns ("777") is still displayed. Even in this case, the vibration effect mode (strong vibration for a long time) of the determined success vibration effect is the same.

As a 28th feature related to vibration production, when cut-in production or development production is executed during reach production in normal mode A to C and variable / time saving mode D to G, red light is emitted in operation promotion production An operation prompting image including an opaque effect button image simulating the effect button 6a that is being pressed is displayed, and the degree of expectation for a big win is different when the vibration effect is executed. Therefore, even if the operation promotion effect and the vibration effect of the same effect mode are executed, the playability can be varied according to the type of the effect mode, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, when the game ball wins the first start port 10 in the normal mode A to C, when the game ball wins in the second start port 11a in the probability variable / time saving mode D ~ G, the probability variable / When the game ball enters the first starting port 10 in the time saving mode D to G, and when the cut-in performance or the development performance is executed during the ready-to-win performance, red light is emitted in the operation promotion performance. The degree of expectation for a big win differs when an operation prompting image of a button image simulating the button 6a is displayed and a vibration effect is executed.

A twenty-ninth feature related to the vibration effect is the vibration effect (short-term weak vibration or short strong vibration of time), and a vibration effect (strong vibration for a long time) when a light emission effect that causes the effect button 6a to emit rainbow light in the operation promotion effect is executed (determined success effect), the vibration effect mode (vibration intensity or vibration period) are different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the operation promoting effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirtieth feature related to the vibration effect, the rate at which the button vibration notice effect is executed is higher in the normal modes A to C than in the variable probability/time saving modes D to G. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation in the normal mode, which is more disadvantageous to the player than in the probability variable/time-saving mode, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As a thirty-first feature related to the vibration effect, the operation promoting effect prompting the player to operate the operation means includes a first operation promoting effect in which an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 6a emitting white light is displayed; There are a second operation promoting effect in which an opaque effect button image imitating the red emitting effect button 6a is displayed, and a third operation promoting effect for adjusting the volume and brightness, and information beneficial to the player (the variable effect The vibration effect can be executed when the first operation promotion effect and the second operation promotion effect suggesting the expectation of a big hit, etc.) are executed, but the third operation promotion effect not suggesting useful information to the player. Vibration performance is not executed when executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration effect from being executed until the time when useful information is not suggested to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 32nd feature related to the vibration effect, when the determined effect is executed, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the effective suggestive effect (no vibration effect) was executed (when the operation means is operated or the valid period has elapsed without being operated) A first vibration performance (determined success vibration performance) is executed after), and a vibration performance is executed at the time of effective suggestion performance, and a vibration performance (effective suggestion performance) is executed after a predetermined period has passed since the effective suggestion performance is executed. There is a second vibration performance for executing a time vibration performance and a determined success vibration performance), and the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the second vibration performance is executed than when the first vibration performance is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player from the time of the effective suggestion effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

As a thirty-third feature related to the vibration effect, the lamp change effect is executed by the winning hole lamp NR and the board lighting device 23 (the frame lighting device 27) rather than the case where the lamp changing effect is executed by the winning hole lamp NR. When it is done, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher, and vibration effects (successful decision vibration effects, vibration effects when symbols are aligned, etc.) are easier to execute. Therefore, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine having a V winning opening for continuing the high-accuracy time-saving game state during the jackpot game, when a game ball enters the V winning opening during the jackpot game, the production button 6a vibrates and , may emit rainbow colors.

(Initial operation of various drive sources)
Next, the initial operation of various driving sources will be described.
When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, various driving sources such as the opening/closing member 11b of the second starting port 11a and the opening/closing member 13b of the big prize winning port 13a are operated before the gaming machine 1 is ready to play. An initial operation is performed to In the following, the configuration required to perform the initial operation of various driving sources and the content of the initial operation will be described.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing main processing in the main control board 110 . This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initial setting processing in step S10. Specifically, a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing set values based on a setting change operation, and a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c are initialized based on an RWM (RAM) clear operation. RAM clearing processing to check the settings, setting confirmation processing for confirming the set values based on the setting confirmation operation, and initial operation of various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) provided in the board unit. Drive source initial operation processing and the like are performed to Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for special symbol determination and the random number value for reach determination. Update the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop in the power supply from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply that has been supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts). Determines whether or not a signal is input. If the power drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that a complete power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S54. Assuming that there is a possibility, the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and in step S55, transmits a power cut-off designation command to the payout control board 120 to notify that power cut-off processing has started. do. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cut-off designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls to be paid out stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received. If the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57, and if the command for specifying the number of remaining payouts has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the standby time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in a payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, when the remaining payout designation command is received, the remaining payout specified by the remaining payout designation command is saved, and when the remaining payout designation command is not received, the remaining Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in the prize ball processing of the timer interruption, and after the power is restored, a command specifying the number of payouts corresponding to the remaining number of payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120. .

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) is stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine data abnormality in the game RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 110c is backed up (restored power supply) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62 prohibits RWM access, After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed. When the supply of the operating power is restarted after the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RWM clear operation are performed for some reason at the time of the momentary power failure, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process are not executed. The game machine does not operate unintendedly, and the reliability of the game machine can be ensured.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, it is determined that the power is restored, and the process proceeds to step S17. If the backup flag is not saved, the first power-on or irregular power restoration The process proceeds to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power interruption during execution of S35.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 58d and the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S19 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c, a process for changing (updating) the set value (the probability of being determined as a big hit in the big win determination), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is performed. conduct. Details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S22. to move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal because it is the first power-on or the above-described irregular power recovery, and the process proceeds to step S22. will be transferred.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value (in-game) area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value (in-game) area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value (in-game) area is not within the proper range , the process proceeds to step S22.

The "set value (playing) area" is an area in which set values are saved when not in the setting change mode, and is an area in which fixed set values are saved. The set value range in the set value (playing) area is "1 to 4", which is a value obtained by adding "1" to the set value in the set value (during change) area.
The "set value (changed) area" is an area in which the set value being set is temporarily saved in the setting change mode. The set value range in the set value (during change) area is 0 to 3, which is a value minus 1 from the set value in the set value (during game) area. Incidentally, the term "set value area" simply means "set value (playing) area" and "set value (changing) area".

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing (game program) in step S22. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing non-recoverable error notification indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. It should be noted that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

The "notification of unrecoverable error" is to display an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device 16 recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. illuminating the frame lighting device 27 and the board lighting device 23 in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off; It is possible to output a possible error sound ("This is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S23. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S24 assuming that the RWM clearing operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clearing operation, the process proceeds to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed. Details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d), which are provided in the board unit and are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game, are activated for a predetermined period of time. It performs processing for initial operation. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S33. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying an initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135") at the time of power-on for making the image display device 16 recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, The frame lighting device 27 and the board lighting device 23 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the voice output device 9 notifies that the RWM area has been initialized. power-on notification sound ("RWM cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 16 and 18, the image display devices 16 and 18 may display to notify that the RWM area has been cleared.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 58d is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S28 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, a process for displaying on the information display 113 the set values saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area is performed. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S29. Specifically, the above-described various driving sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) are initially operated for a predetermined period. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (0 clearing) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing power supply recovery notification indicating that the setting confirmation notification or the like is terminated and the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or The lighting device 27 and the board lighting device 23 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). It is to output a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130 in step S32. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures, and the processing for displaying a variable image or a reserved image, which will be described later, on the image display device 16 will be performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S33. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S34, and permits all interrupts in step S35 to control the progress of the game (main control). A timer interrupt of the board 110 is started, and the current initialization process is finished.

In other words, from the time when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is in a pre-start state before the start of the game progress control. It will be in a state where it is possible to play.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation, setting change, RWM clear, and setting confirmation cannot be easily performed. , cheating can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including the case where the backup flag is not saved), unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped. This eliminates the inconvenience caused to the game parlor and the player, and improves the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if the value in the setting value (in-game) area is not within the proper range, that is, if there is a possibility that the previous power failure occurred while the setting was being changed, an unrecoverable error will occur even if the checksum is normal. By executing the process and stopping the progress of the game, the game will not progress in a state where the setting value not intended by the game parlor side is set, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved. becomes possible.

In addition, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the front (surface) of the game machine 1 includes a state confirmation display 19k, image display devices 16 and 18, and a lighting device for frame. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the 27 and the lighting device 23 for the board, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the rear surface (rear side). ing. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

The setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include, as a condition, that the open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the opening/closing door 3 is in the ON state. The open detection switch 31a is provided, for example, on the opening/closing frame 2B. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, fraud can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

If the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S20, unrecoverable error processing is executed. The initial value "1" may be saved in the value area and the process may be moved to step S24.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

In addition, by not determining whether or not there is a setting change flag, even if the previous power failure occurred during setting change, the unrecoverable error process may not be performed.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may be shifted to unrecoverable error processing. .

(Main control board setting change processing)
A setting change process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the setting change processing of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a outputs a setting change signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts outputting a setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. The setting change signal (security signal) continues to be output while the setting is being changed, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the setting change is completed, before ending the output.

In step S19-2, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the state confirmation display 19k. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 19k is turned on. As a result, the game clerk can recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the state confirmation display 19k.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S19-3. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

"Setting change notification" means displaying a setting changing screen indicating that setting values are being changed on the image display devices 16 and 18, It is to light all of them with a predetermined emission color (for example, white emission). A setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") may be output from the voice output device 9 to indicate that the setting is being changed. As a result, the game clerk can recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the image display devices 16 and 18, the frame illumination device 27, the board illumination device 23, and the voice output device 9. FIG.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a subtracts 1 from the set value in the set value (in-game) area and saves it in the set value (in-change) area. Initialize (clear to 0) the set value (in-game) area.

In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value (under change) area is within the proper range (here, 0 to 3). If it is determined that the set value in the set value (under change) area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S19-8, and it is determined that the set value in the set value (under change) area is not within the proper range. If so, the process moves to step S19-7.

If it is determined in step S19-6 that the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area is not within the proper range, the main CPU 110a sets the setting value in the setting value (currently changing) area to the initial value " 0”.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-8. Specifically, the set value in the set value (under change) area is referred to, and the value added by +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, the game clerk can confirm the setting value before the change by checking the information display device 113 .

In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a set value update operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-10, and if there is no set value update operation, the process moves to step S19-13.

The main CPU 110a updates the set value in the set value (under change) area by +1 in step S19-10, and performs set value correction processing in step S19-11. Specifically, when the updated setting value is "4" which exceeds the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3), a process of correcting the setting value to "0" is performed.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-12. Specifically, the set value in the set value (under change) area is referred to, and the value added by +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to check the information display 113 to grasp the set value before confirmation.

In step S19-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an operation to confirm the set value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 58d has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a set value confirmation operation, the process is moved to step S19-14 assuming that the set value is confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and if there is no set value confirmation operation, the set value is updated. Assuming that there is a possibility that the

In step S19-14, the main CPU 110a increments the set value in the set value (changed) area by "1" and saves it in the set value (in game) area. Initialize (clear to 0) the set value of .

At step S19-16, the main CPU 110a terminates the display of the set values on the information display 113, and at step S19-17 terminates the display of the status confirmation display 19k, thereby terminating the current setting change process.

In this way, even if the setting value is out of the proper range, the initial value is set as the setting value, so that an indeterminate value is set as the setting value and the gaming machine unexpectedly malfunctions. It is possible to prevent the game shop and the player from being troubled by the action, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine.

In addition, during the setting change (during the setting change mode), the game clerk, on the front (surface) of the game machine 1, displays the state confirmation display 19k, the image display devices 16 and 18, the frame lighting device 27, and the board lighting device. By checking 23, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed, and by checking the information display 113 on the rear surface (back side), it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the game machine 1 .

Although the set value confirmation operation is performed by turning the setting key switch 58d from the ON state to the OFF state, the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c may be turned from the OFF state to the ON state. The switch may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the touch sensor 7a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state by inputting the signal from the touch sensor 7a to the main control board 110 as well. Alternatively, a detection switch (for example, a general winning opening detection switch 14a, etc.) provided in a specific winning opening (including a starting opening) may be changed from an OFF state to an ON state, or the open detection switch 31a may The OFF state may be changed to the ON state.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110. FIG.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data (other than the set values) in the RWM area for the game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited. Become.

In step S24-2, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed. If another security signal is being output from the security signal terminal, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the security signal being output ends.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear designation command to the effect control board 130, and terminates the current RWM clear processing.

Although the RWM clear designation command is transmitted at the start of the RWM clear processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the RWM clear processing is completed, the RWM clear start designation command is transmitted instead of the RWM clear designation command. Alternatively, instead of the power-on designation command, an RWM clear end designation command may be transmitted. In this case, the RWM clearing end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clearing process, or may be transmitted after the RWM clearing process is completed.

(Main control board setting confirmation processing)
A setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation processing of the main control board 110 .

First, in step S28-1, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of a setting confirmation signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts to output a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed. The setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting confirmation, and continues to be output for 200 ms even after the setting confirmation is completed, and then ends the output.

In step S28-2, the main CPU 110a displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed on the status confirmation display 19k. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 19k is turned on. As a result, the game clerk can recognize that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display 19k.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S28-3. As a result, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

"Notification of setting confirmation" means displaying a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the image display devices 16 and 18, or displaying the frame lighting device 27 or the board lighting device 23 while the setting is being confirmed. It is to light up all of them with a predetermined emission color (for example, white). It should be noted that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Confirming the setting value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed. As a result, the game clerk can recognize that the settings are being confirmed by checking the image display devices 16 and 18, the frame illumination device 27, the board illumination device 23, and the voice output device 9. FIG.

The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S28-4. Specifically, the set value in the set value (in-game) area is referenced, and a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 . As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to grasp the current set value by checking the information display device 113 .

In step S28-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a confirmation end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 58d has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process proceeds to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

The main CPU 110a ends the display of the set values on the information display 113 in step S28-6, ends the display on the status confirmation display 19k in step S28-7, and ends the current setting change processing.

It should be noted that the setting confirmation designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting confirmation processing, and the power restoration designation command is transmitted after the setting confirmation processing is completed, but instead of the setting confirmation designation command, the setting confirmation start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be transmitted after the setting confirmation process is completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting checking signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, many types of signals can be output even with a limited number of signal terminals, and convenience of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, from the start of power supply to the game ready state where the game progress control (timer interrupt of the main control board 110) is performed (in the state before the start), the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c and the setting key switch 58d Signal input from other input devices (out ball detection switch 58e, general winning opening detection switch 14a, gate detection switch 12a, first starting opening detection switch 10a, second starting opening detection switch 11c, big winning opening detection switch 13c) is not monitored for the presence of

In other words, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, even if game balls enter various prize winning openings (including the starting opening), the winning is invalidated and the game balls are not paid out. It's like Also, even if the game ball wins the first starting port 10 or the second starting port 11a, the winning becomes invalid and the first special symbol reservation first display 19d or the second special symbol reservation first display 19e The variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the big winning game and the small winning game are not executed. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 12, the passage is invalidated, and the normal pattern 1st display device 19f does not perform the variable display of the normal pattern, and the auxiliary game is not executed. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding wasteful processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the player will play the game before the progress control of the game is started.

In addition, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, error notification is not performed even if various errors occur. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that cheating is performed before the game progress control is started.

The setting change signal, RWM clear signal, setting confirmation signal, and unrecoverable error signal may be output from separate output terminals instead of being output from the common security signal terminal.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing performance display data setting processing in the main control board 110 .

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a displays the display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in order to determine whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113. It is determined whether or not the switching value is "0". If the display switching value is "0", the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and the process proceeds to step 850-2. , the process proceeds to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not changed. When this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a lighting confirmation completion flag for determining whether or not lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag has been saved, the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and the process proceeds to step S850-4.If the lighting confirmed flag has not been saved, the information is displayed. The process moves to step S850-3 to check whether the device 113 is lit. When this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step 850-3, the main CPU 110a displays a lighting confirmation display for lighting all the segments (including the decimal point) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (to be displayed on the information display 113) corresponding to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage Acquire the normal base value saved in the second area of the area, and if the data selection counter value is "2", obtain the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area, and select the data If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is obtained.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown), and displays information based on the section counter value, the number of normal outs indicated by the normal out number counter, and the acquired normal base value. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

The main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area in step S850-6. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S880 is referred to, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. will be The information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

The main CPU 110a adds "1" to the display switching time counter described above in step S850-7, and determines whether or not the display switching time counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 5 seconds) in step S850-8. do. If it is not greater than the upper limit, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S850-15. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has passed, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is the lighting confirmed flag in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process proceeds to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, in step S850-11, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. .

The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above data selection counter in step S850-12, and determines whether or not the data selection counter is greater than the upper limit value (eg, 3) in step S85-13. If it is not larger than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in the above-described game ball counting process. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is restored, and the current performance display data setting process is terminated.

In this way, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 light up after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to check whether the information display 113 is faulty and which segment is faulty.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order. It is possible to compare the performance information (usual base value) in two game sections, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraud.

(Information displayed on the information display in each game section)
Next, the information displayed on the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. 82, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display contents of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL." indicating the normal base value of the current game interval, and " "b1.", "b2." indicating the normal base value of the game interval two times before, and "b3." indicating the normal base value of the game interval three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 includes "--" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that the normal out count is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99" respectively, "01" to "99", and the normal base value is There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. Incidentally, when the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The numerical value information displayed in the numerical segment does not change in display mode (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment does not change. The display mode changes (blinking display or lighting display) depending on the number of outs during normal operation (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game intervals, when the identification information of the game interval for which there is no calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is blinked. In addition, in the game section after the second game section, when displaying the identification information ("bL.") of the current game section, the period when the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of outs during normal 0 to 5999), the identification information will blink. Otherwise, the identification information is illuminated.

Here, to give an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 113 flashes "bL." ” will be lit up.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information not using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of "00" to "99" is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value If the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." .

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01" etc.), so 2 as a numerical segment An easy-to-understand display can be achieved by effectively using two 7-segment displays.

In addition, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of outs during normal of the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient to calculate the normal base value. , the identification information “bL.” displayed in the identification segment blinks, making it easy to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is information with low credibility.

Also, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "--" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that there is no

Instead of executing the game ball counting process, the normal base value calculation process, and the performance display data setting process as information programs, one or two of them are executed as game programs (for example, game ball The counting process may be executed within the input control process which monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the remainder may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display device 113 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed by the output control process, which is a game program.

In addition, by the out ball detection switch 58e, the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 14, the first starting opening 10, the second starting opening 11a and the big winning opening 13a, and the out balls that have flowed into the out opening 28 , only the game ball that has flowed into the out port 28 may be detected by the out ball detection switch 58e. In that case, every time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 58e, the general winning opening detection switch 14a, the first starting opening detection switch 10a, the second starting opening detection switch 11c, and the big winning opening detection switch 13c, the number of outs is determined. (Total number of outs, number of normal outs) should be incremented by one.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change)
With reference to FIG. 83, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting change will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after setting change.
For the description with reference to FIG. 83, each constituent member is given a new reference numeral for convenience of description. That is, in the structural members described above and the structural members described with reference to FIG. 83, different reference numerals may be assigned to the same members, and the same reference numerals may be assigned to different members. There is

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the movable body (second Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening/closing member 11b of the starting opening 11a and the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (big winning hole 13a) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display device 19a, second special symbol first display 19b, normal symbol first display 19c, first special symbol reservation first display 19d, second special symbol reservation first display 19e, normal symbol reservation first display 19f , high-probability game state display 19g, time-saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j, state confirmation display 19k), image display device 16 and information display 113 are hidden ( non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At timing T1, when the game machine 1 is powered on and a setting change operation (the setting key switch 58d is turned on and the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is turned on), the main control board 110 enters the setting change mode. It is in the pre-start state before the game is started and the progress control of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 19k, and the above-described setting change notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 58d is turned off) is performed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set values displayed on the 7-segment display 113d are erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 19k ends, and an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the first game information display device 19 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of normal design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power is turned on. Notification is started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable production members 73a and 73b controlled by the production control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are fully lit and the lighting confirmation is started. . Incidentally, when the predetermined period has passed, the initial motion of the movable effect members 73a and 73b ends.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after confirming settings)
With reference to FIG. 84, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after setting confirmation will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after setting confirmation.
For the explanation given with reference to FIG. 84, each constituent member is given a new reference numeral for convenience of explanation. That is, in the constituent members described above and the constituent members explained with reference to FIG. 84, different reference numerals may be assigned to the same members, and the same reference numerals may be assigned to different members. There is

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the movable body (second Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening/closing member 11b of the starting opening 11a and the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole (big winning hole 13a) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display device 19a, second special symbol first display 19b, normal symbol first display 19c, first special symbol reservation first display 19d, second special symbol reservation first display 19e, normal symbol reservation first display 19f , high-probability gaming state indicator 19g, time-saving gaming state indicator 19h, round number indicator 19i, right-handed first indicator 19j, state confirmation indicator 19k), image display device 16, and information indicator 113 are non- It is in the state of display (non-operating, extinguished, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation (the setting key switch 58d is turned ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON, the setting confirmation mode is started in the main control board 110, and the progress control of the game is started. It will be in the pre-start state before starting. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 19k, and the above-described setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 58d is turned off) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid please”) is started.

The specific example from the timing T3 to the timing T10 is the same as the specific example from the timing T3 to the timing T10 in the case of initializing the various drive sources after the setting change shown in FIG. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the opening/closing member 11b of the second start port 11a, the big winning port 13a Since various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening/closing member 13b) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (only the game board 4, the board surface (including only the unit) at the time of shipment from the factory or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 4 or only the board unit), the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game. It is possible to easily check the operation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the state confirmation display 19k is excluded. 1 game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special symbol first display 19b, normal symbol first display 19c, first special symbol reservation first display 19d, second special symbol Hold first display 19e, normal symbol hold first display 19f, high probability game state display 19g, time saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j) is hidden (hidden Since it is in the active state, it is possible to avoid imposing an extra processing load on the main control board 110 and to concentrate on confirming the operation of various driving sources.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, the initial operation notification is performed to prompt confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources. Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) ends, the movable body that affects the game result is operated. Since the various drive sources are designed to be initialized, it is not necessary to check the operation of the various drive sources while changing the settings (setting confirmation). becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) is completed and after the operation standby time has passed, the operation of various driving sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is started. As a result, it is possible to provide a time margin from the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) to the confirmation of the operation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, regardless of whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results is after the setting change mode or after the setting confirmation mode, However, since the same initial action notification is performed, the control of the initial action notification can be simplified, and the development cost of the game machine 1 can be reduced (development period shortened, etc.). It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various driving sources for operating the opening/closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the large winning opening LED remains extinguished. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a due to the light from the outside, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various driving sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motions of the movable effect members 17A and 17B that do not affect the result of the game are performed in the playable state, the two types of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed. It becomes possible to go to

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning hole 13a are initially operated, the opening signal is generated even though the big winning hole 13a is open. is not output, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being given an extra processing load, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can be used as a game It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the process.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the game progress control is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine 1 is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether the progress control of the game has been started or not, and to let the user know that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d displaying the current set values during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

Further, according to this embodiment, during the initial operation of various drive sources, the setting values and performance information of the game machine are not displayed on the information display 113. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement arcade, and to accurately judge failures of various drive sources.

In this embodiment, after the game progress control is started, all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting. The lighting confirmation may not be performed after the setting confirmation mode.

(operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 85, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, time saving game Comparing the actions in the auxiliary game action in the state).

The number of times the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d is driven is the same during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state and during the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

One driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation can be performed during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, the total driving time of the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d is shorter during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d.

The total driving time of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d (large winning opening solenoid 13d) is shorter during the initial operation than during the big winning game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of the initial operation of the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d.

At least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is replaced with the number of times of driving and one driving time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. , may be set to the same or nearly the same (similar) value as the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is replaced with the number of times of driving and one driving time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. , may be set to a value smaller than the total driving time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to the number of times of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and one driving time , may be set to the same or nearly the same (similar) value as the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to the number of times of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and one driving time , may be set to a value greater than the total driving time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

In addition, at least one of the number of times of driving the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is set to the number of times of driving during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and one driving time , may be a value smaller than the total driving time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d is driven during the initial operation, one driving time, and the total driving time is changed to one driving time and the total driving time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). may be the same or nearly the same (similar) value as . By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is set to a value greater than the one drive time and the total drive time during the jackpot game operation. good too. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(First modification)
A first modified example of the initial operation of various driving sources will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 86 to 93. FIG. In the first modification, the RWM clearing process continues until the RWM (RAM) clearing switch 58c is operated again, and the driving source initial operation process is performed during the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clearing process. Since it is different from the first embodiment in points, only the points of difference from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
Here, portions that are the same as those of the initial setting process of the main control board of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted, and only different portions and their surroundings will be described.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c, processing for changing (updating) the set value (probability of being determined as a big hit in the big win determination), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, Then, the drive source initial operation process (game program) described above is performed. Details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S24.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c, processing for initializing the control state of the game (initializing the area other than the set value area of the RWM area for game), and the drive source described above An initial operation process (game program) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S26. Details of the RWM clear processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, the process for displaying the set values saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 and the drive source initial operation process described above are performed. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S30.

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing the setting change processing of the main control board 110 .
Here, the same reference numerals are given to the portions that are the same as the setting change processing of the main control board 110 shown in FIG. 78, and the description is omitted, and only the different portions and their surroundings will be described.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S19-12a. Specifically, various drive sources (the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) that are provided in the board unit and that are to be operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are changed to a setting change mode. until the end of the process for initial operation. Details of initial operations of various drive sources in the setting change mode will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S19-13.

In step S19-17a, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources when the setting change mode is terminated by the setting value confirmation operation, and ends the current setting change processing.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110 .

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board performs processing for performing RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means that the image display device 16 displays a clear preparation screen for recognizing that the RWM clear is being prepared, or the voice output device 9 notifies "Please press the RWM clear switch again". It is to output a notification sound over a predetermined period.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) that are provided in the board unit and that are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are prepared for RWM clear. Perform processing for initial operation until the mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and the RWM clear is performed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process proceeds to step S24-2. transfer processing.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 an RWM clear designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized in step S24-6. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for ending the above-described RWM clear preparation notification.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources in response to termination of the RWM clear preparation mode by the RWM clear approval operation, and terminates the current RWM clear processing.

(Main control board setting confirmation processing)
A setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation processing of the main control board 110 .
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the portions that match the setting confirmation processing of the main control board shown in FIG. 87, and the description thereof is omitted, and only the different portions and their surroundings will be described.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S28-4a. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) that are provided in the board unit and that are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are set and confirmed. until the end of the process for initial operation. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting confirmation mode will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S28-5.

In step S28-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a confirmation end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 58d has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process moves to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process moves to step S28-4a.

In step S28-7a, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources when the setting confirmation mode is terminated by the confirmation end operation, and ends the current setting confirmation process.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change)
With reference to FIG. 90, a specific example of initial operation of various driving sources during setting change will be described. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when initializing various drive sources during setting change.
For the explanation given with reference to FIG. 90, each constituent member is given a new reference numeral for convenience of explanation. That is, in the structural members described above and the structural members described with reference to FIG. 90, different reference numerals may be assigned to the same members, and the same reference numerals may be assigned to different members. There is

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the movable body (second Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening/closing member 11b of the starting opening 11a and the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole 13a to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special Design first display 19b, normal design first display 19c, first special design reservation first display 19d, second special design reservation first display 19e, normal design reservation first display 19f, high probability game state Indicator 19g, time-saving game status indicator 19h, round number indicator 19i, right-handed first indicator 19j, status confirmation indicator 19k), image display device 16, and information indicator 113 are non-display (non-operating, off, erased).

At timing T1, when the game machine 1 is powered on and a setting change operation (the setting key switch 58d is turned on and the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is turned on), the main control board 110 enters the setting change mode. It is in the pre-start state before the game is started and the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the state confirmation display 19k, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, a setting change notification is displayed to confirm that the setting is being changed and to confirm the operation of various drive sources (display of the screen during setting change, voice during setting change "Setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the operating time of various driving sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various driving sources is stopped (driving source = OFF), and thereafter various driving is performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of the source are repeated.

At the timing of T10, if the setting value confirmation operation (the setting key switch 58d is turned off) is performed in a state in which the operation time of the various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are activated. As soon as it is finished, the operation of various driving sources is immediately stopped (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources is completed, and the setting value is also displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. finish. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the first game information display device 19 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of normal design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power is turned on. Notification is started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable production members 73a and 73b controlled by the production control board 130 is started, and all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. . It should be noted that the initial action of the movable effect members 73a and 73bC ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during RWM clear preparation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.
In addition, regarding the description given with reference to FIG. 91, each constituent member is given a new reference numeral for convenience of description. That is, in the structural members described above and the structural members described with reference to FIG. 91, different reference numerals may be assigned to the same members, and the same reference numerals may be assigned to different members. There is

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the movable body (second Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening/closing member 11b of the starting opening 11a and the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole 13a to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special Design first display 19b, normal design first display 19c, first special design reservation first display 19d, second special design reservation first display 19e, normal design reservation first display 19f, high probability game state Indicator 19g, time-saving game status indicator 19h, round number indicator 19i, right-handed first indicator 19j, status confirmation indicator 19k), image display device 16, and information indicator 113 are non-display (non-operating, off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation (RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is turned on) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is started in the main control board 110 to progress the game. It is in the pre-start state before control is started.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the RWM clearing is being prepared is displayed on the state confirmation display 19k, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification to prompt confirmation of RWM clear preparation and operation of various drive sources (display of clear preparation screen, notification sound of "Press the RWM clear switch again" and "Confirm the operation of the solenoid Please alternately output the initial operation confirmation voice).

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is turned ON) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that started at the timing of T9 has elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the As soon as the RWM clear preparation notification is completed, the operation of various driving sources is immediately stopped (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources is completed, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. It shifts to a playable state to be played.

At this time, various displays on the first gaming information display device 19 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of normal design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power supply Input notification is started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable production members 17A and 17B controlled by the production control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are fully lit and the lighting confirmation is started. . It should be noted that the initial action of the movable effect members 73a and 73b ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation)
With reference to FIG. 92, a specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation.
For the explanation with reference to FIG. 92, each constituent member is given a new reference numeral for convenience of explanation. That is, in the structural members described above and the structural members described with reference to FIG. 92, different reference numerals may be assigned to the same members, and the same reference numerals may be assigned to different members. There is

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the movable body (second Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening/closing member 11b of the starting opening 11a and the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole 13a to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special Design first display 19b, normal design first display 19c, first special design reservation first display 19d, second special design reservation first display 19e, normal design reservation first display 19f, high probability game state Indicator 19g, time-saving game status indicator 19h, round number indicator 19i, right-handed first indicator 19j, status confirmation indicator 19k), image display device 16, and information indicator 113 are non-display (non-operating, off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation (the setting key switch 58d is turned ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON, the setting confirmation mode is started in the main control board 110, and the progress control of the game is started. It will be in the pre-start state before starting.

At this time, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 19k, and operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of settings and operation confirmation of various drive sources (display of setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "Setting confirmation in progress" and initial operation confirmation voice "Solenoid operation is also Alternate output of "Please confirm") is started. In addition, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. FIG.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (the setting key switch 58d is turned off) is performed before the operating time of the various driving sources that started at the timing of T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated. At the same time, the operation of various driving sources immediately stops (driving source = OFF), the initial operation of various driving sources ends, and the display of the set values on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 also ends. do. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the pre-start state to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the first game information display device 19 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of normal design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power supply restoration Notification is started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable production members 17A to 17C controlled by the production control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are fully lit and the lighting confirmation is started. . It should be noted that the initial action of the movable effect members 73a and 73b ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

Thus, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the opening/closing member 11b of the second start port 11a, the big winning port 13a Since various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening/closing member 13b) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (only the game board 4, the board surface (including only the unit) at the time of shipment from the factory or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 4 or only the board unit), the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game. It is possible to easily check the operation.

In addition, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the state confirmation display 19k except for the state confirmation display 19k 1 game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special symbol first display 19b, normal symbol first display 19c, first special symbol reservation first display 19d, second special symbol Hold first display 19e, normal symbol hold first display 19f, high probability game state display 19g, time saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j) is hidden (hidden Since it is in the active state, it is possible to avoid imposing an extra processing load on the main control board 110 and to concentrate on confirming the operation of various driving sources.

In addition, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, it prompts the user to confirm that the settings are being changed and to check the operation of the various drive sources. (Setting confirmation notification to prompt confirmation of settings and operation confirmation of various drive sources) for the purpose of the game. It is possible to inform the workers (workers, game shop clerks) who check the operation of the machine 1, so that they can appropriately check the operation.

In addition, according to this modification, in the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode), various driving sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated, so that the progress control of the game It is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.) without creating a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the start of the game.

Further, according to this modification, when the pre-start state ends due to the set value confirmation operation (confirmation end operation), the various drive sources are immediately activated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. To avoid the inconvenience of confusion with the operation of various drive sources according to the progress of a game, since the initial actions of various drive sources are not performed in a game-enabled state because the operation is terminated. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motions of the movable effect members 73a and 73b that do not affect the result of the game are performed in the playable state, the two types of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed. It becomes possible to go to

Further, according to the present modification, when the various drive sources for operating the opening/closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a due to the light from the outside, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when the various driving sources for operating the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a are initially operated, the opening signal is displayed even though the big winning opening 13a is open. is not output, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being given an extra processing load, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can be used as a game It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the process.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d displaying the current set values during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and convenience on the amusement arcade side can be ensured.

In addition, in this modified example, in the setting change notification in the setting change mode, the setting changing screen where the characters "setting changing" is displayed is displayed, but in addition to the characters "setting changing" Alternatively, a setting changing screen may be displayed on which characters such as "driving source initial operation" or "please check solenoid operation" prompting visual confirmation of the initial operation of various driving sources are displayed.

(operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 93, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, normal game state auxiliary game operation, Comparing the operations in the auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state).

One driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d is longer during the initial operation than during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation can be performed during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

In addition, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d at the time of the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the driving time of one time at the time of the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. . In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Also, the driving time of the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the driving time of one time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during the initial operation of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d.

In addition, one drive time of the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. . In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the driving time of the second starting port opening/closing solenoid 11d during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time of one time during the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation. Become.

Also, the driving time of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d during the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the driving time of one time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

Further, the driving time of the large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the driving time of the big winning game operation. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d can perform the big winning game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of operation confirmation.

(Second modification)
A second modification of the initial operation of various driving sources will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95. FIG. In addition, in the second modification, the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, the status confirmation display 19k is not provided, and the RWM clear is performed until the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is operated again. Since this differs from the first embodiment in that the process continues, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the second modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. FIG.

The main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and waits for activation of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S16. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S23 assuming that the mode is to be shifted to the RWM clear preparation mode, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S18 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S23 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

The main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S18, and determines whether the checksum is normal in step S19. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S18. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S20, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the RWM clear preparation mode , and the process proceeds to step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, a process for executing power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption is performed.

The main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130 in step S22. As a result, the production control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures, and the processing for displaying a variable image (described later) and a reserved image (described later) on the image display device is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to step S30.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for performing RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means that the image display device 16 displays a clear preparation screen for recognizing that RWM clear preparation is in progress, or from the voice output device 9 "Please press the RWM (RAM) clear switch again." is output for a predetermined period of time.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the RWM clear is performed, and the process proceeds to step S25. If there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process of step S24 is repeated. .

In step S25, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S27. Specifically, a process for initializing various drive sources (the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) provided in the board unit is performed. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S31, permits all interrupts to start control of the progress of the game. , the current initial setting process ends.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after RWM is cleared.
For the explanation with reference to FIG. 95, each constituent member is given a new reference numeral for convenience of explanation. That is, in the structural members described above and the structural members described with reference to FIG. 95, different reference numerals may be assigned to the same members, and the same reference numerals may be assigned to different members. There is

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the movable body (second Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening/closing member 11b of the starting opening 11a and the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole 13a to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special Design first display 19b, normal design first display 19c, first special design reservation first display 19d, second special design reservation first display 19e, normal design reservation first display 19f, high probability game state Display device 19g, time saving game state display device 19h, round number display device 19i, right-handed first display device 19j), image display device 16, and information display device 113 are non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state It has become.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation (RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is turned on) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is started in the main control board 110 to progress the game. It is in the pre-start state before control is started. At this time, the above-described RWM clear preparation notification is started.

At the timing of T2, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned on) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operations of various drive sources are started. At this time, an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check operation of solenoid") for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T6, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start operating for the third time, and at timing T8, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the initial operation notification are completed, and the main control board 110 The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the first game information display device 19 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of normal design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power is turned on. Notification is started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable production members 73a and 73b controlled by the production control board 130 is started, and all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. . It should be noted that the initial action of the movable effect members 73a and 73b ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

Thus, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the opening/closing member 11b of the second start port 11a, the big winning port 13a Since various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening/closing member 13b) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (only the game board 4, the board surface (including only the unit) at the time of shipment from the factory or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 4 or only the board unit), the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game. It is possible to easily check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the first game information display device 19 ( First special symbol first display 19a, second special symbol first display 19b, normal symbol first display 19c, first special symbol reservation first display 19d, second special symbol reservation first display 19e, Normal symbol holding first display 19f, high probability game state display 19g, time saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j) are in a non-display (non-operating) state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing, and to concentrate on confirming the operation of various drive sources.

Further, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. becomes possible.

In addition, according to this modification, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, after the RWM clear preparation mode is finished, various types of movable bodies that affect the game result can be operated. Since the drive source is initially operated, it is possible to perform the operation check appropriately without the complicated operation of checking the operation of various drive sources while performing the RWM clear approval operation.

Further, according to this modification, after the completion of the RWM clear preparation mode and the waiting time for operation, the operation of various driving sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is started. Therefore, it is possible to provide a time margin from the end of the RWM clear approval operation to the confirmation of the operation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various drive sources for operating the opening/closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a due to the light from the outside, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motions of the movable effect members 73a and 73b that do not affect the result of the game are performed in the playable state, the two types of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed. It becomes possible to go to

Further, according to this modification, when the various driving sources for operating the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a are initially operated, the opening signal is displayed even though the big winning opening 13a is open. is not output, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being given an extra processing load, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can be used as a game It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the process.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, auxiliary game operation in the normal game state) of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) provided in the board unit in the second modification , auxiliary game motion in the time-saving game state) is the same as the motion comparison table shown in FIG.

(Third modification)
A third modification of the initial operation of various driving sources will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. FIG. The third modification differs from the first embodiment in that the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, and the RWM clearing process continues until the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is operated again. However, this is the second modification in that the drive source initial operation process is performed during the RWM clear preparation mode.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the third modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts that correspond to the initial setting process of the main control board in the second modified example shown in FIG. 94, and the explanation is omitted, and only the different parts and their surroundings will be explained.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S24. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) that are provided in the board unit and that are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are prepared for RWM clear. Perform processing for initial operation until the mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear approval operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the RWM clear preparation mode is ended and the RWM clear is performed, and the process moves to step S26, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process moves to step S24.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the initial operations of various driving sources, and in step S27, initializes (0 clears) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources during RWM clear preparation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated during RWM clear preparation.
For the explanation with reference to FIG. 97, each constituent member is given a new reference numeral for convenience of explanation. That is, in the structural members described above and the structural members described with reference to FIG. 97, different reference numerals may be assigned to the same members, and the same reference numerals may be assigned to different members. There is

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the movable body (second Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening/closing member 11b of the starting opening 11a and the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole 13a to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special Design first display 19b, normal design first display 19c, first special design reservation first display 19d, second special design reservation first display 19e, normal design reservation first display 19f, high probability game state Display device 19g, time saving game state display device 19h, round number display device 19i, right-handed first display device 19j), image display device 16, and information display device 113 are non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state It has become.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clear operation (RWM (RAM) clear switch 58c is turned on) is performed, the RWM clear preparation mode is started in the main control board 110 to progress the game. It is in the pre-start state before control is started.

At this time, operation (driving source=ON) is started as an initial operation of various driving sources. In addition, RWM clear preparation notification (display of clear preparation screen, "Please press the RWM (RAM) clear switch again" and "solenoid Please check the operation." Alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice) is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. Activation and deactivation of various drive sources are repeated until .

At the timing of T10, when the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed in a state in which the operation time of various driving sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start of the game. Move to enabled state.

At this time, various displays on the first game information display device 19 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of normal design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power is turned on. Notification is started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable production members 73a and 73b controlled by the production control board 130 is started, and all of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d in the information display 113 are fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. . It should be noted that the initial action of the movable effect members 17A to 17C ends after a predetermined period of time has passed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started, the lighting of all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

Thus, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the opening/closing member 11b of the second start port 11a, the big winning port 13a Since various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening/closing member 13b) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (only the game board 4, the board surface (including only the unit) at the time of shipment from the factory or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 4 or only the board unit), the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game. It is possible to easily check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the first game information display device 19 ( First special symbol first display 19a, second special symbol first display 19b, normal symbol first display 19c, first special symbol reservation first display 19d, second special symbol reservation first display 19e, Normal symbol holding first display 19f, high probability game state display 19g, time saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j) are in a non-display (non-operating) state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing, and to concentrate on confirming the operation of various drive sources.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, it is confirmed that the RWM clearing preparation is in progress and the operation of the various drive sources is confirmed. Since the RWM clear preparation notification is provided to prompt the operator, it is possible to inform the operator (worker, game store clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources. It is possible to check the operation appropriately.

Further, according to this modification, in the RWM clear preparation mode, various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated, so the progress control of the game is started. There is no need to create a plurality of states in the previous pre-start state, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when the RWM clear approval operation is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources elapses. As a result, the initial operations of various driving sources are not performed in a game-enabled state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being confused with the operations of various driving sources according to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motions of the movable effect members 73a and 73b that do not affect the result of the game are performed in the playable state, the two types of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed. It becomes possible to go to

Further, according to the present modification, when the various drive sources for operating the opening/closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a due to the light from the outside, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when the various driving sources for operating the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a are initially operated, the opening signal is displayed even though the big winning opening 13a is open. is not output, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being given an extra processing load, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can be used as a game It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the process.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of is started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In this modified example, in the RWM clear preparation notification in the RWM clear preparation mode, a clear preparation screen displaying the characters "RWM clear preparation in progress" is displayed. In addition to the text, you can also display a clear preparation screen that displays the text "Driving source initial operation" or "Please check solenoid operation" to visually confirm the initial operation of various driving sources. good.

In addition, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, auxiliary game operation in the normal game state) of various drive sources (second start opening opening and closing solenoid 11d, big winning opening opening and closing solenoid 13d) provided in the board unit in the third modification , Auxiliary game motion in time-saving game state) is the same as the motion comparison table shown in FIG. 93, so description here is omitted.

(Fourth modification)
The fourth modification will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. The fourth modification differs from the first embodiment in that it does not have a setting change function or a setting confirmation function, and differs from the second modification in that the RWM clear is performed without going through the RWM clear preparation mode. Since there are differences, only the differences from the first embodiment and the second modification will be described here.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing (game program) of the main control board 110 in the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.
Here, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that are the same as the initial setting process of the main control board shown in FIG. 94, and the explanation is omitted, and only the different parts and their surroundings will be explained.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the state of progress of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data in the RWM area for game before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is performed.

The main CPU 110a executes drive source initial operation processing (game program) in step S25. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d), which are provided in the board unit and are operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game, are activated for a predetermined period of time. It performs processing for initial operation. Details of initial operations of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the board 130, and the process moves to step S30. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

(Concrete example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear)
A specific example of initial operation of various drive sources after RWM clear will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after RWM is cleared.
For the explanation with reference to FIG. 99, each constituent member is given a new reference numeral for convenience of explanation. That is, in the constituent members described above and the constituent members explained with reference to FIG. 99, different reference numerals may be assigned to the same members, and the same reference numerals may be assigned to different members. There is

First, at timing T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the movable body (second Various driving sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening/closing member 11b of the starting opening 11a and the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a are stopped.

Also, during the round game, the big winning hole LED that causes the big winning hole 13a to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the first game information display device 19 (first special symbol first display 19a, second special Design first display 19b, normal design first display 19c, first special design reservation first display 19d, second special design reservation first display 19e, normal design reservation first display 19f, high probability game state Display device 19g, time saving game state display device 19h, round number display device 19i, right-handed first display device 19j), image display device 16, and information display device 113 are non-display (non-operating, extinguished, erased) state It has become.

At the timing of T1, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and an RWM clearing operation (RWM (RAM) clearing switch 58c is turned on) is performed, the main control board 110 performs RWM clearing to control the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started. At this time, an initial operation notification (display of screen during initial operation, output of initial operation confirmation voice "Please check operation of solenoid") for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation waiting time (here, 7 seconds) has passed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various driving sources (driving source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T3, various When the operating time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T4, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed since the operation of the various driving sources stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the second time, and at the timing of T5, the various driving sources start to operate. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T6, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has passed after the operation of the various driving sources has stopped, the various driving sources start to operate for the third time, and at the timing of T7, the various driving sources are turned off. When the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T8, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources has stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation are completed. The state shifts to a playable state in which progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays on the first game information display device 19 (display of special design, display of normal design, display of special design reservation number, display of normal design reservation number, etc.) are started, and the above-mentioned power is turned on. Notification is started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable production members 17A and 17B controlled by the production control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment display devices 113a to 113d in the information display device 113 are fully lit and the lighting confirmation is started. . It should be noted that the initial action of the movable effect members 73a and 73b ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

At the timing of T9, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four game sections consisting of the current game section and three past game sections are displayed in order.

Thus, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, the movable bodies (the opening/closing member 11b of the second start port 11a, the big winning port 13a Since various drive sources (second start opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) for operating the opening/closing member 13b) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (only the game board 4, the board surface (including only the unit) at the time of shipment from the factory or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 4 or only the board unit), the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game. It is possible to easily check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result are initially operated (during the pre-start state), the first game information display device 19 ( First special symbol first display 19a, second special symbol first display 19b, normal symbol first display 19c, first special symbol reservation first display 19d, second special symbol reservation first display 19e, Normal symbol holding first display 19f, high probability game state display 19g, time saving game state display 19h, round number display 19i, right-handed first display 19j) are in a non-display (non-operating) state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing, and to concentrate on confirming the operation of various drive sources.

Further, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting confirmation of the operation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the operator (worker, game clerk) who checks the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various driving sources, and to appropriately check the operation. becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, after the RWM clear operation is performed and the operation standby time has passed, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the game result is started. Therefore, it is possible to provide a time margin from the end of the RWM clear operation to the confirmation of the operation of various drive sources, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to the present modification, when the various drive sources for operating the opening/closing member 13b of the large winning opening 13a are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it is difficult to check the operation of the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a due to the light from the outside, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is performed, the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable bodies that affect the game result is performed, and the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial motions of the movable effect members 73a and 73b that do not affect the result of the game are performed in the playable state, the two types of initial motions can be confirmed in order, and the motion confirmation can be properly performed. It becomes possible to go to

Further, according to this modification, when the various driving sources for operating the opening/closing member 13b of the big winning opening 13a are initially operated, the above-described opening is performed even though the big winning opening 13a is open. Since the middle signal is not output, it is possible not to impose an extra processing load on the main control board 110, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display device 113 until the progress control of the game is started after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. is regulated), it is possible to prevent the main control board 110 from being burdened with unnecessary processing.

In addition, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine 1 is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether the progress control of the game has been started or not, and to let the user know that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, assistance in normal game state) of various drive sources (second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 11d, second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 13d) provided in the board unit in the fourth modification Since the operation comparison in the game operation, the auxiliary game operation in the time saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 85, the explanation here is omitted.

In addition, in the first embodiment (including the modification), it is possible to shoot the game ball by transmitting the launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. However, by transmitting a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 when the progress control of the game is started, the game ball may be launched after the game becomes ready for play.

In addition, in the first embodiment (including modifications), the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started. It is possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on a payout request from a ball lending machine installed in parallel, but after the progress control of the game is started and the game is ready to play, the ball lending machine will not be able to play. A game ball may be put out (ball lending) based on a put-out request.

In addition, in the first embodiment (including the modification), backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c). Although there is no unpaid ball number data remaining in the RAM 121c), backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c). If the number of balls to be paid out remains in the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c) when the switch is turned ON, the unpaid ball number data remains in the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c) even in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started. The payout of game balls based on the payout ball number data may be possible.

Also, in the first embodiment (including modifications), the first game information display device 9 is provided outside the game area 4a, but the first game information display device 9 may be provided inside the game area 4a. .

In addition, in the first embodiment (including modifications), prize balls (prize value) are given based on establishment of granting conditions (winning of game balls to winning opening, starting opening, big winning opening) However, it is also possible to manage the player's possession balls as data, and give the winning ball data (addition to the possession ball data).

〔image〕
Next, the image displayed on the image display unit 114 by the effect control unit 130m will be described.
100 to 131, each constituent member is given a new reference numeral for convenience of explanation. That is, in the constituent members described above and the constituent members explained with reference to FIGS. may be
As shown in FIG. 100, an image is displayed on the image display section 114 (first image display device 16) under the control of the effect control section 130m. In the present embodiment, the image displayed on image display section 114 includes decorative design 41 (effect design 16a). The image display unit 114 also displays a moving image 51, a pending image 52, a pending number display 55, a small pattern 56, a stage image 61, a returning image 62, a menu display explanation image 63, a volume image 64, a customer waiting image 65, Initializing image 66, initialization complete image 67, SP reach image 68, SPSP reach image 69, opening image 70, right shot image 71, round in progress image 72, music selection image 73, number of rounds image 74, number of points image 75 , high-precision fanning image 76, high-precision notification image 77, character selection image 79, high-precision start image 80, game continuation instruction image 81, notice image 82, hitting right during return image 83, jackpot notification image 84, game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, a right hitting instruction image 87, a winning eye image 88, and a button operation image 89 may be displayed.
Each of the above images will be described below.

(Decorative pattern 41)
As shown in FIG. 100(1), the decorative pattern 41 is displayed on the image display section 114 . In this embodiment, the decorative pattern 41 is composed of three patterns.
The three patterns forming the decorative pattern 41 are arranged so as to be aligned in the horizontal direction. Incidentally, when the three patterns constituting the decorative pattern 41 are individually described, the pattern arranged on the left side is the "left decorative pattern 41", the pattern arranged in the center is the "middle decorative pattern 41", The pattern arranged on the right side is called a "right decorative pattern 41". When the left decorative pattern 41 and the right decorative pattern 41 are collectively described, they are referred to as "left and right decorative patterns 41". Furthermore, when collectively describing the left decorative design 41, the middle decorative design 41, and the right decorative design 41, they will be referred to as "three decorative designs 41".

The effect control unit 130m, in the variable effect of the decorative pattern 41, variably displays the three decorative patterns 41 by, for example, vertical scrolling, and then temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "2"). Next, the right decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "3") is temporarily stopped, then the middle decorative pattern 41 (for example, the number "1") is temporarily stopped, and finally all the decorative patterns 41 are fixed and stopped. In addition, the combination "213" of the decorative symbols 41 that are stopped and displayed shown in FIG.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative pattern 41, a highly decorative display mode (see FIG. 100 (1)) in which a character image is displayed in addition to characters such as numbers, and a display mode in which numbers and the like are displayed There is also a low-decorative display mode (see FIG. 108 (10)) in which characters are mainly displayed. Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern 41 is switched according to the change of the game state, the progress of the production, or the like. Although the details will be described later, for example, the decorative pattern 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in SP reach production, SPSP reach production, and high probability time-saving gaming state, etc. In other cases such as the low decorative pattern 41 Is displayed.

(Variation image 51)
As shown in FIG. 106(1), the image display section 114 displays a variable image 51 indicating that the special symbol is being varied (the decorative symbol 41 is being displayed in a variable manner). Then, the variable image 51 starts to be displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower central portion of the display area of the image display unit 114) when the special symbol starts to vary, and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears when the fluctuation stops. A variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variation image 51 is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In addition, the variation image 51, for example, by changing the display mode of color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "color etc."), based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process, informs or may suggest.

(Holding image 52)
As shown in FIG. 106(1), the image display unit 114 displays a pending image 52 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the current pending ball. In other words, the pending image 52 is an image indicating that the right to judge the big win is suspended. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending image 52 on the display screen is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.
A holding base is displayed in the area where the holding image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image 52 are displayed in different modes.

In addition, the pending image 52 notifies or suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot by changing the display mode such as the color based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process, for example. Here, the display mode such as the color of the pending image 52 is set so that the type of display mode with a higher degree of expectation in the case where the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination process is a big hit than in the case of a loss. there is For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the reserved image 52, the expectations may be set higher in this order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the suspended image 52 and the variable image 51 are basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the form may differ between the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 or between the plurality of reserved images 52 depending on the content of the effect or the progress of the effect.

In the following description, of the four reserved images 52 displayed at maximum, "first reserved image 52", "second reserved image 52", "third reserved image 52", and "third Reserved image 52" and "fourth reserved image 52".

(hold number display 55)
As shown in FIG. 106(1), the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the pending ball. This pending number display 55 is an image showing the pending number. Here, the number of pending images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of pending prizes for each of the first starting port 10 and the second starting port 11a.

(small pattern 56)
Here, the display position, display size, design, and the like of the decorative pattern 41 may change, for example, as the variable effect progresses. Also, the decorative pattern 41 may be wholly or partly hidden by the movable effect member 115 (movable effect member 17B) that can move with respect to the display screen of the image display unit 114 . In such a case, it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbols originally intended to inform the player that the special symbols are being variably displayed.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying the small pattern 56 on the display screen of the image display unit 114, the player is informed that the special pattern is being variably displayed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by displaying the small pattern 56, the notification of the determination result of the big hit by the decorative pattern 41 and the type of the big winning pattern indicated by the decorative pattern 41 are assisted. .
Incidentally, in the embodiment, the small pattern 56 is displayed on the display screen of the image display section 114 in such a manner that the player can always see it. In other words, the small pattern 56 is not entirely or partially hidden by other images, the movable effect member 115, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 106 ( 1 ), the small pattern 56 is composed of three patterns corresponding to the decorative pattern 41 . The three patterns forming the small pattern 56 are arranged vertically. The small pattern 56 is displayed as an image whose display size is smaller than that of the decorative pattern 41 . Further, as described above, the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or in a low decorative display mode, but the small pattern 56 may be displayed in a low decorative display mode. Only displayed in However, the small pattern 56 may also be displayed in a highly decorative display mode.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 106(1), three patterns forming the small pattern 56 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, but the present invention is not limited to this aspect. For example, three patterns forming the small pattern 56 may be arranged side by side in the horizontal direction.

Also, the number of patterns forming the small pattern 56 does not have to match the number of patterns forming the decorative pattern 41 . For example, when the number of patterns forming the decorative pattern 41 is three (three digits), the number of patterns forming the small pattern 56 may be one (one digit).
Further, the small patterns 56 are not limited to one pair provided in the image display section 114 with three patterns as one pair. For example, two or more pairs of the small patterns 56 may be displayed simultaneously on the image display section 114 .

(Stage image 61)
As shown in FIG. 100(1), the image display section 114 displays a stage image 61 as a background for the decorative pattern 41 and the like. The stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage, etc.) related to the content (idol, anime character, etc.) that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 . In the illustrated example, a space-themed image is displayed as the stage image 61 . The stage image 61 is switched, for example, when a variable effect in one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. Further, the stage image 61 may be switched, for example, when a specific variable effect (for example, a variable effect in which an SPSP ready-to-win effect is performed) is performed.

(Returning image 62)
As shown in FIG. 100(4), the image display section 114 displays a returning image 62 . The recovering image 62 is an image that notifies that the gaming machine 1 is recovering from the power-off state. In the illustrated example, the text "recovering" is displayed as the recovering image 62. FIG. When the gaming machine 1 completes recovery from the power-off state, the recovering image 62 disappears.

(Menu display explanation image 63)
As shown in FIG. 101(7), the image display section 114 displays a menu display explanation image 63 . This menu display explanation image 63 is an image for explaining a method for displaying the menu screen. The menu screen is a screen on which items of effects that can be set by the player are displayed. In the illustrated example, the menu display explanation image 63 displays an image simulating the effect button 161 and the text "Display menu screen with button".

(Volume image 64)
As shown in FIG. 101(7), the volume image 64 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This volume image 64 is an image showing the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156 . In the illustrated example, in the volume image 64, the level of the currently set volume level among a plurality of levels that can be output as the volume level is indicated by a gauge. The volume image 64 also shows an image imitating the speaker 156 . When the player operates the effect key 162, the volume output from the speaker 156 is adjusted, and the volume image 64 shows a gauge of stages corresponding to the adjusted volume.

(Customer waiting image 65)
As shown in FIG. 101(8), a customer waiting image 65 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This customer waiting image 65 is, for example, an image relating to the content (idol, anime character, etc.) that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 . The customer waiting image 65 is displayed when the gaming machine 1 is in a customer waiting state.

(Initializing image 66)
As shown in FIG. 102 ( 4 ), the image display section 114 displays an initialization image 66 . This initialization in progress image 66 is an image that notifies that the restoration from initialization is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "initializing" is displayed as the image 66 during initialization. When the restoration from initialization is completed, the image 66 during initialization disappears.

(Initialization completion image 67)
As shown in FIG. 101(5), the image display section 114 displays an initialization completion image 67 . This initialization completion image 67 is an image for notifying that the restoration from initialization has been completed. In the illustrated example, the text "initialized" is displayed as the initialization completion image 67. FIG.

(SP reach image 68)
As shown in FIG. 108(10), the SP reach image 68 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This SP reach image 68 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 plays a mini game.

(SPSP reach image 69)
As shown in FIG. 108(11), the SPSP reach image 69 is displayed on the image display unit 114 . This SPSP ready-to-reach image 69 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 fight.

(Opening image 70)
As shown in FIG. 108(10), an opening image 70 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This opening image 70 is an image for informing the player of the start of the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "BIG Bonus! Configurations" is displayed as the opening image 70 . The opening image 70 has contents suggesting the type of jackpot (for example, the total number of rounds) and the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished.

(right shot image 71)
As shown in FIG. 108(10), the image display section 114 displays a right-handed shot image 71 . The right hitting image 71 is an image for instructing the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 111 . In the illustrated example, as the right-handed shot image 71, an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "Right-handed" are displayed. The right hitting image 71 is displayed, for example, during execution of a jackpot game or in a time-saving game state.

(Image 72 during the round)
As shown in FIG. 110(11), the image display section 114 displays an in-round image 72 . This in-round image 72 is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 . The in-round image 72 is displayed during a round in the jackpot game.

(Music selection image 73)
As shown in FIG. 110(11), the image display section 114 displays a song selection image 73. FIG. This song selection image 73 is an image for selecting a song to be output from the speaker 156 during the jackpot game being executed. In the illustrated example, “song A” is selected in the song selection image 73 . When the player operates the production key 162 to select a song, the selected song is output from the speaker 156 and the name of the selected song is displayed on the song selection image 73 .

(Round number image 74)
As shown in FIG. 110(11), the image display section 114 displays a round number image 74 . This round number image 74 is an image for notifying the player of the round number of the round currently being executed in the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed as the round number image 74. FIG.

(Point number image 75)
As shown in FIG. 110(11), the image display section 114 displays the point number image 75 . The point number image 75 is an image for notifying the player of the number of prize balls that have been won by the game balls in the big prize winning opening 125 in the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "50pt" is displayed as the point number image 75 .

(High accuracy inciting image 76)
As shown in FIG. 110 ( 12 ), the image display section 114 displays a high-accuracy tilt image 76 . This high-probability agitation image 76 is an image that agitates whether or not the game state of the gaming machine 1 after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability time-saving game state. The high-precision teasing image 76 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 plays a mini game.

(High accuracy notification image 77)
As shown in FIG. 110(13), the image display section 114 displays a high-precision notification image 77 . This high accuracy notification image 77 is an image that suggests or notifies that the game state of the gaming machine 1 after the end of the jackpot game will be a high probability time-saving game state.

(Character selection image 79)
As shown in FIG. 110 ( 16 ), the image display section 114 displays a character selection image 79 . This character selection image 79 is an image for the player to select a character that appears in the effect after the end of the jackpot game. In the character selection image 79, a character corresponding to the operation of the effect key 162 by the player is displayed.

(High accuracy start image 80)
As shown in FIG. 111(17), the image display section 114 displays a high-probability start image 80. As shown in FIG. This high-probability start image 80 is an image that notifies the start of the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the high-probability start image 80 is displayed with the text "Enter Excite Mode!!".

(Game continuation instruction image 81)
As shown in FIG. 111(5), the game continuation instruction image 81 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This game continuation instruction image 81 is an image for instructing the player to continue playing the game. More specifically, the game continuation instruction image 81 is an image for instructing the continuation of the game that the player was playing before the gaming machine 1 was turned off. In the illustrated example, as the game continuation instruction image 81, the text "Please continue the game" is displayed. The game continuation instruction image 81 may be, for example, an image that informs that the game is being played, such as the text "The game is being played."

(Preview image 82)
As shown in FIG. 115 ( 9 ), the preview image 82 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This notice image 82 is an image for notifying that there is a possibility of winning a big win in the variation performance subsequent to the variation being executed. In the illustrated example, the preview image 82 is displayed with the text "A chance in the next change!?" The preview image 82 is displayed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.

(Right shot image 83 during recovery)
As shown in FIG. 118(11), the image display section 114 displays a hitting right image 83 during recovery. This hitting right image 83 during recovery is an image for instructing the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 111 while the gaming machine 1 is recovering from the power-off state. The hitting-right-in-returning image 83 of the present embodiment differs in display form from the hitting-right image 71 (see FIG. 121 (10)). More specifically, the hitting-to-right image 83 during recovery displays a thicker arrow mark than the hitting-to-right image 71 . In addition, the text "Right shot" is displayed in the right shot image 83 during recovery.

(Jackpot notification image 84)
As shown in FIG. 119 ( 3 ), the image display section 114 displays a jackpot notification image 84 . This jackpot notification image 84 is an image that suggests or notifies that a jackpot game is being executed. In the illustrated example, as the jackpot notification image 84, the text "jackpot in progress" is displayed.

(Game start notification image 85)
As shown in FIG. 119(3), the image display section 114 displays a game start notification image 85 . This game start notification image 85 is an image that suggests or notifies that a game is being executed. In the illustrated example, the game start notification image 85 is displayed with the text "The game has started".

(Game execution instruction image 86)
As shown in FIG. 119(3), the image display section 114 displays a game execution instruction image 86 . This game execution instruction image 86 is an image for instructing the player to play a game. In the illustrated example, the game execution instruction image 86 displays the text "Play a game".

(Right shot instruction image 87)
As shown in FIG. 119 ( 3 ), the image display section 114 displays a right-handed instruction image 87 . This right hitting instruction image 87 is an image for instructing the player to shoot the game ball rightward in the game area 4a. In the illustrated example, the text "Please hit right" is displayed as the right hitting instruction image 87. FIG.

(Hit image 88)
As shown in FIG. 110(11), a winning eye image 88 is displayed on the image display section 114 . This winning image 88 is an image showing the numbers of the decorative symbols 41 combined in the variable performance when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In the illustrated example, the number "6" is displayed.

(Button operation image 89)
As shown in FIG. 124(6), the image display section 114 displays a button operation image 89 . By displaying this button operation image 89, the player can recognize that it is time to operate the effect button 6a. In the illustrated example, as the button operation image 89, an image imitating the effect button 6a is displayed.

[Production example]
In this embodiment, various effects are executed. For example, examples of effects include a change effect, a chance display effect, a high-precision fan effect, a high-precision notification effect, a high-precision start notification effect, a next change expectation effect, an operation effect, and a character action effect. Each performance will be described below.

(Change production)
The change effect is, as shown in FIG. 114(2), a effect of changing the display mode of the variable image 51 or the pending image 52. FIG. More specifically, the change effect is a effect of changing the display color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “display color, etc.”) of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 . In this embodiment, by changing the display color or the like of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52, the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is notified or suggested to the player. The change effect can be executed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In the illustrated example, one of "blue", "yellow", "green", "red" and "gold" is selected as the display color. For example, in the order of blue, yellow, green, red, and gold, the final display color of the variation image may be set such that the later the order, the higher the degree of expectation. In the illustrated example, the third pending image 52 is displayed in blue by executing the change effect.

(Chance eye display effect)
The chance eye display effect is an effect of displaying the chance eye as shown in FIG. 114(3). Here, the chance eye is three decorative patterns 41 combined with different patterns of the same color. The chance eye display effect informs or suggests, for example, that there is a high possibility of winning a big hit in the next and subsequent special symbol variable displays. The chance eye display effect is one aspect of the advance notice effect. In the illustrated example, the entirety of the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in blue by the chance eye display effect.

(high-precision provocation)
As shown in FIG. 110 (12), the high-probability inciting effect is an effect inciting whether or not the game state of the gaming machine 1 after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability time-saving game state. In the high-precision fan effect, a high-probability fan image 76 is displayed.

(high-precision notification performance)
High certainty information production, as shown in Figure 110 (13), the game state of the gaming machine 1 after the end of the jackpot game, suggesting or notifying that the high probability time-saving game state. In the high-precision notification effect, a high-precision notification image 77 is displayed.

(High-precision start notification production)
High certainty start information production, as shown in Figure 111 (17), is the production to report the start of the high probability time-saving gaming state. In the high-probability start notification effect, a high-probability start image 80 is displayed.

(Next change expectation production)
The next variation expectation performance is, as shown in FIG. 115(9), a performance that makes the player expect to win a big win in the variation after the variation being executed. This next change expectation effect is an example of the advance notice effect. In the next change expectation effect, a notice image 82 is displayed.

(Operation production)
The operation effect is, as shown in FIG. 124(6), an effect prompting the player to operate the effect button 6a. In the operation effect, a button operation image 89 is displayed.

(Performance of character action)
124(7), the movable effect member 115 moves to the front side of the image display section 114 to cover the whole or part of the image display area of the image display section 114. As shown in FIG. In addition, the movable production member 115 may emit light as a role object action production. In addition, the movable effect member 115 may move to a position different from the front side of the image display section 114 as a role object action effect. In addition, as a role object action effect, the movable effect member 115 may emit light without moving.

By the way, in this embodiment, for example, even if a problem occurs in the display of the decorative pattern 41 or the small pattern 56 on the image display unit 114, the first special pattern shown in FIGS. It is ensured that the player is notified as an effect that the special symbol is fluctuating by the second display 20a and the second special symbol second display 20b. However, if you try to strictly display even the kind of decorative design by the first special design second display device 20a and the second special design second display device 20b, for example, according to the number of types of decorative design, the first special design Prepare variations of lighting patterns of the second indicator 20a and the second special symbol second indicator 20b, and according to the plurality of variations, the second indicator 20a with the first special symbol and the second indicator 20b with the second special symbol need to light up. Then, the load of the lamp control unit 320 that controls the first special symbol second display device 20a and the second special symbol second display device 20b increases, and the load applied to the effect control unit 300 that controls the lamp control unit 320 may become large.
Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special symbol second display device 20a and the second special symbol second display device 20b are not notified of the type of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol fluctuates as a minimum function. I'm trying to let you know what I'm doing.

However, apart from the viewpoint of suppressing the load of the image control described above, for example, the functions of the first special symbol second display device 20a and the second special symbol second display device 20b are displayed on the display screen of the image display unit 114. may That is, the functions of the first special symbol second display 20a and the second special symbol second display 20b may be realized by the display image.

100 and 101 are diagrams showing an example of processing performed by the main control board 110 and the effect control section 130m when the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power-off state.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101, processing performed by the main control board 110 and the effect control section 130m when the game machine 1 recovers from the power-off state will be specifically described. 100 and 101, the processing of the effect control unit 130m is performed by transmitting a command for controlling power-on at the time of restoration from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

(Processing example 1)
First, as shown in FIG. 100(1), when the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the screen of the image display unit 114 displays the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 "213" is fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55 , a small pattern 56 , and a stage image 61 . Also, at this time, both the reserved number display 55 of the first starting port 10 and the reserved number display 55 of the second starting port 11a indicate "0", and the small pattern 56 "213" is confirmed and stopped.

At this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 19a. Also, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is stopped and displayed. At this time, predetermined BGM is being output from the speaker 9 . This BGM is BGM determined according to the type of the stage image 61 .
Moreover, at this time, the left movable production member 115A, the middle movable production member 115B, the right movable production member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 emit white light. Incidentally, the movable production member 115, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 are all regarded as light emitting means capable of emitting light.

When the gaming machine 1 is turned off, no image is displayed on the image display section 114 as shown in FIG. 100(2). More specifically, image display unit 114 is turned off. Moreover, at this time, the special symbol is turned off in the first special symbol first display 221 . Also, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is turned off. At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156 . Moreover, at this time, the left movable production member 115A, the middle movable production member 115B, the right movable production member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 are all turned off.

Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power-off state. That is, in processing example 1, non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100(3), the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 . On the other hand, the first special symbol second display 133 maintains the off state. In addition, the image display unit 114 also maintains the off state. In addition, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. In addition, each of the left movable production member 115A, the middle movable production member 115B, the right movable production member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 maintains the off state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(4), the image display section 114 displays a returning image 62 . Also, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is stopped and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 101(5), the image display section 114 displays "315" which is the decorative pattern 41. FIG. Also, the image display portion 114 displays “315” which is the small pattern 56 . In addition, a pending number display 55 is displayed on the image display section 114 . Further, the image display unit 114 displays a space-themed image as the stage image 61 . That is, the same stage image 61 as immediately before the gaming machine 1 enters the power-off state is displayed. At this time, non-initialization return processing is performed. In the non-initialization return process, each of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 emits blue light. At this time, no effect is produced when the effect button 161 is operated by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(6), non-initialization test operation processing is performed. In the non-initialization test operation process, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C descend so as to cover part of the image display section 114, respectively. Also, in the non-initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 moves from the non-protruding state to the protruding state. The operation of the movable effect member 115 in the non-initialization test operation process is the movable effect device 17 (the first movable effect member 17A, the 2 It is an example of the initial operation of the movable production member 17B). Also, at this time, the initialization return process is continuously performed. At this time, the effect caused by the operation of the effect button 161 by the player is not executed. Also, at this time, the non-initialization return processing is continuously performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (7), the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C rise respectively, and the effect button 161 returns from the projected state to the non-projected state, and the non-projected state. Initialization test operation processing is completed. A menu display explanation image 63 and a volume image 64 are also displayed on the image display unit 114 . Moreover, at this time, the left movable production member 115A, the middle movable production member 115B, the right movable production member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 all emit white light. That is, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 all emit light in such a manner that the gaming machine 1 is turned off. Return to the previous lighting mode. The light emission mode before the game machine 1 enters the power-off state is hereinafter referred to as the normal light emission mode. This normal light emission mode includes a light emission mode when the gaming machine 1 is not in a power-off state. In other words, the normal light emission mode is the light emission mode of the pachinko game machine 1 when resetting and non-initialization resetting are not performed.
Further, the operating mode before the game machine 1 enters the power-off state is hereinafter referred to as a normal operating mode. This normal operation mode includes an operation mode when the gaming machine 1 is not in a power-off state. In other words, the normal operation mode is the operation mode of the gaming machine 1 when the initialization return and non-initialization return are not performed. Here, the normal light emission mode is an example of the normal operation mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 101(8), a customer waiting image 65 is displayed on the image display section 114 . At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. That is, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output after the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

In addition, in the processing example 1, it was explained that the first special symbol second display 133a is stop-displayed while the returning image 62 is being displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first special symbol second display 133 may be stop-displayed after the returning image 62 is displayed. Further, for example, when the returning image 62 is displayed, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 221 . Also, after the returning image 62 is displayed, the special symbol may be stop-displayed on the first special symbol first display 221, and then the first special symbol second display 133 may be stop-displayed. That is, after the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol first display 221, the first special symbol second display 133 may be stop-displayed.

Further, in the processing example 1, regardless of whether or not the player operates the effect button 161, the effect button 161 is operated in the non-initialization test operation process, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the non-initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 may operate when the player operates the effect button 161 .

(Processing example 2)
102 and 103 are diagrams showing an example of processing performed by the main control board 110 and the effect control section 130m when the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power-off state.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103, another specific example (process example 2) of the process performed by the main control board 110 and the effect control section 130m when the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power-off state will be described. .
In addition, in the following description, the points that are different from the processing example 1 will be mainly described, and the description of the points that are the same as the processing example 1 may be omitted. 102 and 103 is performed by transmitting a command for controlling power-on during RAM clearing from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

First, as shown in FIG. 102(1), when the effect control unit 130m ends the variation of the previous special symbol, "213", which is the decorative symbol 41, is confirmed on the screen of the image display unit 114. has been suspended. Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 221 . Also, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 . Moreover, at this time, the left movable production member 115A, the middle movable production member 115B, the right movable production member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 all emit white light.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 102(2). Also, at this time, the special symbol is extinguished in the first special symbol display device 221 . Also, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is turned off. At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156 . Moreover, at this time, the left movable production member 115A, the middle movable production member 115B, the right movable production member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 are all turned off.

Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is ON, the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power-off state. That is, in the processing example 2, initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 102(3), in the first special symbol first display 221, the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 102(4), the image display section 114 displays an image 66 during initialization. Also, at this time, the first special symbol first display 133 is stop-displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 101(5), the image display section 114 displays "753" which is the decorative pattern 41. FIG. In addition, the image display portion 114 displays "753" which is the small pattern 56. FIG. Further, the image display unit 114 displays a space-themed image as the stage image 61 . That is, the same stage image 61 as immediately before the gaming machine 1 enters the power-off state is displayed. At this time, an initialization completion image 67 is displayed on the image display unit 114 . Also, at this time, an initialization notification process is performed. In the initialization notification process, it is notified by voice that the initialization process has been performed. More specifically, in the initialization notification process, a voice "initialized" is output from the speaker 156, and a warning sound is output following this voice. At this time, initialization return processing is performed. In the initialization return process, each of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 emits red light. At this time, the effect caused by the operation of the effect button 161 by the player is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(6), initialization test operation processing is performed. In the initialization test operation process, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C descend so as to cover part of the image display section 114, respectively. In addition, in the initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 moves from the non-protruding state to the protruding state and vibrates. Note that the operation of the movable effect member 115 in the initialization test operation process is the movable effect device 17 (the first movable member 17A, the second movable It is an example of the initial operation of the member 17B). At this time, the initialization notification process is performed again. Also, at this time, the initialization return process is continuously performed. At this time, the effect caused by the operation of the effect button 161 by the player is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (7), the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C rise respectively, and the effect button 161 returns from the projected state to the non-projected state, Initialization test operation processing is completed. At this time, the initialization notification process is performed again. Also, at this time, the initialization return process is continuously performed. At this time, the effect caused by the operation of the effect button 161 by the player is not executed.

Then, when the third initialization notification process is completed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed on the image display section 114 as shown in FIG. 101(8). That is, when sound is no longer output from speaker 156, menu display explanation image 63 and volume image 64 are displayed. Moreover, at this time, the left movable production member 115A, the middle movable production member 115B, the right movable production member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the production button 161 all emit white light. In other words, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 all return to the normal light emission mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 104(9), a customer waiting image 65 is displayed on the image display section 114 . At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. That is, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output from the time the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. In other words, in the speaker 156, when the light emission mode of each of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 changes to the normal light emission mode Since then, the state in which no sound is output is maintained.

In addition, in the processing example 2, regardless of whether or not the player operates the effect button 161, the effect button 161 moves in the initialization test operation process, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 may move when the player operates the effect button 161 .

Further, in the processing example 2, it has been explained that the initialization notification processing is started when the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the initialization notification process may be started while the initialization-in-progress image 66 is being displayed. That is, the initialization notification process may be performed before the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61 are displayed. Then, when the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61 are displayed, the initialization notification process is completed, and the sound may not be output from the speaker 156 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m operates the frame lamp 157 and the like in an operation mode different from that when the non-initialization return is performed when the initialization return is performed. It should be noted that the return from initialization can be regarded as the first return accompanied by the initialization of information stored in the main RAM 110c. A non-initialization return is regarded as a second return without initialization of information stored in the main RAM 110c. Also, the frame lamp 157 is an example of an effect means for executing an effect. Further, each of the board lamp 116, the movable production member 115, and the production button 161 can also be regarded as production means.

In this case, for example, a store clerk at a hall in which the gaming machine 1 is installed confirms the operation mode when the gaming machine 1 is restored from the power-off state, and determines which of the initialization restoration and the non-initialization restoration is performed. can recognize what has been done. Therefore, for example, when the game machine 1 is turned on while the RAM clear switch 58c is turned off, the hall clerk checks the operating mode of the game machine 1 for the purpose of resetting. can recognize that the initialization return is not performed, and the initialization return can be performed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the game machine 1 from continuing to be reset to non-initialization despite the intention of the hall clerk to restore to initialization.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 130m operates the effect button 161 and the movable effect member 115 in a special operation mode different from that in the non-initialization return when the initialization return is performed. When the effect control unit 130m changes the operation mode of the effect button 161 from the special operation mode to the normal operation mode, the operation mode of the movable effect member 115 is also changed from the special operation mode to the normal operation mode. Incidentally, the special operation mode is the operation mode of the effect button 161 and the movable effect member 115 when resetting is performed. Also, the effect button is regarded as an operating means that can be operated by the player.

In this case, when the operation mode of one of the effect button 161 and the movable effect member 115 changes to the normal operation mode, the operation mode of the effect button 161 and the movable effect member 115 does not change compared to the case where the other operation mode does not change. Since the change is conspicuous, the change in the actuation mode of the effect button 161 and the movable effect member 115 is easily recognized. Therefore, it becomes easy to confirm the operation of the effect button 161 and the movable effect member 115 when the game machine 1 returns from the power-off state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when resetting is performed, at least part of the frame lamp 157 and at least part of the board lamp 116 emit light in a special light emission mode different from that when non-initialization reset is performed, When the lighting mode of at least part of the frame lamp 157 changes from the special lighting mode to the normal lighting mode, the lighting mode of at least part of the board lamp 116 also changes from the special lighting mode to the normal lighting mode.

In this case, when the light emission mode of one of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 changes to the normal light emission mode, the change in the light emission mode of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 is less than when the light emission mode of the other does not change. The conspicuous part makes it easier to recognize the change in the light emission mode of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 . Therefore, when the game machine 1 recovers from the power-off state, it becomes easy to confirm the light emission of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m moves at least one movable effect member 115 out of the plurality of movable effect members 115 in the same manner when the initialization return is performed and when the non-initialization return is performed. At least one movable performance member 115 among a plurality of movable performance members 115 is operated in different modes depending on whether initialization return is performed or non-initialization return. In addition, each of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C is regarded as a movable part. Further, in a broad sense, the production button 161 can also be regarded as a movable part.

In this case, the movable effect member 115 can be caused to perform a test operation necessary for returning the game machine 1 from the power-off state, regardless of whether the initialization return or the non-initialization return is performed. On the other hand, for example, the store clerk of the hall where the gaming machine 1 is installed can recognize which of the initialization return and the non-initialization return has been performed by confirming the operation mode of the movable effect member 115 .

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 are synchronized with each other in the timing at which the light emission mode changes to the normal light emission mode during the initialization return process. ing.
In this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the lighting mode of each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable production member 115, and the production button 161 has changed to the normal lighting mode.

In this embodiment, the stage image 61 (see FIG. 101(5)) displayed when non-initialization return is performed and the stage image 61 displayed when initialization return is performed (FIG. 101 (5)) is the same. On the other hand, the initialization image 66 is displayed when the initialization return is performed, but this initialization image 66 is not displayed when the non-initialization return is performed. That is, when resetting is performed, an image that is not displayed when resetting is not performed is displayed after the game machine 1 is turned off until the stage image 61 is displayed.
In this case, the store clerk in the hall can recognize which of the initialization return and the non-initialization return has been performed by checking the display contents of the image display unit 114 .

Note that even when resetting is performed, the resetting image 62 may be displayed instead of the resetting image 66 before the stage image 61 is displayed. In this case, in addition to the returning image 62, an image suggesting or notifying that the initialization process is being performed may be displayed. Further, the display contents on the image display unit 114 until the stage image 61 is displayed may be the same between the case where the initialization return is performed and the case where the non-initialization return is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable production member 115, and the production button 161 is changed to the normal lighting mode at the timing when a specific image is displayed. Here, the specific image includes, for example, the menu display explanation image 63, the volume image 64, and the like.
In this case, even if a specific image is displayed, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning because the light emission mode of each light emission means does not become the normal light emission mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, a sound that is not output when resetting is performed or when non-initialization is performed is output.
In this case, the hall clerk hears the sound output from the speaker 156 and can recognize which of the reset to initialization and the reset to non-initialization has been performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound output when resetting is performed, that is, the sound output in the initialization notification process is a specific image such as the menu display explanation image 63 or the volume image 64. It will not be output at the timing of
In this case, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning by continuing to output the sound generated in the initialization notification process even after the specific image is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lighting mode of each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 is changed to the normal lighting mode at the timing when the sound generated in the initialization notification process stops being output. are changing.
In this case, it is possible to prevent misrecognition that the game machine 1 is abnormal because the light emission mode of each light emission means does not return to the normal light emission mode even when the sound generated in the initialization notification process is no longer output.

In this embodiment, each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 has a light emission mode different from the normal light emission mode during non-initialization return processing. , but not limited to. The light-emitting mode of each light-emitting device during the non-initialization return process may be the normal light-emitting mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 emits light in a color different from that in the non-initialization return process. but not limited to.
For example, the manner of blinking of light in each light-emitting device during the resetting process may be different from the manner of blinking of light during the non-initialization resetting process. In other words, the light emission mode during the initialization return process in each light emitting means may be made different from the light emission mode during the non-initialization return process.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable production member 115, and the production button 161 have the same light emission mode in the initialization return process, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the initialization return process, at least two of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 may have the same light emission mode, or may have different light emission modes. may

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 each have a light emission mode during the initialization return process that differs from the light emission mode during the non-initialization return process. but not limited to.
For example, for at least one of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161, the light emission mode during the initialization return process is made different from the light emission mode during the non-initialization return process. may In this case, any one of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 is made to have the same light emission mode during the initialization return process as that during the non-initialization return process. can be

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 are synchronized with each other in timing of changing from the light emission mode at the time of resetting to the normal light emission mode. is not limited to
For example, any two of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 change the timing from the light emission mode at the time of the initialization return process to the normal light emission mode, and the other two The timing may be different from the timing of changing from the light emission mode during processing to the normal light emission mode. Further, for example, any one of the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 changes the timing from the light emission mode during the initialization return process to the normal light emission mode, and the other one changes the timing during the initialization return process. may be different from the timing of changing from the light emission mode to the normal light emission mode. Further, among the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161, the targets for synchronizing the timing of changing from the light emission mode during the initialization notification process to the normal light emission mode may be any combination. good.

Further, for example, when the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a different light emission mode during the initialization return process than in the non-initialization return process, the parts that emit light in the different light emission mode are the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp. 116 may not be the whole. That is, during the initialization return process, part of the frame lamp 157 and part of the board lamp 116 emit light in a different light emission mode from that during the non-initialization return process, and the other part of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light. may emit light in the same manner as during non-initialization return processing. In this case, the portion of the frame lamp 157 that emits light in a different light emission mode during the initialization return processing than during the non-initialization return processing can be regarded as the first light emitting portion. Further, the portion of the board lamp 116 that emits light in a different light emission mode during the initialization return processing than during the non-initialization return processing can be regarded as a second light emitting portion. Further, the timing at which the light emission mode of the first light emitting section changes from the light emission mode during the resetting process to the normal light emission mode is set to the timing at which the light emission mode of the second light emitting section changes from the light emission mode during the resetting process to the normal light emission mode. It may be synchronized with the timing.
Further, for example, when synchronizing the timing at which the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 change from the light emission mode during the resetting process to the normal light emission mode with each other, the part where the timing of the change in the light emission mode is synchronized is the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 . It does not have to be the entire lamp 116 , but at least a part of the frame lamp 157 and at least a part of the board lamp 116 . That is, when synchronizing the timing at which any two or more of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 change from the light emission mode during initialization return processing to the normal light emission mode, At least a part of each light emitting device may be the part where the timing of changing the light emitting mode is synchronized.

Also, in the present embodiment, the three movable effect members 115 move in the same manner in the initialization test operation process and the non-initialization test operation process, but the invention is not limited to this.
For example, one or two of the three movable effect members 115 may move differently in the initialization test operation process and the non-initialization test operation process.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, each of the three movable effect members 115 has a different light emission mode between the initialization return process and the non-initialization return process, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, one or two movable effect members 115 out of the three movable effect members 115 may have the same light emission mode in the initialization return process and the non-initialization return process. That is, at least one movable effect member 115 out of the three movable effect members 115 should have a different light emission mode between the initialization return process and the non-initialization return process.

(Period until customer waiting image 65 is displayed)
Next, a period from when the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved to when the customer waiting image 65 is displayed will be described.
FIG. 105 shows a period from when the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is canceled in the processing example 1 until the customer waiting image 65 is displayed, and after the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is canceled in the processing example 2. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period until a customer waiting image 65 is displayed;

As shown in FIG. 105(A), in processing example 1, when the game machine 1 is supplied with power in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved, the returning image 62 (see FIG. 100(4)) is displayed. be done. After that, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, and the non-initialization return process is started. Further, when the time T1 has passed since the decorative pattern 41 was displayed, the non-initialization test operation process is started. Further, the non-initialization test operation processing is completed when the time T2 has passed since the non-initialization test operation processing was started. Further, when the time T3 has elapsed after the completion of the non-initialization test operation process, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. Also, at this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 changes to the normal light emitting mode. Further, when the time T4 has passed since the menu display explanation image 63 was displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed.

That is, when the non-initialization return is performed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed when "time T1+time T2+time T3" has passed since the decorative pattern 41 was displayed. Further, when "time T1+time T2+time T3+time T4" has passed since the decorative pattern 41 was displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105(B), in the process example 2, when the game machine 1 is supplied with power in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved, an initialization image 66 (see FIG. 102(4)) is displayed. ) is displayed. After that, the decorative pattern 41 is displayed and the initialization return process is started. Also, at this time, the first initialization notification process is performed. Further, when the time T5 has passed since the decorative pattern 41 was displayed, the initialization test operation process is started. This time T5 is equal to time T1 (see FIG. 105(A)). Further, when the time T6 has passed since the first initialization notification process was performed, the second initialization notification process is performed. Further, the initialization test operation process is completed when the time T7 has passed since the initialization test operation process was started. This time T7 is equal to time T2. Further, when the time T8 has passed since the second initialization notification process was performed, the third initialization notification process is performed. This time T8 is equal to time T6. Further, when the time T9 has passed since the third initialization notification process was performed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. Also, at this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 changes to the normal light emitting mode. Furthermore, when the time T10 has passed since the menu display explanation image 63 was displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed. Here, time T9 is equal to time T3. Also, time T10 is equal to time T4.

That is, when resetting is performed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed when "time T6+time T8+time T9" has passed since the decorative pattern 41 was displayed. Further, when "time T6+time T8+time T9+time T10" has passed since the decorative pattern 41 was displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed. Here, in the processing example 2, the time from the display of the decorative pattern 41 to the display of the menu display explanation image 63 is longer than that in the processing example 1, because the initialization notification process is performed. Further, in processing example 2, the time from the display of the decorative pattern 41 to the display of the customer waiting image 65 is longer than in the processing example 1, because the initialization notification process is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the image display unit 114 displays the first image when the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power-off state, and then displays the second image different from the first image. Then, the time from the display of the first image to the display of the second image differs between the case where the initialization return is performed and the case where the non-initialization return is performed. The first image includes, for example, the decorative pattern 41, the pending number display 55, the small pattern 56, the stage image 61, and the like. Further, examples of the second image include a menu display explanation image 63, a sound volume image 64, a customer waiting image 65, and the like.
In this case, for example, the hall clerk recognizes which of the reset to initialization and the reset to non-initialization has been performed by confirming the time from when the first image is displayed to when the second image is displayed. can do.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the initialization return is performed, compared to the case where the non-initialization return is performed, the second image is displayed after the first image is displayed by the amount of the initialization notification processing performed. It takes a long time until is displayed.
In this case, for example, by displaying the second image during the initialization notification process, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from forgetting to check the initialization notification process by paying attention to the second image.

In the present embodiment, when non-initialization return is performed, the state in which no sound is output is maintained after the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when a non-initialization return is performed, a sound may be output to suggest or notify that the gaming machine 1 has returned from the power-off state. The sound output in this case may be made different from the sound output in the initialization notification process. Also, in this case, in the initialization notification process, the period for notifying that the initialization process has been performed suggests or notifies that the game machine 1 has recovered from the power-off state when the non-initialization return is performed. You may make it longer than a period. Here, in the initialization notification process, the notification period that the initialization process has been performed is longer than the period for suggesting or notifying that the gaming machine 1 has recovered from the power-off state when the non-initialization return is performed. Lengthening includes neither the suggestion nor the notification that the gaming machine 1 has recovered from the power-off state when the non-initialization recovery is performed. In addition, the number of times of notification that the initialization process has been performed in the initialization notification process is greater than the number of times of suggesting or notifying that the gaming machine 1 has recovered from the power-off state when non-initialization return is performed. You may make it

Further, in the present embodiment, when the non-initialization return is performed, the non-initialization return processing is performed when the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the non-initialization return is performed, the non-initialization return processing may be performed before the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed. Further, in this case, when the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable production member 115, and the production button 161 may be changed to the normal light emission mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the initialization return is performed, the initialization return processing is performed when the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when resetting is performed, the resetting process may be performed before the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed. Further, in this case, when the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable production member 115, and the production button 161 may be changed to the normal light emission mode.
Further, for example, before the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 are displayed, the initialization return process is performed at the start of the initialization notification process or after the start, and after the initialization notification process is completed, the frame lamp 157, The light emission modes of the board lamp 116, the movable effect member 115, and the effect button 161 may be changed to the normal light emission mode. Further, the stage image 61 and the decorative pattern 41 may be displayed when the light emitting mode of each light emitting means changes to the normal light emitting mode. That is, the timing at which the light emitting mode of each light emitting means changes to the normal light emitting mode and the timing at which the decorative pattern 41 is displayed may be delayed by the time the initialization notification process is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the customer waiting image 65 is displayed after a predetermined time has passed since the menu display explanation image 63 and the sound volume image 64 are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when a predetermined time has passed since the menu display explanation image 63 or the volume image 64 were displayed, a power saving image is displayed to suggest or notify that the game machine 1 is in a power saving mode for reducing power consumption. good too. In this case, the power saving image is captured as the second image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 performed by the effect control unit 130m using the image display unit 114 and the like will be specifically described.
In addition, in the following description, points different from the above processing examples will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the processing examples may be omitted.

(Variation production example 1)
First, as shown in FIG. 106(1), the decoration design 41 is confirmed and stopped on the screen of the image display section 114 by the effect control section 130m when the variation of the previous special design is completed. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays the variation image 51 and the pending image 52 in white. Also, at this time, a pending number display 55 and a small pattern 56 are displayed. Further, the reservation number display 55 of the first start port 10 indicates "4", and the reservation number display 55 of the second start port 11a indicates "0". Also, at this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 106(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. In the present embodiment, the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, and the right decorative pattern 41 are each displayed in a variable manner by sequentially displaying numbers "1" to "9". That is, in this embodiment, the numbers of the left decorative design 41, the middle decorative design 41, and the right decorative design 41 are individually changeable. The left decorative design 41, the middle decorative design 41, and the right decorative design 41 may display characters other than numbers, such as English letters. Thus, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the second, third, and fourth pending images 52 move toward the display position of the variable image 51 . Also, at this time, the first pending image 52 moves to the display position of the moving image 51 . In the drawing, when the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are shown to be fluctuating (scrolling) at a particularly high speed, the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are indicated by arrows (↓) for easy understanding. . Also, the number-of-holds display 55 of the first starting port 10 shows "3". At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .
In the example shown in FIG. 106, the left decorative pattern 41, the middle decorative pattern 41, and the right decorative pattern 41 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and are moved vertically (scroll) when displayed in a variable manner. However, it is not limited to this aspect. For example, as for the decorative design 41, the left decorative design 41, the middle decorative design 41, and the right decorative design 41 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and each of them may move (scroll) in the horizontal direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 106(3), the left decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation after being scrolled at a low speed. More specifically, the number "4", which is the left decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped. In addition, when representing that the decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using a display similar to a double quotation mark around the decorative pattern 41 in order to make it easy to understand. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(4), the right decorative pattern 41 is scrolled at a low speed, and then temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "1", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(5), the middle decorative pattern 41 is scrolled at a low speed, and then temporarily stopped at the fixed stop position until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "2", which is the middle decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, as shown in FIG. 106(6), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. The combination "421" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “421” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 106(7), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

It should be noted that, in the variation effect example 1, it has been described that the BGM is continuously output from the speaker 156 over the variation of a plurality of special symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the BGM output from the speaker 156 may be interrupted at the timing when the decorative pattern 41 is determined and stopped (see FIGS. 106(1) and 106(6)).

(Variation production example 2)
FIG. 107 and FIG. 108 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 130m using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG.
In addition, in the following description, differences from each of the processing examples and example 1 of variation presentation will be mainly described, and description of points that are the same as example 1 of processing and example 1 of variation presentation will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 107(1), the effect control section 130m stops the decorative design 41 in the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 107(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, a change effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the third pending image 52 is displayed in blue by executing the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(3), when the numbers "351", which are the three decorative symbols 41, are fixed and stopped, a chance display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the entirety of the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in blue by the chance eye display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(4), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of variation of the next special design.
Next, as shown in FIG. 107(5), when the numbers "572", which are the three decorative symbols 41, are fixed and stopped, a chance eye display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the entirety of the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in green by the chance eye display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(6), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of variation of the next special design.
Next, as shown in FIG. 107(7), when the numbers "713", which are the three decorative symbols 41, are fixed and stopped, a chance eye display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the entirety of the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in red by the chance eye display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(8), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of variation of the next special design. Also, at this time, a change effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the variation image 51 is displayed in red due to the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(9), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4", which is the left decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped, the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 108(10), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed. During execution of the SP reach effect, an SP reach image 68 is displayed. Further, when the SP ready-to-win effect is executed, the left and right decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a small display mode and a low decorative display mode. In the illustrated example, the left decorative design 41 is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display section 114 , and the right decorative design 41 is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display section 114 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(11), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed. An SPSP ready-to-win image 69 is displayed during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 108(12), the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the number "5". At this time, the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped in a less decorative display mode and in a larger display mode than the left and right decorative patterns 41 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(13), three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped.
Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 108 (14), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. The combination “454” of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “454” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .

(Variation production example 3)
FIGS. 109 to 111 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 130m using the image display section 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111. FIG.
In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above processing examples and effects will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 109(1), the decorative design 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 by the effect control section 130m as the variation of the previous special design is completed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 109(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(3), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "6", which is the left decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped, the number "6", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109(4), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109(5), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(6), the three decorative designs 41 are temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a combination of "666" to inform the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. Also, at this time, the display size of the decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display mode during execution of the SPSP ready-to-win effect. Also, at this time, the display size of the middle decorative pattern 41 is larger than the display size of the left and right decorative patterns 41 . In addition, the small pattern 56 maintains the state in which three patterns are variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(7), the display sizes of the three decorative patterns 41 are reduced and temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, the three decorative designs 41 are all displayed in the same display size.
Next, as shown in FIG. 109(8), the three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode.

Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 41 is stopped as shown in FIG. 110(9). The combination "666" of the numbers of this decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot. Also, “666” is displayed as the small pattern 56 . In other words, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "666". Moreover, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(10), an opening image 70 is displayed on the image display section 114 . A right-handed image 71 is also displayed on the image display section 114 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the opening image 70 is output from the speaker 156 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (11), when the jackpot game is started, the image display section 114 displays a rounding image 72, a song selection image 73, a round number image 74, and a point number image 75. , and a winning eye image 88 are displayed. In the in-round image 72, the character, which is the theme of the gaming machine 1, has its right hand lowered. In the round number image 74, the text "Round 1" is displayed. Also, in the point number image 75, the text "50pt" is displayed. Also, in the winning eye image 88, the number "6" is displayed. At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (12), the high-precision fan effect is started. In the high-precision fan effect, a high-probability fan image 76 is displayed. At this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "150pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (13), a high accuracy notification effect is performed. In the high-precision notification effect, a high-precision notification image 77 is displayed. At this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "200pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(14), the image display section 114 displays the in-round image 72 again. In this in-round image 72, the character is raising his right hand. That is, as the jackpot game progresses, the display content of the moving image in the in-round image 72 changes from the display content (see FIG. 110 (11)) before execution of the high-precision fan effect. At this time, the text "Round 3" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "300pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(15), in the in-round image 72, a character different from the character in the in-round image 72 displayed during "Round 3" (see FIG. 110(14)) is displayed on the right hand. is lowered. That is, as the jackpot game progresses, the display contents of the in-round image 72 are further changed. At this time, the text "Round 7" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "610pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(16), a character selection image 79 is displayed. At this time, the text "Round 8" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "720pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .
Then, when the jackpot game ends, a high probability start image 80 is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (17). At this time, BGM corresponding to the high-accuracy start image 80 is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 111 (18), the decorative pattern 41 ("666") with low decorativeness is confirmed and stopped in the image display section 114. FIG. The decorative pattern 41 displayed at this time corresponds to the row of numbers finally fixed and stopped before the big win game is executed, that is, when the big win is won. And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of numbers "666" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁Also, at this time, from the speaker 156, BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state is output.

Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 11a, as shown in FIG. 111 (19), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design. Also, at this time, the variable pedestal is displayed in a display mode different from the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state (for example, see FIG. 109 (1)). Also, at this time, from the speaker 156, BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state is output.

In the variable effect example 3, it has been described that the sound is not output from the speaker 156 when the number "666", which is the decorative pattern 41, is fixed and stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. BGM may be output from the speaker 156 even when the number "666", which is the decorative pattern 41, is fixed and stopped.

In addition, in the variation effect example 3, the three decorative patterns 41 with low decorativeness are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 109 (7)), and then the decorative patterns 41 with high decorativeness are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. .
For example, after the three decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are temporarily stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are fixedly stopped, and then the jackpot game may be performed. That is, it is not necessary to use the highly decorative decorative design 41 to inform that the lottery result of the special design lottery is a jackpot.

In addition, in the variable effect example 3, the BGM corresponding to the big winning game continues to flow from the speaker 156 during the round of the big winning game, but when one piece of music as the BGM is played during the round, this music is played again from the beginning. You can let it flow.

(Variation production example 4)
FIG. 112 and FIG. 111 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 130m using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 111. FIG.
Also, in the following description, differences from the above-described processes and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processes and effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(1), when the effect control section 130m ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the image display section 114 confirms and stops the decorative symbol 41 "213". ing. Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 221 . Also, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, in the first special symbol reservation first display 218, the number of reservations is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "4", which is the number of reservations in the first special symbol first display 221. . Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation first display 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "4", which is the number of reservations for winning a prize to the first start port 121. Also, at this time, the light emitting unit 137 is turned off. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 112(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, three pending images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 10 indicates "3". Also, at this time, the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 221 . Also, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is variably displayed. Also, at this time, in the first special symbol reservation first display 218, the number of reservations is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of reservations in the first special symbol first display 221. Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation first display 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of reservations for winning a prize to the first start port 10. Also, at this time, the light emitting unit 137 emits white light. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(3), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4", which is the left decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped, the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state.

Then, when the game machine 1 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 112(4). Moreover, at this time, the special symbol is turned off in the first special symbol first display 221 . Also, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133, the first special symbol reservation first display 218, and the second special symbol second display 135 are extinguished. Also, at this time, the light emitting unit 137 is turned off. At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156 .

Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 4, non-initialization return is performed. In this case, a command for controlling power-on at the time of recovery is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control section 130m. As a result, as shown in FIG. 111(5), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display section 114 . Also, at this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol first display device 221 . Also, at this time, in the first special symbol reservation first display 218, the number of reservations is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of reservations in the first special symbol first display 221. On the other hand, the first special symbol second display device 133 and the first special symbol reservation second display device 135 maintain the extinguished state. In addition, the light-emitting unit 137 maintains the extinguished state. In addition, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(6), the first special symbol second display 133 is displayed in a variable manner. Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation second display 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of reservations for winning a prize to the first start port 10. FIG. In addition, the light-emitting unit 137 maintains the extinguished state. In addition, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. After this, until the special symbols stop fluctuating, the image display unit 114, the first special symbol first display 221, the first special symbol reservation first display 218, the first special symbol second display 133, the first special Each of the second symbol holding display 135, the light emitting unit 137, and the speaker 156 maintains these states.

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, as shown in FIG. 111(7), the numbers "315", which are the three decorative symbols 41 with high decorativeness, are fixed and stopped. In addition, the small symbols 56 stop along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “315” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, three pending images 52 are displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 10 indicates "3". Also, at this time, the variation image 51 is not displayed on the image display unit 114 . Also, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 221 . Also, the first special symbol second display 133 is stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, in the first special symbol reservation first display 218, the number of reservations is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of reservations in the first special symbol first display 221. Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation second display 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of reservations for winning a prize to the first start port 10. FIG. In addition, the light-emitting unit 137 maintains the extinguished state. In addition, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 111(8), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, the second and third pending images 52 move toward the display position of the moving image 51 . Also, at this time, the first reserved image 52 is moved to the display position of the variable image 51, so that the variable image 51 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 10 indicates "2". Also, at this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol first display device 221 . Also, at this time, the first special symbol second display 133 is variably displayed. Also, at this time, in the first special symbol reservation first display 218, the number of reservations is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "2", which is the number of reservations in the first special symbol first display 221. Also, at this time, the first special symbol reservation second display 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "2", which is the number of reservations for winning a prize to the first start port 10. Also, at this time, the light emitting unit 137 emits white light. Also, at this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first return is performed and when the second return is performed, the display content on the image display unit 114 from the return until the predetermined image is displayed on the image display unit 114 is different. Here, the first restoration is, for example, initialization restoration. Also, the second return is, for example, a non-initialization return when suspension is stored in the main RAM 110c. Further, the predetermined image includes, for example, the decorative pattern 41, the pending number display 55, the small pattern 56, the stage image 61, and the like.
In this case, before the predetermined image is displayed, it is recognized which of the return to initialization and the return to non-initialization when the suspension has occurred has been performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the return from the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is the first return, which is the return when the hold is not stored in the main RAM 110c, and the return when the hold is stored in the main RAM 110c. There is a second return which is a return. The display contents on image display section 114 from the time of restoration until the predetermined image is displayed on image display section 114 are different between when the first restoration is performed and when the second restoration is performed.

In this case, for example, when the power is turned off during a game by the player and the power is turned off after that, the player confirms the display contents on the image display unit 114 until the predetermined image is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to recognize whether or not a hold has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that a hold has not occurred even though a hold has occurred.

Incidentally, for example, when the variable effect is being executed and there is no suspension, when the gaming machine 1 is powered off and then the power off state is canceled, in addition to the returning image 62, An image consisting of text such as "No hold has occurred" may be displayed. That is, when the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is canceled while the variable performance is being executed and the suspension is not occurring, when the variable performance is not being executed and the suspension is not occurring The image display unit 114 different from the case where the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is canceled and the case where the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is canceled while the variable effect is being executed and the suspension is occurring It may be a display content.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power-off state while the hold is stored in the main RAM 110c, the effect control unit 130m stores the hold stored in the main RAM 110c in the power-off state. After the number of pending images 52 corresponding to the number of is displayed on the image display unit 114, the number of pending images 52 is reduced as the displayed pending images 52 are moved and displayed.

In this case, the number of pending images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 after the power-off state is canceled matches the number of pending images that the player has recognized as the number of pending items immediately before the power-off state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity about the number of pending games when restarting the game after the power-off state is resolved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m displays the decoration pattern 41 on the image display unit 114 when the gaming machine 1 recovers from the power-off state while the hold is stored in the main control board 110. Instead of displaying the variable image 51, the pending image 52 is displayed according to the signal transmitted from the main control board 110, and the variable image 51 is displayed as the displayed pending image 52 is moved. The main control board 110 can be regarded as main control means for controlling the progress of the game. Also, the effect control unit 130m can be regarded as a sub-control means for controlling the effect. Also, the variable image 51 can be regarded as an execution image suggesting the content of the information regarding the determination related to the variable display being executed.
In this case, after the power-off state is resolved, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity about the number of reservations, and to make it easier to understand the timing of the start of the next fluctuation. It is possible to suppress feeling uncomfortable about the state.

In addition, in the variation effect example 4, when the non-initialization return is performed and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, the light emitting unit 137 is turned off (see FIG. 111 (7)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the light emitting part 137 may blink when the non-initialization return is performed and the decorative pattern 41 is displayed. That is, it is sufficient that the light emission mode of the light emitting section 137 is different between immediately before the gaming machine 1 enters the power-off state and when the non-initialization return is performed.

Further, in the variable effect example 4, it has been described that the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed when the non-initialization return is performed after the gaming machine 1 is turned off. It is not limited to this.
For example, when the menu display explanation image 63 is displayed, when the variable effect is being performed, when the jackpot game is being performed, when the customer waiting effect is being performed, the power supply at the time of restoration A command for controlling the insertion may be transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control section 130m. In this case, the effect control section 130m may restrict the display of the image being displayed on the image display section 114 and cause the returning image 62 to be displayed.

(Variation production example 5)
FIGS. 114 to 116 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control section 130m using the image display section 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 5) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG.
In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above processing examples and effects will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 114(1), the decorative design 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 by the effect control section 130m when the variation of the previous special design is completed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 114(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, a change effect is executed. More specifically, the third pending image 52 is displayed in blue by executing the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(3), the number "351" which is the three decorative patterns 41 is determined and stopped. At this time, a chance eye display effect is executed. More specifically, the three decorative patterns 41 as a whole are displayed in blue by executing the chance eye display effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 114(4), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of variation of the next special design.

Then, when the game machine 1 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 114(5).
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 5, non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 114(6), the image display section 114 displays the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81. FIG.

Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 114(7), the number "315" which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 is fixed and stopped. At this time, the chance eye display effect is not executed. Also, at this time, two pending images 52 are displayed. Here, the second pending image 52, that is, the pending image 52 displayed in blue immediately before the gaming machine 1 was turned off (see FIG. 107(4)) is displayed in white. Also, at this time, the variation image 51 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(8), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of variation of the next special design.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115(9), the next variation expectation effect is performed. In the next change expectation effect, a notice image 82 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115(10), the number "412" which is the three decorative patterns 41 is determined and stopped. At this time, the chance eye display effect is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (11), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of variation of the next special design. Also, at this time, a change effect is executed. More specifically, the display color of the variable image 51 changes from white to red due to the change effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (12), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4", which is the left decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped, the number "4", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (13), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (14), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (15), the middle decorative pattern 41 is temporarily stopped at the number "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (16), three highly decorative decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped.

Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 116 (17), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixed and stopped. The combination “454” of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost. In addition, the small symbols 56 are also stopped along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “454” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off during the display of the hold image 52 whose display mode has changed due to the change effect, and then the non-initialization return is performed, the hold image 52 whose display mode has changed The display mode of the image 52 returns to the display mode before the change effect is performed. Also, while the pending image 52 is displayed, no change effect is performed, but when the pending image 52 is moved and displayed as the variable image 51, the change effect is performed.

For example, in the case of performing a notice effect of "change the display color of the pending image 52 to blue by the first change effect and change the display color of the variable image 51 to red by the second change effect", the power supply is turned off. Information about the display color of the reserved image 52 at that time may not be stored in the sub-RAM 130c. In this case, the effect control part 130m cannot recognize whether the holding image 52 targeted for the advance notice effect was displayed in white or blue immediately before the power-off state after the power-off state was resolved. Then, for example, although the pending image 52 was displayed in white immediately before the power-off state, if the pending image 52 is displayed in blue after the power-off state is resolved, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power-off state is resolved, the pending image 52 is displayed in the display mode before the change effect is performed, thereby suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the pending image 52 is moved and displayed as the variable image 51, the advance notice effect is performed based on the information stored in the sub-RAM 130c, and the variable image 51 is displayed in red to execute. To suppress the decrease in the player's interest due to the fact that the notice performance that should have been performed is not performed.
It should be noted that after the power-off state is resolved, the change effect for the variable image 51 may not be performed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off at the stage where the first of the three chance eye display effects is performed, and then the non-initialization return is performed, the second and subsequent chance display effects are performed. No eye display effect is performed, and the next change expectation effect is performed. That is, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off during execution of the notice effect and then uninitialized return is performed, the notice effect that was supposed to be executed is not continued. Then, it is possible to execute a notice effect different from the notice effect that was supposed to be executed.

For example, in the case where the advance notice effect of "three times of chance display effects" is performed, there is a case where the sub-RAM 130c does not store information on the number of times the chance display effects have been executed when the power is off. In this case, after the power-off state is resolved, the effect control unit 130m cannot recognize the number of times the chance eye display effect has been executed immediately before the power-off state. Then, for example, even though the chance eye display effect was performed once immediately before the power cutoff state, if the chance eye display effect is performed three more times after the power cutoff state is resolved, the player feels uncomfortable. There is a risk. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power-off state is resolved, the notice effect that should have been executed is not continued, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, based on the information stored in the sub-RAM 130c, "execute notice effect", a notice effect different from the notice effect that was supposed to be executed is performed, so that the notice effect that was supposed to be executed is performed. This suppresses the decline in the interest of the player due to the absence of the game.

(Variation production example 6)
FIG. 117 and FIG. 118 are diagrams showing one mode of effects performed by the effect control unit 130m using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 6) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG.
The variation production example 6 is the same variation production as the variation production example 3 (see FIGS. 109 to 111). In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above processing examples and effects will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 117(1), the decorative design 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 by the effect control section 130m as the variation of the previous special design is completed. At this time, BGM corresponding to the type of the stage image 61 is output from the speaker 156 .
Then, as shown in FIG. 117(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(3), a ready-to-win effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "6", which is the left decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped, the number "6", which is the right decorative pattern 41, is temporarily stopped to enter the ready-to-win state. At this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 .

Then, when the game machine 1 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 117(4). Also, at this time, sound is not output from the speaker 156 .
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 6, non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 117(5), the image display unit 114 displays the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81. FIG. At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. After that, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 maintain these states until the special symbols stop changing.

Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 117(6), the numbers "222", which are the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41, are fixed and stopped. The combination "222" of the numbers of this decorative pattern 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a big win. Also, “222” is displayed as the small pattern 56 . That is, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "222". In addition, the decoration pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 have the same fixed stop timing, so that the time from the start of the display to the fixed stop is the same. Also, at this time, a stage image 61 is displayed. At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(7), the image display section 114 displays an opening image 70 and a right-handed shot image 71 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the opening image 70 is output from the speaker 156 .
Next, as shown in FIG. 117(8), when the jackpot game is started, the image display section 114 displays an in-round image 72, a song selection image 73, a round number image 74, and a point number image 75. , and a winning eye image 88 are displayed. In the in-round image 72, the character, which is the theme of the gaming machine 1, has its right hand lowered. In the round number image 74, the text "Round 1" is displayed. Also, in the point number image 75, the text "50Pt" is displayed. Also, in the winning eye image 88, the number "2" is displayed. At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(9), the high-precision fan effect is started. In the high-precision fan effect, a high-probability fan image 76 is displayed. At this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "150Pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .

Then, when the game machine 1 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 118(10). At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156 .
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved. That is, non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 118(11), the image display unit 114 displays a return-in-progress image 62, a game continuation instruction image 81, and a return-in-progress hitting right image 83. FIG. At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(12), the image display section 114 displays a right-handed shot image 71, an in-round image 72, a round number image 74, and a point number image 75. FIG. At this time, in the in-round image 72, a character different from the character displayed before execution of the high-precision fan effect (see FIG. 117(8)) lowers its right hand. That is, as the jackpot game progresses, the display content of the moving image in the round-in-progress image 72 changes from the display content before execution of the high-precision fan effect. At this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "200Pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 . At this time, the high accuracy notification effect is not executed. At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 from the beginning. That is, the content of the BGM that was playing at the start of the jackpot game (see (8) in FIG. 117) is output again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(13), in the in-round image 72, the character in the in-round image 72 (see FIG. 118(12)) that was displayed during "Round 2" raises its right hand. . That is, the display contents of the in-round image 72 change as the jackpot game progresses. At this time, the text "Round 8" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text “750Pt” is displayed in the point number image 75 . It should be noted that the character selection image 79 is not displayed in this jackpot game. At this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156 .
Then, when the jackpot game ends, a high probability start image 80 is displayed as shown in FIG. 118(14). At this time, BGM corresponding to the high-accuracy start image 80 is output from the speaker 156 .

Next, in the high-probability time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 118 (15), the decorative pattern 41 (“315”) with low decorativeness is confirmed and stopped in the image display section 114 . The decorative pattern 41 displayed at this time is the sequence of numbers "222" (see FIG. 117 (6)) that was finally fixed and stopped before the jackpot game was executed, that is, when the jackpot was won. It is a different arrangement from And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of the numbers "315" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁Also, at this time, from the speaker 156, BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state is output.
Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 11a, as shown in FIG. 118 (16), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design. Also, at this time, from the speaker 156, BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state is output.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m, when the gaming machine 1 does not enter a power-off state during the execution of the variable effect determined to perform the jackpot game, the variable effect next to the variable effect being executed The decorative pattern 41 to start is displayed by a predetermined pattern arrangement, and when the game machine 1 returns after the power is cut off during execution of the variation performance determined to perform the special game, the variation during execution The decorative pattern 41 for starting the variable performance next to the performance is displayed in a row including different patterns.

For example, when the power is off, there is a case where the sub-RAM 130c does not store information about which combination of numbers of the decorative symbols 41 should be displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Also, the types of jackpot patterns included in the variation start command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control section 130m do not correspond to all types of the decorative patterns 41. Therefore, when the power-off state is resolved, the effect control unit 130m cannot recognize which combination of the numbers of the decorative symbols 41 was to be displayed before the power-off state. In this case, at the start of the "next variation" of the variation in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, for example, a combination of decorative symbols 41 different from the combination of decorative symbols 41 to be displayed before the power-off state is displayed. If the decorative symbols 41 are displayed side by side, the player may misunderstand that he or she has won the jackpot in this "next variation". Therefore, at the start of the "next fluctuation", the three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a row including different patterns, thereby preventing the player from misunderstanding that he has won the jackpot in the "next fluctuation". , the player is restrained from having a sense of incompatibility when restarting the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m displays a special effect image on the image display unit 114 during the execution of the jackpot game when the gaming machine 1 does not turn off during execution of the jackpot game. When the game machine 1 is restored after being turned off during the execution of , an image different from the special performance image is displayed without displaying the special performance image during the execution of the jackpot game. The special effect images include, for example, a round in progress image 72, a song selection image 73, a round number image 74, a point number image 75, a high probability swaying image 76, a high probability notification image 77, a character selection image 79, and a high probability start image 80. , winning image 88, and the like.

For example, when a power failure occurs during execution of a jackpot game, there is a case where the sub-RAM 130c does not store information about the progress of the performance in the jackpot game during the power failure. Therefore, the effect control unit 130m cannot recognize the progress of the effect during the jackpot game when the power-off state is resolved. In this case, if the performance image that should be displayed when the game machine 1 is not turned off is displayed when it is not suitable for the progress of the performance during the jackpot game, the player feels uncomfortable. There is a risk. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power-off state is resolved, the effect image that is supposed to be displayed when the gaming machine 1 does not enter the power-off state is not displayed. restrained from having

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m, when it is determined that a jackpot game will be performed and the game machine 1 returns after the power is turned off during the execution of the variable effect, the variable effect being executed The variable performance being executed is ended without temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 41 concerned.

If the game machine 1 is in a power-off state during execution of a game by a player, the effect is temporarily interrupted. , the player is likely to have a sense of incongruity with respect to the performance. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the power-off state is resolved, the player can enjoy the game by limiting the pseudo-effect using the decorative pattern 41 related to the variation that was performed immediately before the power-off state. It suppresses feeling of discomfort when resuming.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is in a power-off state and the power-off state is canceled during execution of a jackpot game, the round number image 74 and the point number image 75 are displayed. In addition, the display contents in the number-of-rounds image 74 at this time correspond to the state of progress of the jackpot game. In addition, the display content in the point number image 75 corresponds to the number of winning balls due to the winning of game balls in the big winning opening 13a.

In this embodiment, each time a round in a jackpot game progresses, information about the progress of the round is stored in the sub-RAM 130c. In addition, each time a game ball wins in the big winning hole 13a, information about the number of winning balls is stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Therefore, even if the gaming machine 1 is in a power-off state, after the power-off state is resolved, the effect control unit 130m can display the number of rounds image 74 and the number of points based on the information stored in the sub-RAM 130c. The image 75 is displayed in a display mode according to the situation of the jackpot game. In this case, even if the power-off state occurs, the player can be made aware of the state of the big winning game after the power-off state is resolved.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, when the gaming machine 1 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is canceled, before the power-off state The stage image 61 displayed in 1 is displayed again, but no sound is output from the speaker 156 at this time.

If a sound is output after the gaming machine 1 is in a power-off state, the player may feel that a warning sound has been output, which may make the player uneasy. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the stage image 61 is displayed when the power-off state is resolved, thereby making the player aware that the content displayed on the image display unit 114 has returned to the state before the power-off state. This prevents the player from feeling uneasy about the occurrence of the disconnection state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is in a power-off state during execution of a jackpot game, and the power-off state is canceled, before the decorative pattern 41 and the stage image 61 are displayed, that is, Before returning from a power-off state, a performance is performed to prompt a player to play.

When the power-off state is canceled, there is a case where the control of the jackpot game by the main control board 110 is started before the effect by the effect control unit 130m is started. In this case, if the player does not restart the game even though the jackpot game is being played, the player may be disadvantaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the power-off state is resolved, the player is prompted to play before the effect performed before the power-off state is restored, thereby disadvantageous to the player. It suppresses the occurrence of

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is in a power-off state during execution of the jackpot game and the power-off state is canceled, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the beginning. In this case, the player can recognize that a jackpot game is being played by listening to the BGM that is output after the power-off state is resolved.

In addition, after the power-off state is canceled, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game may not be output from the beginning. For example, it is possible to output from a predetermined portion of BGM, such as the chorus of a piece of music, every time a power-off state occurs and then is resolved. That is, it is sufficient that the BGM is output from the same location each time the power-off state occurs and then is resolved.

(Modified example of variation effect example 6)
FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a modification of Example 6 of variation effect.
In the variable effect example 6, the effect performed when the power-off state occurs and the power-off state is resolved during the variable effect has been described, but the effect performed when the power-off state is resolved is not limited to these. .
Below, a modification of the variation effect example 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 . In the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, in this modified example, the same effect as the effect explained with reference to FIG. 117(1) to FIG. That is, after the special symbols start to fluctuate and enter the ready-to-win state, the gaming machine 1 enters the power-off state and the non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 119(1), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed. Also, at this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156 . After that, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 maintain these states until the special symbols stop changing.

Then, along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 119(2), the number "315", which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41, is fixed and stopped. Also, “315” is displayed as the small pattern 56 . In other words, the display of the decorative pattern 41 and the small pattern 56 are matched with the combination of "315". At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Then, when the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 119(3), the image display unit 114 displays a jackpot notification image 84, a game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, and a right hand shot. An instruction image 87 is displayed. Also, at this time, BGM corresponding to the big win notification image 84, which is BGM corresponding to the big win game, is output from the speaker 156. - 特許庁That is, the BGM output from the speaker 156 at this time is different from the BGM output in the jackpot game (see (11) in FIG. 110) that is performed after the change that does not cause the power-off state.
It should be noted that none of the opening image 70, the in-round image 72, the music selection image 73, the number-of-rounds image 74, the number-of-points image 75, the character selection image 79, and the high-accuracy start image 80 are displayed during the jackpot game. . In addition, in this jackpot game, high-precision fanning production and high-precision notification production are not performed.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off during execution of the jackpot game, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 119(4). Also, at this time, sound is no longer output from the speaker 156 .
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved. In this case, as shown in FIG. 119(5), the image display unit 114 displays a return-in-progress image 62, a game continuation instruction image 81, and a return-in-progress hitting right image 83. FIG. At this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(6), the image display unit 114 displays a jackpot notification image 84, a game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, and a right-handed instruction image 87. . At this time, the BGM corresponding to the big win game, which corresponds to the big win notification image 84, is output from the speaker 156 from the beginning. That is, the content of the BGM output at the start of the jackpot game (see (3) in FIG. 119) is output again. Thereafter, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 maintain these states until the jackpot game ends. Even in this case, the prize balls are paid out according to the winning to the big winning opening 13a during the big winning game.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, in the high-probability time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. The decorative pattern 41 displayed at this time corresponds to the row of numbers finally fixed and stopped before the big win game is executed, that is, when the big win is won. And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of the numbers "315" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁Also, at this time, from the speaker 156, BGM corresponding to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state is output.
Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 11a, as shown in FIG. 119(8), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design.

As described above, in this modification, when the game machine 1 is in a power-off state and the power-off state is canceled during the execution of the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, this special symbol is displayed. When the variation is stopped, three decorative patterns 41 are displayed in a row including different patterns.

For example, when the power is off, there is a case where the sub-RAM 130c does not store information about which combination of numbers of the decorative symbols 41 should be displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Also, the types of jackpot patterns included in the variation start command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control section 130m do not correspond to all types of the decorative patterns 41. Therefore, when the power-off state is resolved, the effect control unit 130m cannot recognize which combination of the numbers of the decorative symbols 41 was to be displayed before the power-off state. In this case, when the variation of the special symbols whose lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is stopped, for example, a sequence of numbers different from the combination of the decorative symbols 41 which were to be displayed before the power was turned off. When the decorative pattern 41 is displayed, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery wins the jackpot in ``variation different'' from the variation of the special pattern that is the jackpot. Therefore, when the fluctuation of the special pattern is stopped, three decoration patterns 41 including different patterns are displayed to prevent the player from misunderstanding that he has won a jackpot in 'different fluctuations'.

In addition, in this modification, when the game machine 1 is in a power-off state and the power-off state is canceled during the execution of the variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, during the execution of the big win game. , a jackpot notification image 84, a game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, a right-handed instruction image 87, and other images that are not displayed when the power is not cut off are displayed.

In the jackpot game, the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, and the variation performance related to the fluctuation of the special pattern may be performed according to the type of the decorative patterns 41 that are arranged. Therefore, when the performance control unit 130m cannot recognize the combination of the decorative patterns 41 to be displayed when the power-off state is resolved, the type of performance to be performed in the subsequent jackpot game may also not be recognized. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot game after the power-off state is canceled, an image different from that when the power-off state does not occur is displayed, so that the jackpot game after the power-off state occurs is displayed. To suppress giving a sense of incompatibility to a player in a game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as in the variation effect example 6 and the modified example, during the variation of the special symbols, if the gaming machine 1 is in a power-off state and the power-off state is canceled, the special symbols are changing. The time for displaying the three decorative patterns 41 is shortened as compared with the case where the power-off state does not occur in . In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity when viewing the three decorative symbols 41 displayed after the power-off state is resolved.

In addition, in the variable effect example 6 and the modified example, after the power-off state is resolved, the jackpot game may be performed without displaying the three decorative symbols 41 . Shortening the display time of the three decorative patterns 41 includes not displaying the three decorative patterns 41 (0 second). Also, in this case, the small pattern 56 may be stopped. That is, after the power-off state is resolved, the three decorative symbols 41 are not displayed, but the small symbols 56 are displayed, and then the jackpot game may be performed.

In addition, in the modified example, it was explained that in the jackpot game, a BGM different from the BGM output in the jackpot game (see FIG. 110 (11)) performed after a change in which the power failure state does not occur is output. is not limited to In other words, the same BGM may be output in the big win game regardless of whether or not the power supply is interrupted during the fluctuation of the special symbols in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is the big win or in the big win game.

Further, in the variable effect example 6 and the modified example, the decorative pattern 41 to be fixed and stopped after the power-off state is resolved is the highly decorative decorative pattern 41, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, after the power-off state is resolved, the three decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness as shown in FIG. Even in this case, the decorative pattern 41 is not temporarily stopped after the power-off state is resolved.

(Modified example 1 of production in jackpot game)
FIG. 120 and FIG. 121 are diagrams showing an effect performed by the effect control unit 130m using the image display unit 114 and the like, and showing a modification of the effect in the jackpot game.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, a modified example (modified example 1) of the effect in the jackpot game will be described. In the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, when the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 120(1), the image display section 114 displays a right-handed shot image 71, a rounding image 72, a song selection image 73, a round number image 74, and a point number image. 75, and winning eye image 88 are displayed. In the in-round image 72, the character, which is the theme of the gaming machine 1, has its right hand lowered. In the round number image 74, the text "Round 1" is displayed. Also, in the point number image 75, the text "50Pt" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(2), the high-precision fan effect is started. In the high-precision fan effect, a high-probability fan image 76 is displayed. At this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. FIG. Also, at this time, the text "150Pt" is displayed in the point number image 75 .

Then, when the game machine 1 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 120(3).
When the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, as shown in FIG. A right shot image 83 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(5), the image display unit 114 displays a right-handed image 71, a rounding image 72, a song selection image 73, a point number image 75, and a winning eye image 88. FIG. On the other hand, the round number image 74 is not displayed. Also, at this time, in the in-round image 72, the character that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 is lowering its right hand. That is, the display content in the in-round image 72 is the display content when the jackpot game is started (see FIG. 120(1)). Also, at this time, the point number image 75 displays the text “0Pt”. Incidentally, for example, after that, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole 13a, the number of winning balls is displayed in the point number image 75. FIG. That is, in the point number image 75, the number of winning balls after recovery from the power-off state is displayed. Also, at this time, a character “?” is displayed in the winning eye image 88 .

Then, when the game machine 1 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 120(6).
Then, when the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, as shown in FIG. A right shot image 83 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(8), the image display section 114 displays a right-handed image 71, a rounding image 72, a song selection image 73, a point number image 75, and a winning eye image 88. FIG. Also, at this time, in the in-round image 72, the character that is the theme of the gaming machine 1 is lowering its right hand. That is, the display content in the in-round image 72 is the display content when the jackpot game is started (see FIG. 120(1)). Also, at this time, the point number image 75 displays the text “0Pt”.
Then, when the jackpot game ends, a high probability start image 80 is displayed as shown in FIG. 121(9).

Next, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 121 (10), the decorative pattern 41 (“315”) with low decorativeness is confirmed and stopped in the image display section 114 . And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of the numbers "315" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁
Then, for example, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 11a, as shown in FIG. 121 (11), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design.

As described above, in Modification 1, when the power-off state occurs during execution of the jackpot game and the power-off state is resolved, the round number image 74 is not displayed thereafter. In this case, when the power-off state is resolved, the player misunderstands the progress of the jackpot game by displaying the round number image 74 even though the performance control unit 130m does not recognize the progress of the jackpot game. can be suppressed.

(Modified example 2 of production in jackpot game)
FIGS. 122 and 123 are diagrams showing another modified example of the effect in the jackpot game, which is the effect performed by the effect control unit 130m using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123, another modified example (modified example 2) of the effect in the jackpot game will be described. In the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, when a jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 122(1), the image display section 114 displays a right-handed shot image 71, a rounding image 72, a song selection image 73, a round number image 74, and a point number image. 75, and winning eye image 88 are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122(2), the high-precision fan effect is started. In the high-precision fan effect, a high-probability fan image 76 is displayed.

Then, when the game machine 1 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 122(3).
When the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, as shown in FIG. A right shot image 83 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(5), the image display unit 114 displays a jackpot notification image 84, a game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, and a right-handed instruction image 87. . Note that the round number image 74, the point number image 75, the winning eye image 88, and the like are not displayed.

Then, when the game machine 1 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 122(6).
When the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, as shown in FIG. A right shot image 83 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 122(8), the image display section 114 displays a jackpot notification image 84, a game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, and a right-handed instruction image 87. .

Then, when the jackpot game ends, in the high-probability time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. . And the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the row of the numbers "315" like the decorative pattern 41. - 特許庁
Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting hole 11a, as shown in FIG. 123 (10), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the special design.

(Non-initialization test operation processing at the time of malfunction of the movable effect member)
124 and 125 are diagrams showing an example of the non-initialization test operation process when the movable effect member 115 malfunctions.
Next, an example of non-initialization test operation processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. In the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 124(1), the decoration design 41 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 by the production control section 130m when the variation of the previous special design is completed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 124(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(3), a ready-to-win effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(4), the SP ready-to-win effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(5), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(6), an operation presentation is performed. In the operation effect, a button operation image 89 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the production button 161 while the button operation image 89 is being displayed, a role product action production is performed as shown in FIG. 124(7). In the role product motion presentation, the left movable presentation member 115A, the middle movable presentation member 115B, and the right movable presentation member 115C operate so as to cover part of the image display section 114, respectively.

Then, when the game machine 1 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 124(8). Also, at this time, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C cover a part of the image display section 114 and stop the operation.

Next, when the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the image display section 114 displays the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 as shown in FIG. 125(9). be. Also, at this time, the left movable effect member 115A and the middle movable effect member 115B return to the positions before the performance of the accessory motion effect is performed. On the other hand, the right movable effect member 115C malfunctions and does not return to the position before the performance of the accessory action effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(10), non-initialization test operation processing is performed. In the non-initialization test operation process, the left movable effect member 115A and the middle movable effect member 115B operate so as to cover part of the image display section 114, respectively. On the other hand, the right movable effect member 115C maintains a non-operating state.
Then, as shown in FIG. 125(11), the non-initialization test operation processing by the left movable effect member 115A and the middle movable effect member 115B is completed. On the other hand, the right movable effect member 115C maintains a state of partially covering the image display section 114 . Also, at this time, a decorative pattern 41, a reserved number display 55, and a small pattern 56 are displayed.

(Modification 1 of non-initialization test operation processing)
FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a modification of the non-initialization test operation process when the movable effect member 115 malfunctions.
Next, another example (modified example 1) of the non-initialization test operation process will be described with reference to FIG. In the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, in this modified example, the same effects as those described with reference to FIGS. 124(1) to 124(5) are performed. That is, the variation of the special symbol is started, and the ready-to-win effect, the SP ready-to-win effect, and the SPSP ready-to-win effect are performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 126(1), an operation presentation is performed. In the operation effect, a button operation image 89 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the production button 161 while the button operation image 89 is being displayed, a role product action production is performed as shown in FIG. 126(2). In this accessory motion effect, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C move to the front side of the image display section 114. FIG.
Subsequently, in the performance of the action of the role product, as shown in FIG. 126(3), the left movable production member 115A, the middle movable production member 115B, and the right movable production member 115C each move to the right.

Then, when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 126(4). Also, at this time, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C cover a part of the image display section 114 and stop the operation.

When the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the image display section 114 displays the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 as shown in FIG. 126(5). . Also, at this time, the middle movable effect member 115B and the right movable effect member 115C return to the positions before the accessory action effect is performed. On the other hand, the left movable production member 115A is malfunctioning and does not return to the position before the performance of the role product action production. In addition, the position of the left movable effect member 115A at this time is a position where the left movable effect member 115A and the middle movable effect member 115B come into contact when the middle movable effect member 115B performs the operation by the non-initialization test operation process. be.
And, in this case, as shown in FIG. 126(6), none of the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C perform the operation by the non-initialization test operation process. In addition, the left movable effect member 115A maintains a state of partially covering the image display section 114 . Also, at this time, a decorative pattern 41, a reserved number display 55, and a small pattern 56 are displayed.

As described above, in the first modification, when the power interruption occurs during the operation of the movable production member 115 (abnormality of the movable production member 115), the abnormality of the movable production member 115 continues even after the power interruption is resolved. When performing the non-initialization test operation process, if one movable effect member 115 and another movable effect member 115 come into contact with each other, the operation of any movable effect member 115 is restricted.
In this case, secondary damage caused by contact between one movable effect member 115 and another movable effect member 115 can be suppressed by performing non-initialization test operation processing after the power-off state is resolved. can.

(Modification 2 of non-initialization test operation processing)
FIG. 127 is a diagram showing another modification of the non-initialization test operation process when the movable effect member 115 malfunctions.
Next, another example (modification 2) of the non-initialization test operation process will be described with reference to FIG. In the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, in this modified example, the same effects as those described with reference to FIGS. 126(1) to 126(3) are performed. That is, the variation of the special symbol is started, and then the performance of the action of the role product is performed. Then, when the game machine 1 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 127(1). Also, at this time, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, and the right movable effect member 115C cover a part of the image display section 114 and stop the operation.

When the power-off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the image display section 114 displays the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 as shown in FIG. . Also, at this time, the middle movable effect member 115B and the right movable effect member 115C return to the positions before the accessory action effect is performed. On the other hand, the left movable production member 115A is malfunctioning and does not return to the position before the performance of the role product action production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(3), non-initialization test operation processing is performed. In this case, the middle movable effect member 115B and the right movable effect member 115C operate so as to cover part of the image display section 114, respectively. On the other hand, the left movable effect member 115A does not operate by the non-initialization test operation process. Also, at this time, the middle movable effect member 115B comes into contact with the left movable effect member 115A, thereby hindering the operation of the middle movable effect member 115B by the non-initialization test operation process.

Then, as shown in FIG. 127(4), the non-initialization test operation processing by the middle movable effect member 115B and the right movable effect member 115C is completed. On the other hand, the left movable effect member 115A maintains a state of partially covering the image display section 114 . Also, at this time, a decorative pattern 41, a reserved number display 55, and a small pattern 56 are displayed.

As described above, in the second modification, when a power failure occurs during operation of the movable effect member 115 (abnormality of the movable effect member 115), the abnormality of the movable effect member 115 continues even after the power failure is resolved. Even if one movable effect member 115 and another movable effect member 115 come into contact with each other when the non-initialization test operation process is performed, the movable effect member 115 positioned at the initial position is not Execute the operation by the initialization test processing.
In this case, the abnormality of the one movable effect member 115 that continues to be abnormal can be eliminated by the other one movable effect member 115 coming into contact with the one movable effect member 115 that continues to be abnormal. be.

In the above description, an operation example in which non-initialization test operation processing is performed has been described with reference to FIGS. 124, 125, 126, and 127, the same operations as the operation examples described with reference to FIGS.

In the operation example of the non-initialization test operation process, if the movable effect member 115 malfunctions after the game machine 1 is turned off, the speaker 156 issues an alarm that the malfunction has occurred. Alternatively, the image display unit 114 may display a warning image indicating that a malfunction has occurred.

(Variation production example 7)
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing one aspect of an effect performed by the effect control unit 130m using the image display unit 114 and the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 7) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 41 will be described with reference to FIG.
Incidentally, the variable performance shown in FIG. 115 is a variable performance executed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In addition, in the following explanation, differences from the above processing examples and effects will be mainly explained, and explanations of points that are the same as the above processing examples and effects may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 128(1), when the effect control section 130m ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is confirmed and stopped in the image display section 114. there is
Then, as shown in FIG. 128(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design.

Then, when the game machine 1 is turned off, the image display section 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 128(3).
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 58c is OFF, the power-off state of the gaming machine 1 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 7, non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 128(4), the image display unit 114 displays the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81. FIG. Also, at this time, the background on the display screen of the image display unit 114 is the case where the non-initialization return is performed after the gaming machine 1 is turned off during the variable production of the low-probability time-saving no-game state (Fig. 117 ( 5) is displayed in a color different from that shown in ). In the illustrated example, the background color on the display screen of the image display unit 114 is displayed in blue. Further, at this time, the image display unit 114 displays the hitting-right-in-return image 83 .

Then, as the special symbols stop changing, as shown in FIG. 128(5), the numbers "315", which are the three decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness, are fixed and stopped. In addition, the small symbols 56 stop along with the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. At this time, the combination “315” of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 41 . Also, at this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 11a indicates "1". Also, at this time, the variation image 51 is not displayed on the image display unit 114 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 128(6), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, the first reserved image 52 is moved to the display position of the variable image 51, so that the variable image 51 is displayed. Also, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 11a indicates "0".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display content of the image display unit 114 when the non-initialization return is performed differs between the low-probability time-saving non-gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state.
In addition, in the example 7 of the variation effect, it is explained that when the non-initialization return is performed, the return-in-progress image 62 and the return-in-progress hitting right image 83 (see FIG. 128(4)) are displayed, but this is not the case. not. As an image displayed together with the returning image 62, for example, a right hitting image 71 (see FIG. 128(5)) may be displayed.

(Event when the signal line is disconnected)
FIG. 129 is a diagram explaining an event when a signal line is disconnected.
Next, referring to FIG. 129, what happens when the signal line connecting the two functional units is disconnected will be described. In the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 129(1), the effect control section 130m stops the decorative design 41 on the screen of the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design ends. Also, at this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 . Also, at this time, the game control board and the fraud detection control board are connected by a signal line. More specifically, the game control board and the fraud detection control board are connected by signal lines via connectors.

The fraud detection control board is a board for controlling detection of fraud in games by players. Radio wave detection means, magnetic detection means, and vibration detection means are connected to the fraud detection control board.
The radio wave detection means detects abnormal radio waves. For example, when detecting a radio wave having a power density equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the radio wave detection means notifies the game control board of the detection of an abnormal radio wave through a signal line.
The magnetic detection means detects abnormal magnetism. For example, when the magnetism detection means detects magnetism having a magnetic flux density equal to or higher than a predetermined value, it notifies the game control board of the detection of abnormal magnetism via a signal line.
The vibration detection means detects abnormal vibrations. The vibration detection means, for example, when detecting a vibration consisting of an acceleration equal to or greater than a predetermined value, notifies the game control board that an abnormal vibration has been detected via a signal line.

When the main control board 110 configured in the main control board receives a notification regarding an abnormality from the fraud detection control board, the main control board 110 notifies an error according to the type of the received notification.
A connection detection sensor is provided on the main control board. The connection detection sensor is a sensor that detects the presence or absence of connection between the main control board and the fraud detection control board.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting BGM corresponding to the variable effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(3), the connector that connects the main control board and the fraud detection control board is disconnected, whereby the main control board and the fraud detection control board are disconnected. In this case, the connection detection sensor provided on the main control board detects disconnection of the signal line connecting the main control board and the fraud detection control board. When the disconnection of the signal line connecting the main control board and the fraud detection control board is detected, the main control board 110 causes the image display section 114 to display the radio wave error notification image 90 and the magnetic error notification image 91. , and the vibration error notification image 92 are displayed. In addition, the speaker 156 terminates the output of the BGM corresponding to the variation effect, and outputs a notification sound indicating that a radio wave error has occurred, a notification sound indicating that a magnetic error has occurred, and a notification sound that a vibration error has occurred. Let

The radio wave error notification image 90 is an image that notifies or suggests that a radio wave error has occurred. This radio wave error notification image 90 is an image displayed when the main control board 110 receives a notification of detection of abnormal radio waves from the radio wave detection means.
The magnetic error notification image 91 is an image that notifies or suggests that a magnetic error has occurred. This timing error notification image 91 is an image displayed when the main control board 110 receives notification of detection of abnormal magnetism from the magnetism detecting means.
The vibration error notification image 92 is an image that notifies or suggests that a vibration error has occurred. This vibration error notification image 92 is an image displayed when the main control board 110 receives notification of detection of abnormal vibration from the vibration detection means.

After that, when the main control board and the fraud detection control board are connected again by connecting the connector to the signal line, the radio error notification image 90, the magnetic error notification image 91, and the vibration error notification The image 92 may be hidden, the error notification sound may be stopped, and the decorative pattern 41 and the like may be displayed again. Even when the main control board and the fraud detection control board are connected again, the radio error notification image 90, the magnetic error notification image 91, and the vibration error notification image 92 are displayed, and the error notification sound is output. may be continued.

(Event 2 when the signal line is disconnected)
FIG. 130 is a diagram explaining an event when a signal line is disconnected.
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, an event (event 2) when the signal line connecting the two functional units is disconnected will be described. In the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 130(1), the effect control section 130m stops the decorative design 41 on the screen of the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design ends. Also, at this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 . Also, at this time, the game control board and the effect control board are connected by the signal line. More specifically, the main control board and the effect control board are connected by signal lines via connectors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting BGM corresponding to the variable effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (3), the connector that connects the main control board and the effect control board is removed, and thereby the main control board and the effect control board are in an unconnected state. Even in this case, the decorative pattern 41 continues to be displayed on the image display section 114 . More specifically, three decorative patterns 41 are temporarily stopped. Also, at this time, various errors are not notified. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting BGM corresponding to the variable effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 130(4), the main control board and the effect control board are connected again by connecting the connector to the signal line. Even in this case, various errors are not notified. Then, along with the stop of fluctuation of the special symbols, the numbers "421", which are the three decorative symbols 41, are fixed and stopped. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting BGM corresponding to the variable effect.

(Event 3 when the signal line is disconnected)
FIG. 131 is a diagram explaining an event when a signal line is disconnected.
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, an event (event 3) when the signal line connecting the two functional units is disconnected will be described. In the following description, differences from the above-described processing examples and effects will be mainly described, and descriptions of points that are the same as the above-described processing examples and effects may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 131(1), the effect control section 130m stops the decorative design 41 on the screen of the image display section 114 as the variation of the previous special design ends. Also, at this time, BGM is being output from the speaker 156 . Also, at this time, the main control board and the switch are connected by a signal line. More specifically, the main control board and the switches are connected by signal lines via connectors. This switch may be, for example, the first starting port detection switch 10a. Also, the switch may be the second starting port detection switch 11c or the gate detection switch 12a.
A connection detection sensor is provided on the main control board. The connection detection sensor is a sensor that detects the presence or absence of connection between the main control board and the switch.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(2), the variation of the decorative design 41 is started along with the start of the variable display of the next special design. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 is outputting BGM corresponding to the variable effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 131(3), the connector that connects the main control board and the switch is disconnected, thereby disconnecting the main control board and the switch. In this case, the connection detection sensor provided on the main control board detects disconnection of the signal line connecting the main control board and the switch. Then, when disconnection of the signal line connecting the main control board and the switch is detected, the main control section 110A causes the image display section 114 to display the disconnection error notification image 93 . In addition, the speaker 156 terminates the output of the BGM corresponding to the variable effect, and outputs a notification sound indicating that a disconnection error has occurred.
The disconnection error notification image 93 is an image that notifies or suggests that an error related to disconnection of the signal line has occurred.

After that, when the main control board and the switch are connected again by connecting the connector to the signal line, the disconnection error notification image 93 disappears and the disconnection error notification sound is output. It may disappear and the decorative pattern 41 and the like may be displayed again. Further, even when the main control board and the switch are connected again, the display of the disconnection error notification image 93 and the output of the disconnection error notification sound may be continued.
Further, the image displayed when disconnection of the signal line connecting the main control board and the switch is detected is not limited to the disconnection error notification image 93 . When the disconnection of the signal line connecting the game control board and the first starting port detection switch 10a is detected, an image notifying the error of the first starting port detection switch 10a may be displayed. In other words, according to the type of switch, an image notifying of an error of the switch for which disconnection has been detected may be displayed. In other words, when it is detected that the signal line connecting the main control board and the switch is not connected, at least one of the connection error and the connection destination error should be reported.

As described above, in this embodiment, when it is detected that the predetermined signal line connected to the main control means is not connected while the predetermined sound effect is being output, the sound effect being output is terminated and a predetermined notification is given. Sound can be output. In this case, even if a predetermined effect sound is being output, the predetermined notification sound can be given priority over the effect sound.

In addition, in the phenomenon described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131, the case where the decorative pattern 41 is changing has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, even during execution of a customer waiting effect, a jackpot game, etc., if the signal line connecting the two functional units is disconnected, the same phenomenon as described with reference to FIGS. An event may occur.

In addition, although the explanation is omitted, in each variation effect example and its modification example, and in the operation example and its modification example in the non-initialization return process, after the power failure state is resolved, FIG. 100, FIG. 101, FIG. 125, FIG. 126, and FIG. 127, and the non-initialization return processing and non-initialization test operation processing may be performed.

Also, in the present embodiment, an example in which light is emitted in the normal light emission mode has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the normal light emission mode may be a mode in which no light is emitted. That is, the normal light emission mode includes a mode in which no light is emitted.

Also, the movable effect member 115 may be provided on the frame member 150 or may be provided on the game board 4 . In other words, the movable effect member 115 can be regarded as a first light emitting section capable of emitting light, and can also be regarded as a second light emitting section capable of emitting light.

Various effects of the gaming machine 1 and initial operations of various drive sources have been described above, but application or combination of all or part of the described contents to other effects, controls, etc. is not specifically mentioned. is possible. In addition, although various processing examples, variable production examples, and modifications have been mentioned, this document does not refer to applying or combining the contents of such processing examples, variable production examples, and modifications to other productions. It is possible even if In addition, it is possible to combine various processing examples, variation rendering examples, and modification examples, and to replace some of them, even if there is no mention in this document.

[Technical features of the present invention]
(Technical features of the invention related to vibration production)
A conventional gaming machine determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a game effect according to the result of the determination. is common. In such a game machine, there is known one that executes an effect using a predetermined effect device (effect button, movable effect member, etc.) (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2019-033816). However, the gaming machine as described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that the interest in the game is low.

◆ A first configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine comprises determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquiring means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a Pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not the special game is to be played; performance control means capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination; and the effect control means includes a specific effect (game effect with reach) for executing a second effect (post-reach effect) after the first effect (pre-reach effect), and instructing the player to operate the operation means. It is possible to execute an operation prompting effect for prompting an operation (display of an operation prompting image) and a vibration effect for vibrating the operating means, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration with button operation), A second vibration effect (vibration without button operation) with a different effect mode (vibration intensity/vibration time) from the first vibration effect, and a third vibration effect (notice of button vibration at the start of fluctuation: 36 to 38), and the first vibration effect (vibration with button operation 51, 55, 58) is executed, the execution period (operation valid period) of the operation prompting effect (display of the operation prompting image) is likely to be longer. (Vibration without button operation has no operation valid period), and the third vibration effect (button vibration notice at the start of fluctuation) is performed when the specific effect (game effect with reach) is executed. 13, 37 and 38 (button vibration notice effect at start of fluctuation), FIG. 59, Fig. 75).

◆ A second configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine comprises determining means for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquiring means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a Pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not the special game is to be played; performance control means capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination; means, and a plurality of operable production accessories (movable production members), wherein the production control means includes an operation promotion production (display of an operation promotion image) for prompting the player to operate the operation means; A vibration effect of vibrating the operation means and a character effect of activating the effect accessory can be executed, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration with button operation) and the first vibration effect. A second vibration effect (vibration without button operation) with different effects (vibration intensity/vibration time), and a third vibration effect (notice of button vibration at the start of fluctuation: FIG. 38. Winning Button Vibration Notice Effect: S665 of FIG. 36, FIG. 59). ) is executed, the execution period (operation valid period) of the operation promotion effect (display of the operation promotion image) is likely to be longer, and the third vibration effect (button vibration notice at the start of fluctuation, winning Compared to button vibration notice), the first vibration effect (vibration with button operation: decision) tends to be executed for a longer period of vibration effect (button vibration at the start of fluctuation 1 second (weak notice) and 3 seconds ( Strong notice), FIG. 51), the first vibration effect (vibration with button operation: decision) is executed more than when the third vibration effect (button vibration at start of fluctuation, button vibration at winning) is executed. It is characterized in that it is easier to execute a predetermined role performance (determining role object action: two or more role objects are activated) in time (Figs. 37, 38, 51, and 67 (7)). .

◆ A third configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine includes determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is established, and game performance can be executed according to the result of the determination. Effect control means and operation means operable by the player are provided, and the operation means includes a first operation mode (single press) and a second operation mode (continuous press/long press) different from the first operation mode. ), and the effect control means, when it is determined that the special game is to be executed by the determination (jackpot), the operation mode of the operation means (single press / repeated hits, long A special effect (decision effect) that suggests the possibility of executing the special game in the effect mode (battle effect/mission effect) corresponding to the push), and a vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) that vibrates the operation means, can be executed, and the special effect (determining effect) is executed in the first effect mode (battle effect) corresponding to the first operation mode (single press), and the second operation mode (continuous hits/long In the case where the special effect (decision effect) is executed in the second effect mode (mission effect) corresponding to the push), the vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is executed after the operation means is operated. The feature is that the start timing is different (FIG. 52).

◆ A fourth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine comprises determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquiring means when a predetermined condition is established, and a game system for changing and displaying symbols according to the result of the determination. A production control means capable of executing production and an operation means operable by a player are provided, and the production control means is controllable between a first production mode (normal) and a second production mode (probability variable). During the game performance, it is possible to execute an operation promotion effect (display of an operation promotion image) for prompting the player to operate the operation means, and in the game effect, the first symbol (even number, pinch symbol) is used. A first game effect in which an effect is executed, a second game effect in which a ready-to-win effect is executed by a second pattern (odd number pattern other than "7"), and a ready-to-win effect is executed by a third pattern ("7" pattern). and a fourth game effect (reverse “7” pattern) in which the third pattern (“7” pattern) is displayed after the first pattern (even number, pinch pattern) is displayed. The operation promotion effects (display of operation promotion images) include a first operation promotion effect (single-press promotion image) and a second operation promotion effect (continuous press/long press/restoration operation promotion image). Compared to the first production mode (normal), the second production mode (variable probability) is based on the second operation promotion production (continuous hit / long press / recovery operation promotion image). ) is easy to execute (Fig. 7: jackpot pattern TB, Fig. 12: special figure fluctuation PTB, Fig. 42: normal production PTB, Fig. 43: probability variable production PTB, Fig. 58: resurrection production PTB, Fig. 71: reversal "7" Production example).

◆ A fifth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows. This game machine comprises a performance control means capable of executing a game performance, an operation means (button/lever) operable by a player, and a sound output means (speaker) capable of outputting a predetermined performance sound, The effect control means vibrates the operation means when the operation promotion effect (display of the operation promotion image) prompting the player to operate the operation means and the operation promotion effect (display of the operation promotion image) are performed. Vibration effects (decision success vibration effect/resurrection success vibration effect) can be executed, and the operation promotion effect includes a first operation promotion effect (button image at the time of button decision/recovery) and a second operation promotion effect. There is a production (lever image at the time of lever setting / revival), and when the first operation promotion production (button image at the time of button setting / revival) is executed, the vibration production (decision success vibration production / revival success) When the vibration production) is performed, the first production sound (success sound effect A) is output (FIGS. 51 and 58), and the second operation promotion production (lever image at the time of lever setting/recovery) is executed. In this case, a second effect sound (success effect sound B) different from the first effect sound is output when the vibration effect (decision success vibration effect/revival success vibration effect) is performed (FIGS. 51 and 58). It is characterized by

◆ A sixth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine comprises determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is established, and a pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to play the special game, effect control means capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination, and a player can operate and an operation means, and the production control means can be controlled in a first production mode (normal) and a second production mode (probability variable), and vibration production (button operation, pattern matching) that vibrates the operation means , Pre-reading notice (button vibration at start of fluctuation, button vibration at winning)) can be executed, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration with button operation) There are a second vibration effect (vibration without button operation) with different intensity/vibration time, and a third vibration effect (button vibration at the start of fluctuation, button vibration at winning) executed based on the above-mentioned prior determination, and the above-mentioned In the first production mode (normal) and the second production mode (variable probability), the ratio of execution of the third vibration production (button vibration at the start of fluctuation) is different (Fig. 37, Fig. 38: normal> variable probability) characterized by

◆ A seventh configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine comprises determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquiring means when a predetermined condition is established, and a pattern which is displayed in a variable manner when a starting condition is established, and the judgment is performed. and an operation means operable by the player, wherein the effect control means is a special game indicating execution of the special game. In the game production (jackpot game production) in which the symbols are stopped and displayed in the display mode (big hit pattern matching), a special production (decision success production) that suggests the execution of the special game and a vibration production (decision) that vibrates the operation means Successful vibration production) can be executed, and the symbols of the special display mode (big hit pattern matching) are the first display mode (even-numbered pattern matching) and the second display mode (odd-numbered pattern matching) different from the first display mode. ), and even if the symbols are displayed in the first display mode (even-numbered symbols), the symbols are displayed in the second display mode (odd-numbered symbols). Even if there is a strong vibration) (FIG. 51).

◆ The eighth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as the following game machine. This gaming machine includes determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is established, and game performance can be executed according to the result of the determination. A production control means and an operation means that can be operated by a player are provided, and the production control means is controllable between a first production mode (normal) and a second production mode (probability variable). An operation promotion effect (display of an operation promotion image) that prompts the user to operate the operation means, and a predetermined effect (display of an image that suggests the degree of expectation or development) accompanying the execution of the operation promotion effect (display of the operation promotion image) and a vibration effect (button operation vibration) for vibrating the operation means, and the operation promotion effect includes a first operation promotion effect ( white button image), and the second operation promotion effect (red button image) in which the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is different from the first operation promotion effect, and the first effect mode (normal) and the second operation promotion effect are provided. Expectation that the special game will be executed when the second operation promotion effect (red button image) and the vibration effect (button operation vibration: cut-in, development, decision) are executed in the 2 effect mode (variable probability) It is characterized by different degrees (Fig. 6: jackpot probability TB, Fig. 49: development, Fig. 50: cut-in, Fig. 51: decision).

◆ A ninth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine comprises a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination. A control means and an operation means operable by a player are provided, and the effect control means is a specific effect (game with reach) that executes a second effect (post-reach effect) after a first effect (pre-reach effect). and a vibration effect for vibrating the operation means, and in the specific effect (game effect with reach), the vibration effect is executed at the time of the first effect (pre-reach effect). There are cases where the vibration effect is executed during the second effect (effect after reach) (Fig. 73), and the vibration effect includes the first vibration effect (short vibration time: 1 second) , There is a second vibration effect (long vibration time: 3 seconds or more) whose execution period is longer than the first vibration effect, and when the first effect (pre-reach effect), the second vibration effect (vibration time (long), the first vibration effect (short vibration time: look-ahead, dialogue, step-up, pseudo) is easier to execute (Figs.
At the time of the second production (production after reach), the second vibration production (long vibration time: decision, re-lottery, revival) is easier to execute than the first vibration production (short vibration time) ( Fig. 42 and Fig. 43: Column of effect composition of variable effect PTB, Fig. 51: decision, Fig. 55: re-lottery, Fig. 58: resurrection, Fig. 73).

◆ A tenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine comprises a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination. Control means and operation means that can be operated by the player are provided, and the effect control means is a specific effect (after-reach effect) that executes a second effect (post-reach effect) after a first effect (pre-reach/during-reach effect). and a vibration effect of vibrating the operation means, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (weak vibration in a short time/strong vibration in a short time) and the first vibration effect (weak vibration in a short time/strong vibration in a short time) 1 vibration production has a second vibration production (strong vibration for a long time) with a different production mode, and when the specific production (game production with reach) is executed, the first production (before reach/during reach) During the second production (post-reach production), the operation of the operation means is more likely than when the first special production (dialogue notice/cut-in) is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the production). Accordingly, the second vibration effect (strong vibration for 3 seconds or more) is more likely to be executed when the second special effect (decision effect, re-lottery effect, revival effect) is executed (Figs. 42 and 43: Column of production configuration of variable production PTB, Figs. 45 to 48: Pre-reach notice TB, Fig. 50: Cut-in, Fig. 51: Decision, Fig. 55: Re-lottery, Fig. 58: Resurrection, Fig. 75). .

◆An eleventh configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine comprises determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is established, and a pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to play the special game, effect control means capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination, and a player can operate An operation means is provided, and the effect control means is controllable in a first effect mode (normal) and a second effect mode (probability variable), and the first effect mode (normal) and the second effect mode In any production mode of (variable), a vibration production that vibrates the operation means, and a continuous notice (effect notice production, role product action notice) that performs a predetermined production (effect image, character object movement) over a plurality of game productions production), and can be executed, and the second number of times (three times), which is greater than the first number of times (two times), in the first production mode (normal) and in the second production mode (variable probability) ), when a continuous notice for performing a predetermined effect (effect image, character object operation) is executed in the game effect (FIGS. 39 and 40), the first effect mode is higher than the second effect mode (probability variable). In the case of (normal), the reach effect (normal reach, SP reach and SPSP reach) is easily executed in the game effect of the notice target, and the special game is difficult to be executed (preliminary determination of FIGS. 11 to 13 and the Selection rate of reach production in the case of loss in judgment: normal > probability variation), the second production mode (probability variation) is better than the first production mode (normal), in the game production of the notice target It is characterized in that the vibration performance (big win determination vibration performance) is easily executed when ready-to-win performance is executed (selection rate of button vibration advance notice performance at the time of big win in FIGS. 37 and 38: normal <probability variation).

◆ A twelfth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine comprises a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect capable of executing a game effect according to the result of the determination. A control means and an operation means operable by a player are provided, and the effect control means includes a light emission effect for causing the operation means to emit light (emission along with display of an operation promotion image) and vibrating the operation means. Vibration production (button operation vibration) can be executed, and the light emission production includes a first light emission production (white/red light emission) for causing the operation means to emit light in a first light emission mode, and There is a second light emission effect (rainbow light emission) that emits light in two light emission modes, and when either of the first light emission effect (white/red light emission) and the second light emission effect (rainbow light emission) is executed. However, the vibration effect (button operation vibration) can be executed (FIGS. 46 to 51, FIG. 55, and FIG. 58), and the vibration effect (button operation vibration) is the first light emission effect (white/red light emission). is executed and the second light emission effect (rainbow light emission) is executed, the effect mode (vibration intensity/vibration time) is different (rainbow is stronger vibration than white/red) Long time: FIGS. 46 to 51, 54, 55, and 58).

◆ A thirteenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine comprises determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is established, and a Pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to play the special game, and effect control means capable of executing game effects according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination, and the effect control The means can be controlled in a first production mode (normal) and a second production mode (probability variable), and a plurality of games are played in the first production mode (normal) and the second production mode (variable probability). It is possible to execute a continuous notice (effect notice effect, role object action notice effect) in which a predetermined effect (effect image, role object action) is performed over the effect, and the game effect is that the special game may be executed. and a second effect pattern (no reach) suggesting that the special game is not executed, and in the first effect mode (normal) When the second production mode (probability variation) is more than the second production mode (variable probability), the continuous notice of performing the predetermined production in the game production of the first number of times (two times) less than the second number of times (three times) is executed. In addition, the second effect pattern (no reach) is likely to be executed in the game effect of the notice target (the selection rate of the reach effect in the case of a loss in the prior determination and the determination in FIGS. 11 to 13: normal> probability variable, FIG. , Execution ratio of notice effect with normal change of notice target loss in FIG. 38: normal < probability change, FIGS.

◆ A fourteenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine comprises determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is established, and a Pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to play the special game, and effect control means capable of executing game effects according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination, and the effect control The means can be controlled in a first production mode (normal) and a second production mode (probability variable), and a plurality of games are played in the first production mode (normal) and the second production mode (variable probability). It is possible to execute a continuous notice (effect notice effect, role object action notice effect) in which a predetermined effect (effect image, role object action) is performed over the effect, and the game effect is that the special game may be executed. 1st production pattern (with reach) and second production pattern (without reach) suggesting that the special game is not executed, and when the second production mode (definite variable) In the case where the first production mode (normal) is executed in the first production mode (normal) than the second production mode (three times), the continuous notice of executing the predetermined production in the game production of the first number of times (two times) is executed. In addition, the first effect pattern (with reach) is likely to be executed in the game effect of the notice target (preliminary determination in FIGS. It is characterized by the execution ratio of the notice effect with the loss normal fluctuation of the notice target (FIGS. 39 and 40).

◆ A fifteenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine comprises determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is established, and a Pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to play the special game, and effect control means capable of executing game effects according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination, and the effect control The means can be controlled in a first production mode (normal) and a second production mode (probability variable), and a plurality of games are played in the first production mode (normal) and the second production mode (variable probability). It is possible to execute a continuous notice (effect notice effect, role object action notice effect) in which a predetermined effect (effect image, role object action) is performed over the effect, and the game effect is that the special game may be executed. 1st production pattern (with reach) and second production pattern (without reach) suggesting that the special game is not executed, and when the second production mode (probable variable) When the continuous notice of performing the predetermined effect in the game effect of the second number of times (three times), which is larger than the first number of times (two times), is executed in the first effect mode (normal) than In addition, the first effect pattern (with reach) is likely to be executed in the game effect of the notice target (preliminary determination in FIGS. It is characterized by the execution ratio of the notice effect with the loss normal fluctuation of the notice target (FIGS. 39 and 40).

◆ A sixteenth configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine comprises determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined condition is established, and a Pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not to play the special game, and effect control means capable of executing game effects according to the result of the determination and the result of the pre-determination, and the effect control The means can be controlled in a first production mode (normal) and a second production mode (probability variable), and a plurality of games are played in the first production mode (normal) and the second production mode (variable probability). It is possible to execute a continuous notice (effect notice effect, role object action notice effect) in which a predetermined effect (effect image, role object action) is performed over the effect, and the game effect has a high possibility that the special game will be executed. and a second effect pattern (no reach) suggesting that the special game is not executed, and in the first effect mode (normal) When the second production mode (probability variation) is more than the second production mode (variable probability), the second number of times (three times) larger than the first number of times (two times) than the continuous notice to perform the predetermined production in the game production is executed. In addition, the second effect pattern (no reach) is likely to be executed in the game effect of the notice target (preliminary determination in FIGS. It is characterized by the execution ratio of the notice effect with the loss normal fluctuation of the notice target (FIGS. 39 and 40).

(Technical feature of invention related to initial operation of various driving sources)
In a conventional game machine, when recovering from a power failure, the operation in the initial state was started regardless of the operation before the power was cut off. In such a game machine, when returning from a power-off state, there are cases where there are a plurality of modes of this return, so it is difficult to recognize in which mode the game machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ A first configuration for achieving the above object of the present invention is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine includes storage means (for example, main RAM 110c) for storing information related to games, effect control means (for example, effect control section 300) for operating effect means (for example, frame lamp 157) for executing effects, , and when returning from a power-off state of the gaming machine (for example, the state of (2) in FIG. 100), initialization of information stored in the storage means (for example, main RAM 110c) There is a first return (for example, initialization return in FIG. 103 (5)) and a second return without the initialization (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 101 (5)), and the effect control Means (for example, effect control unit 130m), when the first return (for example, initialization return of FIG. 103 (5)) is performed, the second return (for example, non-initialization return of FIG. 101 (5) ) is performed (for example, the light emission mode of FIG. 103(5)), the effect means (for example, the frame lamp 157) is operated.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ The second configuration for achieving the above object is implemented as the following game machine. This gaming machine includes storage means (for example, main RAM 110c) for storing information related to games, operation means (for example, production buttons 161) operable by the player, and operable movable production members (for example, movable production members 115). ) to operate the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 130m), and the game machine is provided with a power-off state (for example, the state of FIG. 100 (2)). A first return with initialization of information stored in a storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c) (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 103(5)) and a second return without the initialization (for example, the 101 (5) non-initialization return), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 130m) is, when the first return (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 103 (5)) is performed, The operation means (for example, production button 161) and the movable production member (for example, movable production member 115) are different from the case where the second return (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 101 (5)) is performed Operate according to a special operation mode (for example, the operation mode of FIG. 103 (5)), and change the operation mode of the operation means (for example, the effect button 161) from the special operation mode (for example, the operation mode of FIG. 103 (5)) When changing to the normal operation mode (for example, the operation mode of FIG. 103 (8)), the operation mode of the movable effect member (for example, the movable effect member 115) is also the special operation mode (for example, the operation of FIG. 103 (5) mode) to the normal operation mode (for example, the operation mode of FIG. 103(8)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ A third configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine has a game frame (for example, frame member 150) having a first light-emitting portion (for example, frame lamp 157) capable of emitting light, and a second light-emitting portion (for example, board lamp 116) capable of emitting light. A game machine comprising a game board (for example, game board 4) forming an area (for example, game area 4a) and storage means (for example, main RAM 110c) for storing information relating to a game, the game machine comprising: The recovery from the power-off state (for example, the state of (2) in FIG. 100) involves first recovery (for example, the state shown in (5) in FIG. 103) accompanied by initialization of information stored in the storage means (for example, main RAM 110c). )) and a second return without the initialization (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 101(5)), and the first return (for example, initialization in FIG. 103(5) 101(5), the first light emitting unit (for example, the frame lamp 157) and the second light emitting unit (for example, the board lamp 116) are switched to the second return (for example, the non-initialization of FIG. 101(5)). 103 (5)), and the first light-emitting portion (for example, the frame lamp 157) emits light in a special light-emitting mode (for example, the light-emitting mode of the frame lamp 157). 103(5)) to the normal light emission mode (light emission mode of FIG. 103(8)), the light emission mode of the second light emitting section (for example, the board lamp 116) also changes to the special light emission mode ( For example, the light emission mode of FIG. 103(5)) is changed to the normal light emission mode (light emission mode of FIG. 103(8)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ A fourth configuration for achieving the above object is implemented as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine includes storage means (for example, main RAM 110c) for storing information about games, and a plurality of movable parts (for example, left movable effect member 115A, middle movable effect member 115B, right movable effect member 115C). A game machine comprising a production control means (for example, production control unit 130m) to be operated, and the memory means for returning from the power-off state of the game machine (for example, the state of FIG. 100 (2)) (for example, the main RAM 110c) with initialization of information stored (for example, initialization return of FIG. 103 (5)), the second return without the initialization (for example, FIG. 101 ( 5) non-initialization return), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 130m) includes the plurality of movable parts (for example, the left movable effect member 115A, the middle movable effect member 115B, the right movable effect member 115C), at least one of the movable parts is subjected to the first return (for example, initialization return in FIG. 103(5)) and the second return (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 101(5)). is performed in the same movement mode (for example, the movement mode of FIG. 103 (6)), and the plurality of movable parts (for example, the left movable production member 115A, the middle movable production member 115B, the right movable production member 115C ) when the first return (for example, initialization return in FIG. 103(5)) is performed and when the second return (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 101(5) ) is performed in a different mode (for example, the mode of FIG. 103(5)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ A fifth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine has storage means (for example, a RAM 203) for storing information about a game, and a first image (for example, stage a display means (e.g., image display unit 114) that displays an image 61), and then displays a second image (e.g., customer waiting image 65) different from the first image (e.g., stage image 61); wherein the return includes a first return (for example, initialization return in FIG. 103 (5)) accompanied by initialization of information stored in the storage means (for example, main RAM 110c); , a second return without initialization (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 101(5)), and a case where the first return (for example, initialization return in FIG. 103(5)) is performed. 101(5)), the first image (eg, stage image 61) is displayed and then the second image (eg, customer Waiting image 65) is displayed (for example, the total time of time T1, time T2, time T3, and time T4 in FIG. 102 and the total time of time T6, time T8, time T9, and time T10) are different.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ A sixth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine includes determination means (for example, a main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and storage means (for example, a main RAM 110c) for storing information relating to the game. In the gaming machine, the storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c) stores the information about the determination as reserved storage, and restores from the power-off state of the gaming machine (for example, the state of FIG. 102 (2)) is a first return (for example, initialization return in FIG. 102(4)) accompanied by initialization of the information stored in the storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c) and a return without the above initialization. There is a second return (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 113 (5)) that is the return when the reserved storage is stored in the storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c), and the first return. (For example, the initialization return in FIG. 112(4)) is performed, and the second return (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 103(5)) is performed. For example, the display content (for example, the display content and the diagram of FIG. 102 (4)) on the display means (for example, the image display section 114) until the predetermined image (for example, the decorative pattern 41) is displayed on the image display section 114) 113(5)) is different.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ A seventh configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine includes determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and reservation storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c) for holding and storing information relating to the judgment. and, when returning from a power-off state of the gaming machine (for example, the state of (2) in FIG. 102), the reserve memory is stored in the reserve storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c). The first return (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 100(4)), which is the return when not performed, and the above when the reserved storage is stored in the reserved storage means (for example, the main RAM 110c). There is a second return (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 113(5)) which is a return, and the first return (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 102(4)) is performed, 2 In the case where the return (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 113 (5)) is performed, a predetermined image (for example, the decorative pattern 41) is displayed on the display means (for example, the image display section 114) from the above return. 102(4) and FIG. 113(5) are different from each other.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has recovered from the power-off state.

◆ The eighth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine includes determination means (e.g., main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and suspension storage means (for example, main CPU 110a) capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of information related to the determination as suspension storage. For example, a main RAM 110c) and an effect control means (for example, effect control unit 130m) for performing effects, wherein the effect control means (for example, effect control unit 130m) is the reservation storage means When the gaming machine recovers from the power-off state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 112(4)) while the reservation memory is stored in (for example, the main RAM 110c), the power-off state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 112(4) ) state), the display means displays the number of pending images (eg, the pending image 52 in FIG. 113 (7)) corresponding to the number of the pending memories stored in the pending storage means (eg, the main RAM 110c). (for example, the image display unit 114), and then the displayed reserved image (for example, the reserved image 52) moves along with the displayed reserved image (for example, the display of FIG. 113 (8)). It is characterized by reducing the number of images 52).
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when restarting a game after returning from a power-off state of the gaming machine.

◆ A ninth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine includes main control means (for example, main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and sub A gaming machine comprising control means (for example, effect control section 130m), wherein the main control means (for example, main control board 110) determines whether or not to play a special game based on establishment of a starting condition. can be determined, and a predetermined number of information regarding the determination can be stored as reserved storage, and the sub control means (for example, the production control unit 130m) is stored in the main control means (for example, the main control board 110) A number of pending images (eg, pending images 52) corresponding to the number of pending memories stored can be displayed on the display means (eg, image display unit 114), and a pattern (eg, decoration) according to the determination result During the variable display of the symbol 41), an execution image (for example, the variable image 51) suggesting the content of the information regarding the determination related to the variable display being executed can be displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114). When the main control means (for example, the main control board 110) stores the reserved memory and the gaming machine recovers from the power-off state (for example, the state of FIG. 112(4)), the display means (For example, when displaying the pattern (for example, decorative pattern 41) on (for example, image display unit 114) (for example, at the time of FIG. 113 (7)), the execution image (for example, variation image 51) is not displayed, and the above The holding image (for example, holding image 52) is displayed according to the signal transmitted from the main control means (for example, main control board 110), and the displayed holding image (for example, holding image 52) is moved and displayed ( For example, the display of FIG. 113(8)) is characterized by displaying the execution image (for example, the variation image 51).
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when restarting a game after returning from a power-off state of the gaming machine.

◆ A tenth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as a game machine as follows. This gaming machine includes determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to play a special game in the game, and display means (for example, the image display section 114) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and a plurality of symbols (for example, A game machine comprising a production control means (for example, production control section 130m) that performs a variable production that displays a decorative pattern 41), wherein the production control means (for example, production control section 130m) is the special game If the game machine does not turn off during the execution of the variable performance determined to perform, the pattern (for example, the decorative pattern 41) that starts the next variable performance of the variable performance being executed is a predetermined pattern row (For example, the arrangement of the decorative symbols 41 in FIG. 111 (18)) is displayed, and the gaming machine is in a power-off state (for example, the state in FIG. 117 (4) during the execution of the variable effect determined to perform the special game) ), the pattern (for example, decorative pattern 41) that starts the next variable effect of the variable effect being executed is a row containing different patterns (for example, the decorative pattern 41 of FIG. 118 (15) row).
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when restarting a game after returning from a power-off state of the gaming machine.

◆ The eleventh configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine includes determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the start condition, and effect control means (for example, effect and a control unit 130m), wherein the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 130m), when the game machine does not turn off during execution of the special game, the special game A special effect image (for example, a high accuracy notification image 77) is displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) during execution, and the gaming machine is in a power-off state (for example, FIG. 118 (10) during execution of the special game. )), the special effect image (for example, the high accuracy notification image 77) is not displayed during execution of the special game, and the special effect image (for example, the high accuracy notification image 77) is displayed. It is characterized by displaying an image different from (for example, hitting right image 83 during recovery).
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when restarting a game after returning from a power-off state of the gaming machine.

◆ A twelfth configuration for achieving the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine includes determination means (for example, the main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and symbols (for example, decorative Design 41) is temporarily stopped and then stopped to perform a variable production production control means (for example, production control unit 130m), a gaming machine comprising the production control means (for example, production control unit 130m) , When it is determined that the special game is performed and the gaming machine returns after the power is cut off during the execution of the variable performance (for example, the state of FIG. 117 (4)), the variable performance being executed 117 (6)) is terminated without temporarily stopping the symbol (for example, the decorative symbol 41).
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when restarting a game after returning from a power-off state of the gaming machine.

Incidentally, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, and can also be used for reel-type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

Moreover, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is an illustration and is not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

1 game machine 6a production button 16 image display device 17A-17C movable production member 110 main control board 130 production control board 130m production control section 140 image control section 150 lamp control section

Claims (1)

determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means upon establishment of a predetermined condition;
Prior determination means for performing a preliminary determination as to whether or not to perform the special game based on the game information before the determination is performed;
a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state;
A production control means capable of executing a game production according to the result of the determination and the result of the preliminary determination;
and an operation means operable by the player,
The production control means is
It is controllable to a first effect mode corresponding to the normal game state and a second effect mode corresponding to the specific game state ,
In the first production mode and the second production mode, it is possible to execute a continuous notice for performing a predetermined production over a plurality of game productions and a vibration production for vibrating the operation means ,
The game production is
any one of a first effect pattern suggesting that the special game may be executed and a second effect pattern suggesting that the special game will not be executed, and
When the continuous notice of executing the predetermined performance in the game performance of the first number of times smaller than the second number of times is executed in the first performance mode than in the second performance mode, the notice is targeted. The first effect pattern is easily executed in the game effect of
When a continuous notice of performing a predetermined effect in the game effect of the second number of times is executed in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode, the game effect to be announced is the The game machine is characterized in that the vibration performance is easily executed when the first performance pattern is executed .

Images